Home

Canon MF8450c Operation Guide

1. note Do not dampen the cloth too much as this may tear the document or damage the machine Cleaning the Feeder Automatically Cleaning the Machine Close the feeder If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder clean the rollers of the feeder note Use LTR or A4 paper as cleaning paper t takes approximately 30 seconds to clean the feeder 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Adjustment Cleaning gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings Report Settings System Management Set Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Feeder Cleaning gt then press OK Adjustment Cleaning Select Feeder Cleaning Back adueuajuleyy SIULUdIUIL Cleaning the Machine 5 6 7 Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder Confirm that lt Start gt is displayed then press OK Feeder Cleaning Start Cleaning The display returns to the Adjustment Cleaning screen Discard the cleaning paper after use NOTE The cleaning process cannot be canceled Please wait until it is completed Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen K Replacing the Toner Cartridges This section describes how to replace or handle
2. Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop Scanning Documents to a USB Memory This section describes the basic procedure for storing scanned documents to a USB memory Place your originals 7 Insert your USB memory to an 2 appropriate slot on the right side of the control panel Insert into one of the USB ports ZA LL Z S e OSES A AK 6o CAG 3 Press C Main Menu PuluuULDS V 8 7 n N S 5 J 5 Q 4 Basic Scanning Operations Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Scan to Store gt then press OK Scan to Store Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Store on Memory Media gt then press OK Select Store Type Store on Memory Media E Store on File Server 2 Store on Memory Media 35 Remote Scan t Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the media you want to store in then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt re Browse Memory Media Press Set to Set Destination Memory Media A Back 7 Make the scan settings you require Start Send Color File Format Settings A Documents and ia B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase
3. Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings QO Volume Settings Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wh Address Book Settings f Done 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings xe4 Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select User Settings TX Settings RX Settings Back V 5 69 Xej Adjusting the Pause Time 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Pause Time gt then press OK TX Settings Select ECM TX gt Nn a et Pause Time gt 2 Seconds a Auto redial gt 0n 7 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to set the pause time then press OK Pause Time You can also use numeric keys Seconds You can also use numeric keys to set the pause time 8 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 5 70 Cea 4 Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy Auto Redial Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient s fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line or if a sending error occurs Auto Redial can be turned on or off If you set Auto Redial to on y
4. Various printing features Printing from memory media Printing all files in folder Printing files by specifying date or extension p 7 20 p 7 21 and 7 24 20XX 12 01 lt gt gt 20XX 12 02 Y XX 12 03 7 2 Overview of Print Functions Various printing features Printing from a computer Scaling documents v Document EHEHE ANI LINN am E Reece ae iN s E e a asi 2 sided printing 67 1 Documents Iii NE Uy Multiple pages onto one sheet 7 2on 1 Documents Print 4on1 e Manual Poster printing Refer to Print note Functions such as the 2 on 1 2 sided printing and collating can be used in combination 7 3 Puud Puud 7 4 gt e D Introduction to Using Print Functions The Canon PCL5c PCL6 and UFRII LT printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 to print from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers This machine supports two types of printer drivers Hewlett Packard s PCL Printer Control Language printer driver including the PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers and Canon s UFRII LT Ultra Fast Rendering Il Lite printer driver For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network see Network Connection in the Starter Guide For ins
5. gt Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forward w o Condition gt then press OK lt All ear Register Forward w o Condition Erase Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Forward Without Conditions Send by Fax 8 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the forwarding destination then press OK Register Forward w o Condition Erase note You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time To forward to multiple destinations select a group address You can use or P to restrict the displayed range of destinations To be able to select a forwarding destination it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand See Storing Editing Address Book on p 3 2 To cancel a selected destination select the destination again Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Address Press Set to Set Destination O Canon USA 031x0000 O Sales I FA 1003 ifax O E Sales FTP 1004 ftphost w i Sales GROW Set Forwarding Received Fax Documents 10 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the file format of the document you want to forward File Format Send as TIFF TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages PDF Do Not Divide into Pages Back Divide Pages lt TIFF gt Forwards the f
6. lt Original Type gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See Selecting Image Quality on p 5 45 lt 2 Sided Originals Settings gt Scans two sided originals for sending See 2 Sided Original on p 5 47 9 10 Standard Send Settings note You do not need to specify lt Color File Format Settings gt This setting is disabled when sending faxes Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt Register Color Mode Settings E a B amp W TIFF 200x200 aot al Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Register Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 5 77 xe4 xe4 5 78 Standard Send Settings Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings note All settings including lt Color File Format Settings gt are restored to their default settings 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK 3 Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings A Communications Settings ai Address Book Settings Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK 4 Communications Settings Select C
7. If you want to send scanned images by e mail refer to E mail in Chapter 6 on p 6 1 Scanning documents to a memory media e Manual Refer to Scan Network ScanGear Shared folder Networked computers Scanning documents to a file server e Manual e Refer to Scan Scanning documents from a networked computer e Manual e Refer to Scan Use the Network ScanGear to scan from a networked computer Settings for the Network ScanGear are as follows Basic Settings Image Processing Settings Color Mode Density Resolution Dapartment ID Managemant Original Size Password Option negative positive Reverse Mirror Image Rotate Image Brightness Contrast Gamma Various sending functions File server Specifying destinations e Refer to Scan Using the address book Broadcasting AAAAA gt BBBBB CCCCC Sending 2 sided original Favorites e Manual e Manual e Refer to Scan e Refer to Scan Delayed sending e Manual e Refer to Scan Overview of Scanner Functions 8 3 Buluueds Buluueds 8 4 D gt Introduction to Using Scanner Functions This section describes the things that you must do before using scanner functions Be sure to set the following items first For Scanning Documents to a File Server Network settings Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the ne
8. Send Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 09 30 Seq 1 Sending 0001 09 20 Sales Waiting 0003 09 20 Sales Waiting Details Cancel Check the details of the selected job Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0002 Status Sending Set Time 07 30 2008 09 30 Dept ID Destination 7 8 W if you want to erase the selected job 1 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt then go to the next step Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0002 Status Sending Set Time 07 30 2008 09 30 Dept ID Destination W If you complete this procedure 1 Go to step 8 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected then press the right Any key to select lt Cancel gt Send Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 09 30 Seq 1 Sending 0001 09 20 Sales Waiting 0003 09 20 Sales Waiting Details Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to cancel Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory xe4 5 139 xe4 Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory Checking Deleting Fax Reception Documents You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being received or waiting to be received then delete unwanted documents as necessary You can also forward
9. Change File Selection Display Select Print Settings 7 20 9 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Conditions gt then press OK Set File Selction Method Currernt Level File Filter Normal Specify Conditions Back 10 Press OK to select lt Select All gt Specify Filter Conditions Select all Files Specified Date Specify Date Select All Specify Extension Specify Ext Select All Back Selecting Files by Date Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting then press OK 11 Start Print Color Mode Settings Color Drawer 1 LTR Layout Off Copies Print Date Off Print File Name Off note For details about lt Print Settings gt see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media on p 7 14 Press Start to start printing When printing is complete remove the memory media note Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point 12 You can print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates or all files on the specified dates 7 Insert a memory medium into the slot 2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up 3 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or
10. Tel Number Mark FAX Back 10 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Inside gt or lt Outside gt then press OK Printing Position Print TX Terminal ID Outside Image Inside Back lt Inside gt The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient s paper lt Outside gt The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient s paper xe4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select 1 1 lt Tel Number Mark gt then press OK TX Terminal ID Select Printing Position Outside Tel Number Mark FAX Back V 5 81 Xej 5 82 12 13 Printing the TX Terminal ID Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt FAX gt or lt TEL gt then press OK Tel Number Mark Use FAX Before Fax Number FAX TEL Back lt FAX gt FAX is printed before the fax number lt TEL gt TEL is printed before the telephone number Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen lt Adjusting Sharpness This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast The default setting is lt 0 gt 7 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt Select Fax Settings Back Device Info 5 Use V
11. Text Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Default Screen for Send Favorites One touch p 5 85 Default Screen ene li TX _ N Yes sbuljjas aulydey 13 9 sbulqjas aulydey 13 10 Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page On Fixed Reduction p 5 93 Reduce Direction Vertical and Horizontal Vertical Only Received P Foot Off Ma j e On Toner Out Continuous Print Off On p 5 98 YCbCr Receive Gamma Val Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 2 E mail p 5 16 Register Unit Telephone Max 20 characters o p56 Pulse p 5 13 Tone ECM TX Off Set Pause Time 1 to 15 Seconds 2 e Manual Fax Auto redial Off On Redial Times 1 to 10 Times 2 p 5 71 Redial Time 2 to 99 Minutes 2 TX Error Redial Off On heck T f i ECM RX Off Setting Menu Reception Mode Selection Auto RX Fax TEL Auto Switch Manual RX Answer Mode DRPD Select Fax Incoming Ring Off On 1 to 99 seconds 2 p 5 102 Remote RX Off Manual Auto Switch Off 5 106 On 1 to 99 seconds 15 m B E a Address Book Settings Applicable Page Register Address Register Name Max 16 characters Destination Registration Max 120 characters p 3 2 ECM TX Off On Sending Speed 33600bps 14400bps 9600bps 4800bps Long Distance Domestic Long Distance 1 Long Distan
12. Details Register Erase 6 Favorites Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the name If you press lt Set gt without entering any characters the key name reverts to its current name default M1 to M4 For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 5 55 xe Xej 5 56 Favorites Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen 1 Press __ Main Menu Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func 3 Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New FAES One touch note For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Register Favorites gt then press OK D amp Register Favorites w 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 Delayed Send Off c Direct Send Off Favorites t Back Confirm Erase Add Destination note The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to register then press th
13. Registering Fax Numbers in One Touch This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in one touch note This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to One touch gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt iain I O Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings gf Communications Settings Rs Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual 4 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register One touch Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to s
14. Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt TX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings J Select 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select TE lt Communications Settings gt then press OK RX Settings Back Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Volume Settings E Common Settings Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 6 7 8 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Check Tone Before Sending gt then press OK TX Settings Select Check Tone Before Sending gt On Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Confirm Dial Tone Before Send Dial After Dial Tone Confirmation Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Checking the Dial Tone before Sending 5 75 xe4 xe4 4 Standard Send Settings This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function Storing the Standard Send Settings You can store the standard send settings The default settings are as follows lt Resolution Settings gt 200 x 200 dpi lt Density Background Removal gt 0 lt Original Type gt Text lt 2 Sided Originals Settings gt Off 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communic
15. Scroll Wheel to select lt Direct Print gt then press OK Direct Print Additional Func Puud 7 21 Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select Select the files by specifying dates 5 the desired memory medium then press OK W if you want to print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates Select Memory Media Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select Select this Memory Media lt Specified Date gt then press OK Memory Media A Specify Filter Conditions Filter By Date and Display File Select All Specified Date Memory Media B Back Specify Date Select All Index Print J Specify Extension Specify Ext Select All Press the left Any key to select lt Display Back 6 Select gt 2 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select Browse Folder File the start date then press OK Select this Folder Selected 0 Copies J Up jpg 0212_use tif 0212_use O DSC00034 JPG Display Select Jf Print Settings J Specify Date Range From 2007 05 13 2007 05 14 2007 05 16 2007 05 17 Back 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Change File Selection gt then press OK the end date then press OK Specify Date Range To 2007 05 13 Selected 0 Copies 2007 05 14 2007 05 16 2007 05 17 Bac
16. Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Daylight Saving Time Settings Use Daylight Saving Time Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Month gt then press OK Start Date Month to Start Daylig Week Final Day of the Week Sunday Back Set 10 11 Timer Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the month when the daylight saving time starts then press OK Month Start Date Month Selection January February March April May June Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Week gt then press OK Start Date Week to Start Daylight Saving Time Month March Day of the Week Sunday Back ulypew y Huls aojeg Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the week then press OK Week Start Date Week Selection Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Day of the Week gt then press OK Start Date Day of the Week to Start DST Month March Week Final Day of the Week Sunday Back Set V 1 25 aulydeW y Huls sojeg 1 26 12 13 14 Timer Settings Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the day of the Week then press OK Day Start Date Day Selection Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Start Date Day of the Week to Start DST Month March Week Final Day of the W
17. Apply Settings os Enter mm Erasing Shadows Lines Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Frame Erase Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 Book Frame Erase Color Balance Default Collate Off Copies 12 Mode Memory Preview Img 1 0 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1m 4 12 99 C Cancel Done a Avail Mem If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 1 1 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen uldo 4 47 Bulkdo gt Erasing Shadows Lines Binding Erase This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals note Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder as this may damage the originals The borders you do not select are attenuated when using this function You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function 1 Gy 4 48 Set an original on the platen glass For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Al 2 Additional Func 4 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to display lt Shadow Frame Erase Settings gt then press OK
18. Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point Puud 7 19 Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Selecting All Files in Folder You can print all files in the selected folder 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the folder that contains the files that you want to print then press OK Confirm that the access lamp has lit up Browse Folder File Select this Folder 3 Press _ Main Menu Seas CJ Up jpg 0212_use 4 tif 0212_use O Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 ee lt Direct Print gt then press OK Display Select OPE 7 Press the left Any key to select lt Display Select gt Browse Folder File Direct Print Select this Folder Additional Func Selected 0 a Copies tj Up jpg 0212_use tif 0212_use 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select L DSC00034 JPG the desired memory medium then press _Display Select_ _Print Settings _ OK Select Memory Media Select this Memory Media Memory Media A 8 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select Memory Media B lt Change File Selection gt then press OK Back Selected 0 Copies T Lia Change Display Method Index Print
19. Enter using the numeric keys oe 031XXXXXXX Register Space Backspace Register Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Sending Faxes x Sending Fax Documents This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents Basic Methods for Sending Faxes This section describes the flow of sending faxes 1 Place your originals 4 Use V AJ or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New a Enter File Server New Favorites One touch 5 Enter the fax number using 0 lt 9 and numeric keys 2 Press CD Main Menu iy Enter Fax with Numeric Keys F Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select set Destination Ly lt Send FAX gt then press OK Backspace Pause Tone E o Mok You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax a number For details about how to specify destinations Es see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Additional Func xe4 Sending Fax Documents 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Destination gt then press OK Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 03 1XXXXXXX Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook 7 Make the scan settings you require Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi j Density
20. Ifyou scan an original containing halftones such as a printed image using the lt Photo gt mode the moir effect a shimmering wavy pattern may occur In this case you can lessen this moir effect by using the sharpness mode See Adjusting Sharpness on p 5 83 f the original is a transparency select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 2 Press C Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New l gt Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J note For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are Use W A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Original Image Quality Settings gt then press OK D a Original Image Quality Settings w 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination xe4 5 45 xe4 5 46 5 Selecting Image Quality Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the image
21. One touch Name Max 12 Char Set Characters E mail 13 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 16 lt Destination Registration gt then press OK E mail Register New Addresses a Register Name gt Canon E mail a Register One touch Name gt F maill a Destination Registration gt f Register Storing Editing One Touch Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s e mail address E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the e mail address For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters email xxx com Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt E mail Register New Destination a Register Name gt EMAILI touch a One touch Button Name gt EMATLO002 Destination Registration gt amail xxx com Register If you want to register another e mail address repeat from step 5 yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 33 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 34 Storing Editing One Touch 17 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Press C Main Menu to return to the 18 Main Menu screen Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Canon E mail e mail xxx xxx 001 E maill 002 No Reg 0
22. Scroll Wheel to select the memory key that you want to delete then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Recall Color Balance Recall this Color Balance Register Erase 6 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK Register Settings Register Name Back J Register Erase 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Z Collating Copies You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order This function is useful when making handouts for meetings The default setting is lt Off gt Collate On Originals Three Copies of Each Page Collated in Page Order Collate Off Originals Three Copies of Each Page Grouped by Page E 3 note The Collate mode cannot be set if Envelope Transparency or Labels is selected as the paper type BHulkdo gt 4 57 Bulkdo gt Collating Copies 1 4 58 Set originals S KA cre oS ZL LES Z s7 IG A 3 Ta ws ELE oS oy A For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C__ Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Additional Func
23. lt Text gt For originals that contain only text Selecting Image Quality Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Original Image Quality Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 100 1 1 EF Text Photo Map H E Non 1 Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1 47 12 a Avail Mem 99 cs Cancel Done j If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen BHulAdo gt 4 35 BHulkdo gt 4 36 L Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 This mode enables you to reduce multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper one sided two sided You can make well organized copies by copying multiple originals onto one sheet This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy papers and it is also useful for saving space The default setting is lt Off gt S 20n1 Originals Copy or 40n1 Originals Copy note The Non 1 mode cannot be used with the Original Frame Erase mode Book Frame Erase or Binding Erase mode For details about the erase mode see Erasing Shadows Lines on p 4 41 The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size 7
24. sse Checking Mode Memory cces00 Deleting Mode MeMory sesecsesees Changing Standard Mode 0 Initializing Standard Mode Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy LOG6 sscssscsssseeees Checking Copy JODS ccsscssecscsseeees Canceling Copy JODS sssesssesssesssesssessse Checking Copy LOGS cssssssesececssseees By RAM PPE EEE AOE E Overview of Fax Functions 0 Introduction to Using Fax Functions Methods for Receiving Faxes Selecting the Receive Mode Setting the Current Date and Time Setting the Type of Telephone Line Registering the Machine s Name Registering Your Machine s Fax NUMIDET scxssesesssetesccetnezesterevencsusetinaeess ouate Sending Fax Documents sscese0 Basic Methods for Sending Faxes Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents Manual Sending Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing 5 21 Dialing an Overseas Number With FAIS S E E E A TT 5 22 Basic Methods for Sending l Faxes 5 25 Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes 5 27 Canceling Sending Fax Documents 5 29 Specifying Destinations cccscsseeees 5 30 Specifying a New Fax Numbet 000 5 30 vi Using the Address Book csssseseseseeeeen 5 32 Using the One TOUCH uu eesesesseseeeseseeeeees 5 34 Using the Group Addresses ccceeeee
25. Facsimile Automatic fallback Transmission Reception Memory More than 1000 pages total pages of transmission reception Fax Resolution lt 200 x 100 dpi gt 203 pels in x 98 lines in 8 pels mm x 3 85 lines mm lt 200 x 200 dpi gt 203 pels in x 196 lines in 8 pels mm x 7 7 lines mm lt 200 x 400 dpi gt 203 pels in x 391 lines in 8 pels mm x 15 4 lines mm lt 400 x 400 dpi gt 406 pels in x 391 lines in 16 pels mm x 15 4 lines mm Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Speed dialing Address Book dialing 100 destinations One touch speed dialing 200 destinations Group dialing 299 destinations Color imageCLASS MF8450c Speed dialing One touch speed dialing 200 destinations Group dialing 199 destinations Regular dialing with numeric keys Automatic redialing Manual redialing Recalling from the log Sequential broadcast Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c 301 destinations Color imageCLASS MF8450c 201 destinations TTI Transmit Terminal Identification Receiving Automatic reception Remote reception by telephone Default ID 25 Report ACTIVITY REPORT after every 40 transactions TX Transmission RX Reception REPORT The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN currently supports 28 8 Kops modem speed or lower depending on telephone line conditions 2 Based on ITU T Standard Chart No 1 JBIG standard mode Telephone Connection External t
26. K Laser Safety This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 This means that the machine does not produce hazardous radiation Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States A CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the machine and is not in a user access area DAN G ER Invisible laser radiation when open AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM C AUTI O CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM ATTENTIO RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE DE CLASSE 3B EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITEZ L EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU VO RSICH UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM
27. Off On Writable SNMP2 Off On Printer Mgt Info from Host Off On Dedicated Port Settings On Off Startup Time Settings 0 to 300 seconds 0 Auto Detect On Off e Manual Communication Mode Half Duplex Network Settings Full Duplex Ethernet Type 10Base T 100Base TX SMTP Receive Off On Off On SMTP Server Max 48 characters E mail Address Max 64 characters POP Server Max 48 characters POP Address Max 32 characters POP Password Max 32 characters POP interval 0 to 99 minutes 0 sbulqjas aulydey 13 25 sbuljjas aulydeyy 13 26 Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page Authentication Encryption e Manual SMTP Authentication Network Settings On Send Data Size Limit 0 to 99 MB 3 Divide TX Data Oversize Off e anda _ On Fax E mail Default Subject Max 40 characters Attached Image Send Start Speed 33600bps 14400bps 9600bps 7200bps 5 89 4800bps 2400bps a Receive Start Speed 33600bps 14400bps 9600bps 7200bps 5 110 4800bps 2400bps i Memory Lock Settings Off On Memory Lock Password Max 7 digits Report Print Off p 5 112 On Memory Lock Time Settings Do not Specify Specify Setting Menu Forwardngsetings e Forwarding Condition Setting Fax l Fax Forwarding Condition disregard equals differs from begins with ends with contains does not contain Forwarding Destination
28. Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK 2 Additional Func Press the left Any key to select lt Mode Memory gt Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 mm C LTR E1 Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the mode memory key that you want to delete then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Recall Mode Memory Recall this Mode Memory Register Erase 5 6 7 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK Heo Mm Heo m2 g Panty Register Settings Register Name Ge m Bee Details Register Erase j Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen BHulAdo gt Bulkdo gt E Changing Standard Mode The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON or when 4 Reset is pressed You can change the Standard mode to suit your needs The default settings are as follows 1 2 lt Color Mode Settings gt Auto color Select lt Density Background Rem Set gt 0 lt Various 2 Sided Settings gt Off lt Copy Ratio Settings gt 100 lt Paper Source Settings gt Drawer 1 LTR lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Text Photo Ma
29. Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select AT Send Store O Fax T Print O Receive Device Info Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Log gt then press OK Copy amp Select Job Status Log Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired job then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Copy Job Log Select Job with Up Down Keys 0003 11 14 2x 15 OK 0002 11 22 5x 15 OK 0001 11 26 2x 15 OK Details 5 Check the copy log then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0001 Result OK 1999 01 01 18 07 1999 01 01 18 12 0000001 Done e 6 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Start Time End Time Dept ID BHulkdo gt l 4 71 Confirming and Canceling Copy Jobs Confirming Copy Logs Bulkdo gt E Fax Overview of Fax FUMCtIONS csssssssssesssssssssessssssssecessesessssssecssssescsesees 5 2 Introduction to Using Fax FunctionsS s ssssssssssssessssosssosssoosssosssoosssoss 5 4 Methods for Receiving Faxes ssssssssssesssssssessessssssssessssssssessssssessssssseees 5 4 Selecting the Receive MOCE cessssssssssssesssssssesesessssssssessseessssssssesseesssses 5 9 Setting the Current Date and Time sesssssssssssssssssssessssesssssssesssseen 5 12 Setting the Type of Telephone Line csss
30. Selected 002 Copies Display Select Print Settings You can select data by entering the desired copy quantity with numeric keys instead of pressing OK You can select multiple data at once from one folder note You can not select the data contained in other folders at once Press the right Any key to select lt Print Settings gt Browse Folder File Clear this File Selection Selected 2 J Up camera w 10_10 jpg w 10_11 jpg Display Select Copies Print Settings In the lt Image Display gt mode the screen below appears Clear This File Selection 10_10 jpg a Selected 002 Copies 1 R Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting then press OK Start Print Color Mode Settings Color Drawer 1 LTR Layout Off Copies Print Date Off Print File Name Off The followings are the settings that can be made lt Color gt Selects full color or B amp W lt Drawer 1 gt Selects paper for printing lt Layout gt Specifies the layout note To make this setting see the detailed procedures in the next page Printing from Memory Media Direct Print lt Copies gt Selects print quantity lt Print Date gt Prints the shooting date on W if you select lt Layout gt data NOTE To make this setting see the detailed procedures
31. Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s e mail address E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the e mail address For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 12 13 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters e mail xxx com Wm 1234567 Sym abcdefg 90 ij vw IJ Va 8 h u H U k p t X 6 G K P T X nanna lm yzi LH Yz Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt E mail Register New Destination a Register Name gt E MATLO001 Destination Registration gt a mail xxx com Back Register If you want to register another e mail address repeat from step 6 Storing Editing Address Book 14 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 15 Register New Destination Select Fax E mail Fax File Group Done Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 39 oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 10 Storing Editing Address Book Registering Fax Addresses in the Address Book This section describes the procedure for registering l fax addresses in the Address Book note This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register de
32. You can specify the following settings lt Color File Format Settings gt Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending See Scan in the e Manual lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt Scans two sided originals for sending See Scan in the e Manual lt Send Document Name Settings gt Sets the name of the document for sending See Scan in the e Manual Press Start Start Send Color File Format Settings A Documents and ia B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes 10 Basic Scanning Operations Press Start Color File Format Settings 4 Documents and aa B am
33. a Avail Mem Q amp ao Cancel Done Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop lt ECM Transmission ECM Error Correction Mode is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise ECM reduces errors when sending faxes in a poor telephone line condition The default setting is lt On gt note To communicate using ECM make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines Even when ECM is activated errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection If there is trouble with the line it will take more time to send the documents 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt aia Common Settings a Copy 4 Back xe4 5 Use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings e Select 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select Tee TET lt Communications Settings gt then press OK RX Settings Back Additional Functions Sel
34. 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination You can specify the following settings _ lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See Selecting Resolution on p 5 41 lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See Adjusting Density on p 5 42 lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See Selecting Image Quality on p 5 45 lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt Scans two sided originals for sending See 2 Sided Original on p 5 47 lt Delayed TX Settings gt Sends scanned documents at a specified time See Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending on p 5 49 lt Direct Send Settings gt Sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned See Direct Sending on p 5 52 lt Register Favorites gt Stores frequently used send settings for future use See Favorites on p 5 54 xe4 5 18 8 Press amp Start Start Send Resolution Settings 03 1XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cance
35. 13 18 Setting Menu Adjustment Cleaning Feeder Dirty Auto Correct Off On First Calibration Off On ACS Function Adjustment ee e Manual Platen Glass Color Priority B amp W Priority 0 Maintenance Platen Glass Color Priority B amp W Priority 0 Image Special Processing Off Level 1 Level 2 On Special Mode P Off On Fixing Unit Cleaning Start Cleaning p 11 3 Setting Menu Report Settings TX Report Only When Error Occurs Activity Report Display Send Original Off On Color Send Original Display Off On Auto Report Off On e Manual Applicable Page Introduction of the On RX Report Off On Only When Error Occurs pitt a Address Book No Yes One Touch No Yes User s Data List No 13 2 esbat mts System ManagementSettings ee Srem managermtos o Device Info Settings a Location Information Max 32 characters Dept ID Management Off e Manual On Security sbuljjas aulydey 13 19 Setting Menu O Regiseroepaomass OOO OO e umowe OOOO O O Total Prints Off On 0 to 999999 0 Total Color Print Off On 0 to 999999 0 Total Black Off On 0 to 999999 0 Color Copy Off On 0 to 999999 0 Color Scan Off On 0 to 999999 0 Color Print Off On 0 to 999999 0 Black Copy Off e Manual On 0 to 999999
36. 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm Min 5 x 5 5 128 mm x 139 7 mm Max 4 4 Ib 2 kg One sided scanning 1 page 13 to 34 Ib 50 to 128 g m One sided scanning more than 2 pages 13 to 28 Ib 50 to 105 g m Two sided scanning 17 to 28 Ib 64 to 105 g m Quantity 1 sheet Max 50 sheets Max 30 sheets for LGL originals When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies use a piece of plain white paper to cover the original after placing it face down on the platen glass 2 When copying two sided originals only LTR LGL FLSC A4 can be used 3 17 to 34 Ib 64 to 128 g m2 for paper smaller than LTR A4 4 17 to 28 lb 64 to 105 g m2 for paper smaller than LTR A4 gt 20 Ib 75 g m paper Do not place the originals on the platen glass or in the feeder until the glue ink or correction fluid on the originals are completely dry Remove all fasteners staples paper clips etc before loading the originals in the feeder To prevent original jams in the feeder do not use any of the following Wrinkled or creased paper Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Curled or rolled paper Coated paper Torn paper Onion skin or thin paper Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer Transparencies K Scanning Area Make sure your originals text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there m
37. 5 115 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 5 117 Specifying Forwarding Setting 5 117 Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination cccecsseseseeeees 5 129 Handling Documents with Forwarding ErrOrs ssssssssesssssscscssssseseesess 5 131 Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors ssssssssesssssscscsssssesesess 5 133 Checking Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors 5 135 Checking Changing the Status of Fax DOCUMENTS IN MEMOLY ccscssrecsssscesees 5 138 Checking Deleting Fax Transmission Bio aU ep io1p icceemerner ene een eernn ee eer ern 5 138 Checking Deleting Fax Reception Documents sessessesssssesssessessessessesseseosersesseess 5 140 Checking Printing the Fax Log 5 141 Contents 6 E mail cccescccccescscccccccescscsccseses On I Overview of E Mail Functions 008 6 2 Introduction to Using E Mail Functions 6 4 Basic E Mail Operations sccssscessscesees 6 5 Sending E Mail DOCUMENTS ceceeeseeees 6 5 Canceling Sending E Mail Documents 6 7 PA aa a TEE 1 Overview of Print Functions sessessessesoese 7 2 Introduction to Using Print Functions 7 4 Printing Documents from Computer 7 5 Scaling Documents sssccssscesssccsssecsseeees 7 7 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 7 9 2 Sided Printing sccsscccsssccsssccssrcesssees 7 10 Printing from Memory
38. 5 95 xe4 Xej 4 Printing Footer Information on a Received 1 2 3 Document Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func Device Info Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select I O Paper Settings Q21 Volume Settings Common Settings A Communications Settings a Address Book Settings Done 4 6 You can set whether the machine prints the date day and time received transaction number and page number at the bottom of the received document The default setting is lt Off gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Fax Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Received Page Footer gt then press OK RX Settings Select a 2 Sided Print gt Off a Receive Reduction gt On Received Page Footer gt Off Done 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Received Page Footer Use Received Page Footer Press __ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Printing Footer Information on a
39. Color Balance Default Collate Off E Copies 12 Mode Memory J Preview Img 8 Press Start 0002 lt P 1 Printing NOTE The default setting is lt 3 16 6 mm gt The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is lt 1 15 16 50 mm gt 100 E J LTR lf you want to change the value press Sheet Copies Print Status Clear before entering the new value 4 12 Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range a message prompting you to enter an a Avail Mem 99 ces appropriate value appears on the screen Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select platen glass set an original and press Start lt Apply Settings gt then press OK once for each page Set Frame Erase Width 9 Press CD Main Menu to return to the Location of Set Originals Top 3 16 Main Menu screen Left 3 16 Right 3 16 Bottom 3 16 Apply Settings Enter mm J Uniform Margin The display will return to the Copy top screen 4 44 Erasing Shadows Lines Book Frame Erase This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper note The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function
40. Dest 1 Page 2 Document Size Change LJ LTR a Avail Mem 98 C 2 Cancel Done Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt Basic Methods for Sending Faxes This section describes the flow of sending I faxes note The following conditions are always selected Paper Size LTR Sending Fax Documents This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient s machine can receive sizes other than LTR Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size File Format TIFF Resolution B amp W 200 x 100 dpi or B amp W 200 x 200 dpi 7 Place your originals 1 VIT yy Lae pa ZL DRL Lorn eZ f 2 Press CD Main Menu Wa lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter I Fax New gt then press OK Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Use the software keyboard to enter the l E fax address then press the right Any key x to select lt Set gt l Fax Address Max 120 char Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the l fax address For information on using the software
41. Ha You can also use numeric keys A 1 Seconds v 15 300 You can also use numeric keys to specify the duration The default setting is lt 15 Seconds gt 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt After Ring Action gt then press OK Fax Tel Auto Switch Select Ring Start Time 0 Seconds Fax Tel Ring Time 15 Seconds After Ring Action Receive Back Done 8 Introduction to Using Fax Functions 7 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends then press OK After Ring Action Automatically Switch RX Action Done Receive Back lt Done gt Disconnects the call lt Receive gt Receives a fax W if you specify the optional settings for lt DRPD gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt DRPD gt then press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Reception Mode Selection Set to DRPD Auto RX Fax Tel Auto Switch Manual RX Answer Mode DRPD Select Fax Option 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select a ring pattern then press OK DRPD Select Fax DRPD Double DOUBLE SHORT SHORT LONG SHORT LONG SHORT OTHER NORMAL Back Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen xe4 xe4 Introduction to Using Fax Functions Setting the Current Date and Time You can set the current date and time The current date a
42. If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly seessessesseesoessesseescesoe 12 22 Error Messages ssseesessssscccessssoccesssoooseses 12 25 Error CodeS esserne 12 30 If lt Set the correct paper gt is Te pce EE E 12 36 Reloading the Paper cscscsseseseesseees 12 36 Changing the Paper Size Setting 12 36 If a Power Failure OCCUIS cscsscsseeee 12 39 If You Cannot Solve a Problem 12 40 Customer Support U S A essseseeseessessesse 12 40 Customer Support Canada 06 12 40 13 Machine SettingS 00 13 1 Machine SettingS ccscccsssccssssesssccsssees 13 2 Printing USER S DATA LIST ecseeseeeseees 13 2 Accessing the Setting Menu 13 3 Setting MONU ccsscccsssrccsssccsssecessseseees 13 5 Paper SettingS essesessessessesseseosessessesessesseseess 13 5 Volume SettingS ssessesssessssssesseesseeseesserseess 13 6 Common Settings s sessessessessssessesseseesessessesees 13 6 Communications SettiINGS ceceseceeeseees 13 8 Address Book SettingS cccesssscsesescsees 13 11 Printer SettingS ssssessessesseseesessesseseosessess 13 13 Timer SettingS esessessesessessessesssscosesseseesesse 13 17 Adjustment Cleaning ssesssesssessseesseesserss 13 18 Report Settings ss ssssessessesseseosessesseseosessess 13 19 System Management Settings 13 19 14 AppendiX sseccsccccseccssc
43. Mem 99 Cs Cancel J Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 4 40 x Erasing Shadows Lines This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of Originals The following three Frame Erase modes are available Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase and Binding Erase The default setting is lt Off gt Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Copy LTR Book Frame Erase Selected Original Original Frame Erase Selected Original stmt Book Frame Erase Not Selected B Original Frame Erase Not Selected Binding Erase Binding Erase Selected Original Binding Erase Not Selected note Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set If you select one of these modes the previously set mode is canceled BHulkdo gt Bulkdo gt Erasing Shadows Lines Original Frame Erase This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy note The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 mode 1 WU N 4 42 Set originals For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C_D Main
44. OK Fax Select Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to transfer Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 5 6 Press the right Any key to select lt Menu gt Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forward gt then press OK 0006 11 03 0002 10 50 xe4 5 133 Forwarding Received Fax Documents Xej 5 134 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the destination then press the right Any key to select lt Start gt Set Forwarding Destination Start to forward to selected n Ea A A A a A A Canon USA 031X00000X Sales I FA 10030ifax EH Sales FTP 1004 ftphost tig Sales GROU Start note You can use or P to restrict the displayed range of destinations To be able to select a forwarding destination it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand See Storing Editing Address Book on p 3 2 Ifthe transfer is successful the document is erased from memory You cannot select a group address for transferring the document 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the
45. OK 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Start gt then press OK 4 Hang up the handset If you do not pick up the handset within the For telephone calls specified times You hear someone on the line Start your conversation When the incoming ring For fax calls tone stops the machine The machine receives fax documents detects whether the call is automatically a fax or telephone call within a limited time You can specify the length of the detection For telephone calls time in lt Ring Start Time gt The call ring tone is activated Pick up the handset to start your conversation e You can specify the length of ring time in lt Fax Tel Ring Time gt If you do not pick up the handset while the incoming ring tone is sounding the machine disconnects the call or switches to the fax receive mode You can specify which action is taken in lt After Ring Action gt note Ifyou want to change lt Incoming Ring gt see Setting the Incoming Ring Tone on p 5 102 Ifyou want to change lt Ring Start Time gt lt Fax Tel Ring Time gt or lt After Ring Action gt see Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 5 6 Introduction to Using Fax Functions Answer Mode In this mode the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records a message for telephone calls Before using this mode Make sure to do the following Connect y
46. Q sak a x a O Search Sie Favorites K 2B B amp B eS Address 2 http fixxx xxx xxx xxx _top html Remote UL Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Fes Device Name Product Name Color imageCLASS MF9170c Location Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Device Name 5 Product Nme Color imageCLASS MF9170c Location Wi Printer Ready to print Scanner O Ready to scan f Dd 2 wold S UIN S Fax O Ready to send or receiving fax Printer O Ready to print English g M Scanner O Ready to scan Fax Ready to send or receiving fax System Manager Mode re device and print jobs Language English System Manager ID Enter Department ID and Password Password O End User Mode Formation Enter Document User Name to control print jobs of the owner User Name Internet Internet 10 5 Dd e wold sSHUIN S 10 6 Starting the Remote UI H For User Management mode 1 Enter the User ID and Password and click OK Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sax x x a JO search ke Favorites B eB E Address amp http fixxx xxx xxx xxx _top html Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Device Na
47. SSS Q available not available 1 20 Ib 75 g m paper 2 From 19 to 24 Ib 70 to 90 g m 3 From 20 to 28 Ib 75 to 105 g m 4 From 28 to 32 Ib 106 to 120 g m 5 From 32 to 47 Ib 121 to 176 g m 6 20 Ib 75 g m 7 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine 8 Max 500 sheets of paper can be set in the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 Can be used for two sided copying note The default paper size is LTR If you use a different paper size you must change the paper size settings See Setting Paper Size and Type on p 2 20 27 eIp W JUL pue sjeuibno eIp W JUL pue sjeuibno Paper Requirements To prevent paper jams do not use any of the following Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Coated paper Torn paper Damp paper Very thin paper Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer Do not copy on the reverse side The following types of paper do not print well Highly textured paper Very smooth paper Shiny paper Make sure the paper is free from dust lint and oil stains Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool dry location Store paper at 64 4 F 75 2 F 18 C 24 C 40 60 relative humidity Use only the transparencies desig
48. Select this Folder Selected 0 a Copies J Up jpg 0212_use tif 0212_use 0 DSC00034 JPG Display Select J Print Settings j Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Change File Selection gt then press OK Selected 0 Copies Change Display Method Change File Selection Display Select Print Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Conditions gt then press OK Set File Selction Method Currernt Level File Filter Normal Specify Conditions Back 9 Select the files by specifying extensions W if you want to print only the selected files of the specified extension Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Extension gt then press OK Specify Filter Conditions Filter by Extension and Display Select All Specified Date Specify Date Select All Specify Ext Select All Back 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired extension then press OK Set Extension Filter by JPEG and Display Files 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the file that you want to print then press OK Select File Clear this File Selection Selected 2 Copies DSC00034 JPG DSC00069 JPG DSC00109 JPG DSC00110 JPG Display Clear Print Settings Printing from Memory Media Direct Print 4 Press the right Any key to select lt Print Settings gt Select Fil
49. Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select display lt Finishing Settings gt then press OK Finishing Settings 100 E L LTR l Frame Erase Off Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img J Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Set Collate Make Copies in Page Order Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Finishing Settings 100 mir 12 Frame Erase Off amp l Color Balance Default axy Collate On z Copies 12 Mode Memory J Preview Img Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E C LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1 4 126 Avail Mem 99 ces Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Making Multiple Copies This section describes how to make multiple copies display lt Number of Copies Settings gt then press OK 1 Set documents 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to amp Number of Copies Settings 100 J LTR l Frame Erase Off Gl Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img 5 Use 0 9 numeric keys V LA or Scroll Wheel to enter the desired copy For details see Placing Origina
50. V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch Name gt then press OK Group Register One touch Name Register Name gt Groaunfnni a Register One touch Name gt Uestination Kegistration gt 000 Register yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 45 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuNOIS Storing Editing One Touch 1 1 Use the software keyboard to enter the one touch name Button Name Max 12 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 12 characters for the one touch name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 12 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt One touch Name Max 12 Char Set Characters 13 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Group Register New Addresses a Register Name gt Group0001 a Register One touch Name gt Grount Destination Registration gt 000 Register j 3 46 14 15 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the destination to store in the group address then press OK Group Select Destination for Group lt A e E e e tk gt J FAXItouch 012300000000 EMAILItouc email xxx com IFAXItouch ifax xxx com HFILEItouch hostname To cancel a selected destination select the destination again and press OK to clear the check mark
51. and imageWARE are trademarks of Canon Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries All other product and brand names are registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of their respective owners Copyright Copyright 2008 by Canon Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of Canon Inc UFST Copyright 1989 2003 Monotype Imaging Inc XV SODIJON e6e7 SODIJON Jebe7 xvi Legal Notices Third Party Software This product includes software and or software modules that are licensed by third parties LICENSORS Use and distribution of this software and or software modules the SOFTWARE are subject to conditions 1 through 9 below 1 You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that the SOFTWARE is shipped transferred or exported into any country 2 LICENSORS retain in all respects the title ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE Except as expressly provided herein no license or right expressed or implie
52. and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded A CAUTION Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly If the guides are positioned incorrectly it may cause paper jams dirty prints etc Fan the paper stack and even the edges Loading Paper Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up Align the rear edge of the paper stack with the rear paper guide NOTE When loading paper be careful not to cut your fingers on the edges of the paper Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark A The paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper 20 Ib 75 g m3 eIp W JUL pue sjeulbliO eIp W JUL pue sjeulbBliOC Loading Paper 7 Hold the paper drawer with both hands 8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go and set it back into the machine note Be careful not to get your fingers caught For details on loading paper in the stack bypass tray see In the Stack Bypass Tray on p 2 15 Inthe Optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 When the optional drawer is installed in the machine follow the procedure described below 1 Pull out the optional paper drawer until it 2 Hold the optional paper drawer with both stops hands and remove it from the machine note Make sure to take the optional paper drawer out of th
53. and then press the Start key Set the correct paper Set the IP Address The counter has reached the set value Printing is not possible because the toner has run out Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the feeder The paper size is not appropriate for printing a report or list The paper ran out while printing a received document report or list This machine is not set with an IP address You cannot print because the set page limit for either scans prints or copies in the department ID management function has been reached Replace the toner cartridge See Replacing the Toner Cartridges on p 11 7 Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top Place the originals back into the feeder s original supply tray and press Start Set the paper size to lt LTR gt lt LGL gt lt STMT gt lt EXEC gt lt FLSC gt lt OFI gt lt B OFI gt lt M OFI gt lt G LTRR gt lt G LGL gt or lt Custom Size gt and then load paper of the same size Load paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen then turn the machine s main power OFF and back ON again See Network Settings or Setting Up the Machine in the e Manual Contact your system manager Error Messages Message Description ctio
54. disk drives and floppy disks The magnets inside the toner cartridges may harm these items Avoid locations subject to high temperature high humidity or rapid changes in temperature Do not expose the toner cartridges to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes Store the toner cartridges in their protective bags Do not open the bags until you are ready to install the toner cartridges in the machine Save the protective toner cartridge bags in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridges at a later date Do not store the toner cartridges in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays Do not remove the toner cartridges from the machine unnecessarily Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridges Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged Always hold the toner cartridges by their handles to avoid touching the drum protective shutter Do not place the toner cartridges in an upright or an upside down position If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridges it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridges Be careful of counterfeits It has been confirmed that there are counterfeit Canon toner in the marketplace Using a counterfeit toner may cause poor print quality or poor printer performance Please be advised that Canon is not responsible for any malfunction accident or damage caused by using non ge
55. in the next page lt Print File Name gt Prints the file name on data note To make this setting see the detailed procedures in the next page lt Vivid Photo gt Makes green and blue more lively lt Brightness gt Adjusts brightness lt Halftones gt Optimizes data for printing NOTE The print quantity is limited to one Only JPEG data can be printed Even if the selected files contain TIFF data only JPEG data is printed The print size is adjusted automatically to fit on one sheet of paper The order of the images in the layout cannot be specified This setting cannot be used with two sided printing A blank space for printing the date and file name is left below the printed image even if lt Print Date gt or lt Print File Name gt is set to Onn NOTE The lt Halftones gt default setting is lt Auto gt lt Gradation gt is suitable for photos taken with a digital camera and lt Error Diffusion gt is suitable for scanned images In lt Auto gt mode printing from a memory card is automatically processed with lt Gradation gt and printing from USB memory is automatically processed with lt Error Diffusion gt For optimal images select lt Error Diffusion gt when printing scanned images stored in memory cards When printing photos stored in a USB memory select lt Gradation gt lt Copies gt can be set up for each file but the other print settings ca
56. lt 33600 bps gt 1 Press C__ Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt System Management Settings amp Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done e Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press 5 Fax Setti h OK 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select ia lt System Management Set gt then press E mail l Fax Settings OK Fax Settings Additional Functions MEMUIY LUGK OELLITIYS amp Select Printer Settings Timer Settings i Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings 6 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select D System Management Set j Done lt Receive Start Speed gt then press OK Fax Settings If the System Manager ID and System Password Select have been set enter the System Manager ID and Send Start Speed System Password using numeric keys L22800 hns then press Log In Out to enter the System sna ol ab Management Settings menu Back 5 110 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired start soeed then press OK Receive Start Speed RX Modem Speed 33600 bps 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps If your document reception is
57. lt Remo RX ID gt 25 1 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt aia i Common Settings Fax Settings Xej Back Device Tira Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings amp Select User Settings TX Settings 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK RX Settings Back Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 5 104 Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone Remote Reception Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Remote RX gt then press OK RX Settings Select Remote RX gt On a Manual Auto Switch gt On RX Restriction gt Off Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Remote RX Enter ID No and RX Fax Doc Use V A or Scroll Wheel to enter a remote reception ID a combination of two characters using 0 to 9 then press OK Remote RX ID Ha You can also use numeric keys A 00 v 00 99 You can also use Q numeric keys to enter a remote reception ID The default
58. lt Set gt Windows SMB Enter User Name Host Name gt GANDER PRIVATE_GAND Folder Path gt sharel a User Name gt username yoog ssasppy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 17 oog ss appy Bun p3 BuNOIS Storing Editing Address Book Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt File Register New Destination Register Name gt SMB Destination Registration gt GANDER PUBLIC_GANDE Back Register If you want to register another file server address repeat from step 6 12 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Register New Destination Select Fax E mail Fax File B Group Done Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations as a single destination note You cannot register new destinations in a group address New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers e mail addresses l fax addresses and file server addresses You cannot register a group address in a group address This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as fo
59. lt Set the correct paper gt appears on the display the size of the paper in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray is different from that of the paper specified in lt Drawer 1 gt lt Drawer 2 gt or lt Stack Bypass Paper gt of lt Paper Settings gt You need to load the correct size paper or change the paper size in lt Drawer 1 gt lt Drawer 2 gt or lt Stack Bypass Paper gt of lt Paper Settings gt Only when the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 is attached note For print jobs you need to specify the paper size from your computer Reloading the Paper 1 Load the correct size paper as shown on the display then press OK to resume the job The machine re starts printing Changing the Paper Size Setting For the stack Bypass Tray If you set the standard settings for stack bypass tray follow the procedures below to change paper size Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select 1 lt Additional Func gt 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Paper Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select _J L Paper Settings 2 Volume Settings C Common Settings T Communications Settings ai Address Book Settings Done Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Stack Bypass Paper Std gt then press OK Paper Settings amp Select a tack Bypass Paper Std gt Off a Drawer 1 gt LTR
60. machines that support the l fax function e Manual e Refer to Fax Network PC Fax You can transfer data from your computer to the machine and send them by fax from the machine e Manual e Refer to Fax Remote UIl You can register and make settings for this product s functions over the network from your computer e Manual e Refer to Settings from a PC File server FTP You can scan documents to an FTP server e Manual e Refer to Scan File server File sharing You can scan documents to the computer s shared folder e Manual e Refer to Scan ngs trom a This chapter describes how to use the Remote UI functions Overview of Remote Ul ccccccccssscscsssssssssseees 10 2 Starting the Remote Ul cccccccccsssssssssssssssseees 10 4 Dd wold s HUIN S D Overview of Remote UI Remote Ul enables you to check the machine s status and manage the machine s functions from a computer on the network using a web browser Using the computer keyboard the management process such as entering addresses to the address book will be easier Remote Ul lt Device Status gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help mak O x 2 I eee gt 2S Back x a f A Search Ww Favorit tes 3 Pai Se A Address amp http jj xxx xxx xxx xxx _devmgr html El Color imageCLASS MF9170c To Top page Device Statu
61. near the exit and feed rollers Even if the machine is not in operation your hands hair or clothing may get caught in the rollers which may result in personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing Be careful when removing printed paper from paper delivery tray or when aligning it because it may be hot and result in burn injury Location Place the machine on a flat stable vibration free surface that is strong enough to support its weight Place the machine in a cool dry clean well ventilated place Make sure the area is free from dust Make sure the location is not exposed to high temperature or humidity Keep the machine away from direct sunlight as this can damage it If you have to place the machine near a window install heavy curtains or blinds Do not use the machine near water Make sure that no wet or humid objects come into contact with the machine Do not use or store the machine outdoors Do not place the machine near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields such as speakers If possible place the machine near an existing telephone line outlet for easy connection of the telephone line cord and to avoid the expense of installing a new outlet Place the machine near a standard 120 V AC 60 Hz power outlet Preface To ensure reliable operation of the machine and to protect it from overheating which can cause it to operate abnorma
62. see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet In this entry box enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job 3 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Host Name Max 128 characters Set Characters hostname Wm 1234 Sym abc 5 e r E R d opq BCD OPQ 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Folder Path gt then press OK FTP Folder Path Entry Host Name gt hostname Folder Path gt a User Name gt 5 Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder Folder Path Max 128 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 128 characters for the folder path For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Folder Path Max 128 characters Set Characters Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt User Name
63. to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Printer Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set J Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 4 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings amp Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Memory Lock Settings gt then press OK g Communications Settings amp Select a E mail l Fax Settings a Fax Settings a Memory Lock Settings gt Off Done If the Memory Lock Password has been set enter the Memory Lock Password using numeric keys then press OK 5 115 Xej 5 116 6 7 Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt then press OK Memory Lock Settings Use Memory Lock Option The received documents are printed Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Forwarding Received Faxes x Forwarding Received Fax Documents This machine enables you to automatically
64. to select the file format of the document you want to forward File Format Send as TIFF TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages PDF Do Not Divide into Pages Back Divide Pages lt JIFF gt Forwards the file in the TIFF format lt PDF gt Forwards the file in the PDF format NOTE This procedure is not necessary if a fax number or an l fax address is specified as the destination in step 12 Go to step 17 To view a TIFF file a software application that supports the TIFF format such as Imaging for Windows is required Jo view a PDF file Adobe Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader is required Press the right Any key to select lt Divide Pages gt File Format Send as TIFF TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages PDF Do Not Divide into Pages Back Divide Pages Forwarding Received Fax Documents 16 If you want to separate multiple images Press C Main Menu to return to the and send them as separate files each of 17 Main Menu screen which consists of only one page use W A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK twice Divide into Pages Separate Files and Send If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt then press OK twice When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions You can store the forwarding destinations of a receive
65. 0 Security Black Scan Off On 0 to 999999 0 Black Print Off On 0 to 999999 0 Page Totals Total Prints Total Color Print Total Black Prints Color Copy Color Scan Color Print Black Copy Black Scan Black Print Print List All Total Print Only Color Only Black Only All Clear No Yes Allow Unknown ID Printing Off On Allow Unknown ID R Scan Off On Allow Unknown Black Copy Off On On sbuljjas aulydey 13 20 NeworSetings OO ews SSS Tseng wadaresserngs SSS Manual Settings Off On IP Address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Obtain Automatically Off On DHCP Off On BOOTP Off On RARP Off On PING Command IP Address On e e C onsseneraares OOOO orstestbensntane OOOO Max 47 characters Canon nexxxxx represents the last six digits of a MAC address DNS Dynamic Update Off Settings On Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page e Manual Network Settings sbulqjas aulydey 13 21 sbulqjas aulydey 13 22 Setting Menu Off On Stateless Address Settings Off On On Manual Address IP Address Prefix Length 0 to 128 64 Default Router Address IP Address Use DHCP v6 Off On IPv6 address IP Address On e e Manual Network Settings Setting Menu Primary DNS Server IP Address Secondary DNS Serv
66. 04 11 06 40 Sheets x Copies 1 x 88 99 Done Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen uldo Bulkdo gt Confirming and Canceling Copy Jobs Confirming Copy Logs Canceling Copy Jobs You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed 1 2 4 70 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select AT Send Store Fax T Print O Receive Device Info Done j Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Job Status gt then press OK Job Status Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired job then press the right Any key to select lt Cancel gt Copy Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0001 06 40 1 x 99 Printing 0002 06 40 1 x 99 Waiting 0003 06 40 1 x 99 Waiting 0004 06 40 1 x 99 Waiting Details Cancel If you want to check the copy information press the left Any key to select lt Details gt 5 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to cancel Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Checking Copy Logs Confirming and Canceling Copy Jobs Confirming Copy Logs You can check copy logs that contain detailed information of finished copy jobs 1 2 3 4 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V LA or
67. A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 Check or edit the address details lt Register One touch gt then press OK Address Book List W if you want to check the address details Select 1 Check the details then press the right Any Register Address key to select lt Done gt Register One touch Back Fax Select a Name Display gt FAX1touch a Display One touch Name gt FAX0002 a Display Destination gt 012300000000 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the one touch you want to check or edit then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed WE if you want to edit the address details Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select t Canon Fax the item you want to edit then press OK No Reg Sales Development Done Fax Select a Name Display gt FAX touch a Display One touch Name gt FAX0002 a Display Destination GZ NOTE gt 012300000000 You cannot check or edit multiple one touch destinations at the same time Ifthe desired one touch is not displayed use V LA or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired one touch 2 Confirm that lt Edit gt is selected then press OK Edit Name Display Name Details 6 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select Canon Fax lt Details Edit gt then press OK Edit One touch Select Details Edit Erase Done Back 3
68. Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 6 Storing Editing Address Book 18 19 20 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 2 1 Press the right Any key to select the long distance setting then press OK lt Register gt Domestic Use Domestic Fax Register New Destination a Register Name gt FAX001 a Destination Registration gt 012300000000 Back Domestic Domestic 1 Domestic 2 Domestic 3 Back Register Select lt Domestic gt for dialing domestic local telephone numbers Select lt Long Distance 1 gt If you want to register another fax number if Communication errors frequently occur when repeat from step 6 you make overseas calls when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Book If errors persist try selecting lt Long 22 Distance 2 gt or lt Long Distance 3 gt Ragreter New Destiiation Select Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Option Select ECM TX On Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back 23 Press Co Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Destination gt then press OK Fax Enter using the numeric keys ah O123XXXXXXX Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Storing Editing Address Book Registering E Mail Addresses in the Address Book This section describes the
69. CD Status Monitor Cancel during transmission 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select E Copy A Send Store T Print O Receive Device Info 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Job Status gt then press OK Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to cancel then press the right Any key to select lt Cancel gt Send Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 09 30 Seq 1 Sending 0001 09 20 Sales Waiting 0003 09 20 Sales Waiting Cancel 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to cancel Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen xe4 Xej 5 30 Specifying Destinations This section describes how to specify a fax destination You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one touch or specify a new destination note If lt Restrict New Addresses gt in lt Restrict the Send Function gt in lt System Management Set gt under lt Additional Func gt is set to lt On gt you can only specify a destination using lt Address Book gt or lt Log gt If you select lt Log gt you can select only settings stored See Security in the e Manual The destination th
70. Canada technical specifications were met It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment Cet appareil est conforme aux Sp cifications techniques des quipements terminaux de l Industrie du Canada Ceci est confirm par le num ro d enregistrement l abr viation IC pr c dant le num ro d enregistrement signifie que l enregistrement a t effectu sur la base de la D claration de conformit indiquant que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques du Canada Ceci n implique pas que le produit ait t approuv par l industrie du Canada Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rur
71. Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 8 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen uldo 4 31 Bulkdo gt Enlarge Reduce Images Custom Copy Ratio You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio in 1 increments The available copy ratios are from 50 to 200 7 Set originals 5 Use A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Custom Copy Ratio gt then press OK Set Copy Ratio Copy on a Custom Size Custom Copy Ratio 100 Direct 200 Maximum 129 STMT LTR 78 LGL LTR 64 LTR STMT 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to adjust the zoom ratio in 1 increments For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 then press OK 2 Press C_D Main Menu Set Copy Ratio You can also use numeric keys 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK note If you enter a value outside the setting range a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen Additional Func 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Copy Ratio Settings gt then press 7 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the OK desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Copy Ratio Settings 100 mir 12 Custom Copy Ratio lal 7 Text Photo Map E E Non 1 Off Copy Ratio Settings E LTR 100
72. D Shadow Frame Erase Settings 100 E L LTR Frame Erase Off Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Zl Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Binding Erase gt then press OK Set Frame Erase Remove Hole Punch Shadows J off Original Frame Erase _ Book Frame Erase Binding Erase t Back 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR Originals LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes NOTE To switch to the inch sizes press the left Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the hole punch location then press OK Set Hole Punch Location Location of Set Originals Top 3 4 Left Right Bottom Back Enter mm NOTE To enter values in millimeters press the left Any key to select lt Enter mm gt Erasing Shadows Lines 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the frame erase width then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Adjust using up down or the dial 3 A v 37 16 13 16 note The default setting is lt 3 4 18 mm gt The maximum original frame erase width that you Can seus lt 13 16 Oi f you want to change the value press Clear before entering the new value Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range a message
73. Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 12p031 Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook If necessary use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Pause gt then press OK Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 12p031pXXXXXXX Set Destination Backspace Tone Hook note Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long Press Start Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 12p031pXXXXXXXP Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt xe4 5 23 xe4 5 24 Sending Fax Documents Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back AZB Sizes 1 1 Press Start Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 12p031pXXXXXXXP Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook 12 13 Follow the instructions on the display then press G Start once for each original 0002 P 1 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change DIR 99 Gos Cancel Done a Avail Mem When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 10002 Send Waiting to scan
74. Erase Add Destination Specifying Destinations XJ 539 Xej 5 40 Specifying Destinations 6 7 Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set note Only one new destination can be specified If you add destinations specify them from Address Book You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination Press amp Start Start Send Resolution Settings Sales 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c Stop Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes 9 10 11 Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings Sales 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0001 lt P 1 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 2 Page 1 Document Size Change DUR 99 G Cancel J Done a Avail Mem When scanning is complete press the ri
75. Erase gt Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item M2 M3 M4 Back Register Erase Keys registered as favorites are displayed with icons NOTE You can only erase a key with settings stored in the favorites You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select lt Details gt Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK Register Settings Register Name Erase Details Register Erase NOTE Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase note Key names are not erased You can change the name in lt Register Name gt Favorites Using the Favorites If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination store these settings in a favorites Then when you need to specify the destination all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination and send your document You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen note To use this feature you must first register the desired settings in favorites See Registering Favorites on p 5 54 For details on how to send the do
76. If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass tray and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass tray remove the paper or envelopes curl the feeding edges upward approximately 1 8 3 mm and then reload the paper or envelopes Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the machine from the stack bypass tray Feeding Direction gt If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load follow those instructions When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass tray the side facing down is the one printed on If problems such as poor print quality or paper jams occur try turning the paper stack over and reload it eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO V 2 17 eIp W JUL pue sjeulbBliO Loading Paper H if you are loading envelopes into the stack 3 Hold down the four corners of the bypass tray envelopes firmly so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat 1 Take five envelopes loosen them as shown and then stack them together Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes eS SSW F Q UO 7 2 Place the envelopes on a clean level note Do not print on the back side of the envelopes the side with the flap surface and press all the way around the Ifthe envelopes bec
77. Info Done G Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Fax 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Log Printer gt then press OK Print amp Select Job Status Log Copy Log RX Print Log Memory Media Print Log Report Print 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired log then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Print Log Printer Select Job with Up Down Keys 0008 09 34 0000002 PDL Pri NG 0255 09 34 0000003 PDL Pri OK 0008 09 34 0000002 PDL Pri NG 0255 09 34 0000003 PDL Pri OK Details 6unung 7 29 Puud Ly Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print Logs This chapter describes how to use scanner functions Overview of Scanner FUNCTIONG cccscccccceessssssecees 8 2 Introduction to Using Scanner Function 8 4 For Scanning Documents to a File Server 8 4 For Scanning Documents from a Networked COND WEEE eri RRE 8 4 Basic Scanning Operations cccccccrrcrrsscssssssssccceecs 8 5 Scanning Documents to a File Server esesesseeeeeee 8 5 Scanning Documents to a USB Memory cesses 8 7 Scanning Documents from a Networked COMI DURE a RRT 8 9 Buluueds m BHuluuedss Originals e Overview of Scanner Functions You can transmit scanned documents over the network to your computer You also can store scanned documents in a file server or USB memory
78. J Up camera o 10_10 jpg 0O 10_11 jpg Display Select Print Settings J If you select data which is saved outside the folder skip to step 8 note If you want to select the data from the displayed images press the left Any key to change the display method from lt Folder File Name Display gt to lt Image Display gt then press OK amp Set File Display Method Only Display Files on this Level i Folder File Name Display Lj Image Display t Back Printing from Memory Media Direct Print amp Select This File 10_11 jpg Selected 000 Copies Display Select Print Settings J You can select the desired data by sorting all data according to date or extension If you want to sort data by date see Selecting Files by Date on p 7 21 If you want to sort data by extension see Selecting Files by Extension on p 7 24 Bunuig 7 15 Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Bunuid 7 16 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the data that you want to print then press OK Browse Folder File Clear this File Selection Selected 2 tT Up Copies __ camera w 10_10 jpg w 10_11 jpg Display Select Print Settings J In the lt Image Display gt mode the screen below appears Use 4 P or Scroll Wheel to select the data that you want to print then press OK Clear This File Selection 10_10 jpg
79. Machine Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance Turn OFF the main power switch el Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the machine Disconnect the power cord from the machine 2 Disconnect the LAN and USB cables if any are connected to the machine 3 Disconnect the telephone cable and other cables from the machine if you connect your own telephone to the machine Telephone line jack If you are using the output tray extension fold the paper stopper and then push the output tray extension into the machine SDULUdIUIL 11 19 SIULUDdIUIL Transporting the Machine 4 5 11 20 Hold the paper drawer with both hands If you are using the stack bypass tray fold 6 and remove it from the machine stack bypass tray extension push back the auxiliary tray into place and then close the stack bypass tray NOTE Remove the Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 from the machine if it is installed To remove the Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 perform the installation procedure in reverse See the sheet Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Setup Instruction 7 Pick up the machine using the hand grips on the left right and back of the machine A CAUTION Be sure at least two people carry the machine Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments Dropping the machine c
80. Main Menu screen Forwarding Received Fax Documents Checking Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors You can check the details of fax documents that the machine failed to forward You can also erase and print those documents note Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if lt Store Image to Memory gt is set to lt On gt in lt Forwarding Error Settings gt in lt System Management Set gt See Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors on p 5 131 1 2 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select E Copy Send Store T Print O l Receive Device Info Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Error Status gt then press OK Fax amp Select Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back W if you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to check Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Menu gt Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt De
81. Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Shadow Frame Erase Settings gt then press OK Shadow Frame Erase Settings 100 E L LTR Frame Erase Off Se Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off 2l Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img J Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Original Frame Erase gt then press OK amp Set Frame Erase Copy Shadow Frame Line Removal J Off Original Frame Erase LIL Book Frame Erase Binding Erase t Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR Originals LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes NOTE To switch to the A B Sizes press the left Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt W if you want to set the same width for all four borders Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to enter a frame erase width value then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Ha Adjust using up down or the dial 3 16 Y 1 16 1_15 16 Enter mm j Adj Each Dim note The default setting is lt 3 16 6 mm gt The maximum original frame erase width that you Gaisetis nly lon sOnnim To enter values in millimeters press the left Any key to select lt Enter mm gt When entering the value in millimeters you can also
82. Menu screen xe4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning E Report Settings _ System Management Set Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 5 125 xe4 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 5 126 4 5 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the forwarding setting you want to erase Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off lt All a eae Fwd w o Cond l Fax sales 1 Press the left Any key to select lt Menu gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off aai gt Fwd w o Cond l Fax sales 1 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK gt Register e I Fax Forward w o Condition Erase Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase Pres
83. Mode Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs The default setting is lt Auto RX gt 1 Press C__ Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK xe4 lt Additional Func gt Additional Functions 2 Press the right Any key to select amp Select JZ Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings My coy 4 Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings f Done J 2 Device Info 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings Back Xej 5 10 Introduction to Using Fax Functions Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings amp Select User Settings TX Settings RX Settings Back 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Reception Mode Selection gt then press OK RX Settings Select ECM RX gt On a Reception Mode Selection gt Auto RX a Incoming Ring gt Off 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired receive mode then press OK Fax Tel Auto Switch Select Ring Start Time 0 Seconds Fax Tel Ring Time 15 Seconds After Ring Action Receive Back For lt Fax Tel Auto Switch gt and lt DRPD gt you can specify optional settings If you want t
84. Number is the Same As disregard Does Not Exist equals differs from begins with The available forwarding conditions are lt disregard gt Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition lt Does Not Exist gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist lt equals gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered lt differs from gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered lt begins with gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered lt ends with gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered lt contains gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered lt does not contain gt Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered If you select lt disregard gt or lt Does Not Exist gt goto step 11 10 11 Forwarding Received Fax Documents Enter the forwarding criterion up to 20 characters using 0 numeric keys then press the right Any key to select lt Register gt Fax Number Enter using the numeric keys 03 1XXXXXXX Register Space Backspace Register The following items are also available for entering the forwardin
85. One touch Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to register then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt l Fax gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select 7 8 9 Storing Editing One Touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Register Name gt Register Une touch Name gt a Destination Registration D Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon I fax A L GRR E aid ar ie oog ssaJppy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 35 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 36 Storing Editing One Touch Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch Name gt then press OK 10 Fax Register One touch Name Register Name gt fannnfT fay a Register One touch Name gt a Uestination Kegistration
86. Remote Ul cescceseceseees 10 2 Starting the Remote Ul scssscceseees 10 4 11 Maintenance ccccccssssosee 1 1 7 Cleaning the Machine ccssccsssseesees 11 2 D401 0 eraan 11 2 OCTO camer steer E tr en teeta 11 3 Scanning f a sessesseseesessessessossesessesseseosesses 11 4 Replacing the Toner Cartridges 11 7 When a Message Appears sssscsssceseseees 11 7 Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a NEW ONC aicsean 11 8 Recycling Used Cartridges ssseee 11 13 The Clean Earth Campaign ceccce 11 13 U S A PROGRAM scasceccesssinscasasseasasdansusaialvianss 11 14 CANADA PROGRAM CANADA PROGRAMME sirenaren 11 17 Transporting the Machine ssss000 11 19 12 Troubleshooting 0000 12 1 Clearing JAMS sscccssscssscesscccssccssscessees 12 2 Original JANIS cswscissveveesrsorssvavsedoussotevnelosarstotess 12 3 Paper Delivery Tray cscccscssssssssssssecssssseees 12 5 Duplex UN itsin 12 6 Stack Bypass Tray sssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssessse 12 8 Paper Drawer 1 ssessesessesseseessssessessesseseosessess 12 10 Optional Paper Drawer Paper DANT 2 asse a R 12 11 Inside of the Machine sssessssesssseesssesssses 12 13 FIXING UN Geensins 12 16 viii Back COVe f sssesssesssesssessseosseosseosseesserssersseesss 12 18 When the Message Does Not Disappeal sicvssevsasasisesapiesvsasevevenesssusvsaivensmers 12 19
87. STMT EXEC FLSC OFI B OFI M OFI G LTR G LGL Custom Size COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 ISO B5 p 2 20 A B Size A4 A5 B5 Paper Type Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Transparencies Labels Rough Paper Size Inch Size LTR LGL EXEC FLSC OFI B OFI M OFI A B Size A4 A5 B5 Paper Type Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 Rough a _ Paper Size Inch Size LTR LGL EXEC FLSC OFI B OFI M OFI A B Size A4 A5 B5 Paper Type Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 Rough Only when the Casette Feeding Unit AC1 Optional is attached 13 5 sbulqjas aulydey sbuljjas aulydeyy Setting Menu Volume Settings tem Settings Applicable Page Monitor Volume Settings Volume Key Settings Priority Screen Settings Priority Audible Tones ee Incoming Ring Off On 1 to 3 1 Entry Tone Off On 1 to 3 1 Error Tone Off e Manual On 1 to 3 1 Introduction of the TX Done Tone Off Machine On 1 to 3 1 Receive Done Tone Off On 1 to 3 1 Print Done Tone Off On 1 to 3 1 Scan Done Tone Off On 1 to 3 1 Common Settings Inilfunetionsetings Select Initial Function Main Menu Copy Scan to Send Scan to Store Direct Print e Manual Set System Monitor to Def Off Introduction of the On Machine On Copy Send Fax Scan to Send FAX E ma
88. STRAHL AUSSETZEN PRECAUCIO RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE DE CLASE 3B PRESENTE AL ABRIR EVITE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ _ y AR N N KLASS 3B OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD STRALENARFARLIG VAROITUS LUOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASER SATEILYA AVATTUNA VALTA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE 3 I _ FAM FEA DSBS EE AAR r o 22 48 Se 3B AltA HoH HAHM YELE HMO LSS TSA T gt G Ge Ce ee OU E hlcBee SENTE BUSSI Before Using the Machine Shia pis This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine such as the names of the parts and their functions and how to set up the machine to send receive faxes Machine Components ccccccccsssssscscccccccsssssssscccscsees 1 2 External View Front sssesssseseseesssessseessseeoseessseeesssessseess 1 2 External View BaCk sssessssessseesssessseesssesoseessseeesssessseess 1 4 E N a E error eee 1 5 Control Painel sissscscsisncasrcsiissansssaniscsrsssioscinescususeoncaacnis 1 6 Main Control PANG recsenenann aa 1 6 Registering the Custom Keys esssessessessssersssserssssersssseee 1 8 Left Side of the Control Panel ssssesssseesssseesssseesssss 1 10 Right Side of the Control Panel ses ssssessssseesssseessss 1 10 Display Parts ANd FUNCTIONS ccccccccsrrrsrrsrsssssssees 1 11 Main Menu Screen sesssessessesesooscoseossessesssessossesssosersseeseess 1 11 CODY TOP SGEE iniia 1 12 Send Type Selection Scr
89. Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt amp Select Common Settings Fax Settings Back Devices Tote 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings a Select Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select n lt Communications Settings gt then press TX Settings OK Additional Functions Select J L2 Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings C Common Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select A Communications Settings _ 6 lt RX Restriction gt then press OK a Address Book Settings Done Back Done RX Settings Select Remote RX gt On a Manual Auto Switch gt n RX Restriction gt Off Done J 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK RX Restriction Use RX Prevention lt Off gt Does not reject to receive faxes from unknown senders lt On gt Rejects to receive faxes from unknown senders Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders xe4 5 109 xe4 lt Receive Start Speed This function enables you to change the receive start speeds which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document The default setting is
90. Set originals LF Imp ja ZL DLS S SLs e OLE AAV G For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 NOTE When placing horizontal landscape originals into the feeder in the 2 on 1 mode place the originals bottom side up 2 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK A Additional Func 4 5 Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to display lt Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page gt then press OK D Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page E L LTR 100 1 1 aas Text Photo Map W E Non 1 Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the combination type then press OK Set Non Copy 2 Pages on 1 Page E Off Wj 20n1 mj 40n1 t Back Option lt 2 On 1 gt This setting reduces two 1 sided originals or one 2 sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet lt 4 On 1 gt This setting reduces four 1 sided or two 2 sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet If you select lt 4 On 1 gt you can specify the copy layout Press the right Any key to select lt Option gt then select the desired layout type BHulkdo gt 4 37 Bulkdo gt Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 6 7 4 38 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the origina
91. Specify a destination o lt Done gt to return to the previous Select Send Type New Fax Entry Rs Address Book Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J note For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 4 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to display lt Register Favorites gt then press OK Register Favorites t 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 Delayed Send Off v Direct Send Off Favorites t Back Confirm Erase Add Destination 5 63 xe4 xe4 g Job Recall You can recall the last three addresses scan settings and send settings which have been set in the lt Log gt and then send your documents note The settings such as destinations scan settings and send settings are stored in a log The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log Pressing the Start or Reset or C Main Menu Activation of the Auto Clear mode Turning OFF the machine Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory If lt Restrict New Addresses gt in lt Restrict the Send Function gt in lt System Management Set gt under lt Additional Func gt is set to lt On gt the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF If lt Re
92. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire note You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned off or the power cord is disconnected f the main power switch is turned ON all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected Exterior Clean the exterior of the machine 1 2 Ua Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Wipe the machine s exterior with a clean soft lint free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution Wait for the machine to dry then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch Cleaning the Machine Clean the machine s print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside Cleaning the Fixing Unit If black streaks appear on printed output the fixing unit may be dirty Also you should use the Fixing Unit Cleaning procedure every time the toner cartridge is replaced Print the cleaning pattern on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit note As cleaning paper LTR or A4 paper must be loaded in the paper drawer or the stack bypass tray Cleaning the fixing unit takes approximately 60 seconds 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Fixing Unit Cl
93. This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in one touch note This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to check or edit Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Confirm Edit One touch Dest gt then press OK Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7 yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt Select I O Paper Settings Q Volume Settings E Common Settings ff Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done J If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual gt 3 47 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS Storing Editing One Touch 4 Use V
94. Timer Settings Select You can set the interval from 0 off to 9 Date Time Settings minutes in one minute increments Auto Sleen Ti You can also set the interval using a uto oieep lime gt 15 Minutes numeric keys Auto Clear Time gt 2 Minutes Auto Clear Time You can also use numeric keys Done 2 Minutes v 0 0ff 1 9 6 Press CoD Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Setting the DaylightSaving Time In some countries or areas time is advanced throughout the summer season This is called Daylight Saving Time The default setting is lt On gt 1 Press Co Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Timer Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt OR Printer Settings Timer Settings i Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Date Time Settings gt then press OK Timer Settings Select Date Time Settings Auto Sleep Time gt 15 Minutes a Auto Clear Time gt 2 Minutes Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Daylight Saving Time Set gt then press OK Date Time Settings Select Current Time Settings gt 2008 07 01 15 50 Time Zone Settings Daylight Saving Time Set gt On Done
95. Use 4 or P to select the index key e g ABC to restrict the display range of entries Select All to return to the full address list Ifthe desired destination is not displayed use V LA or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired destination You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select lt Details gt to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen Repeat step 14 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Group Select Destination for Group qan ja gt e e jie e gt J FAXItouch 012300000000 EMAILItouc email xxx com e IFAXItouch ifax xxx com H FILET touch hostname Details Set Storing Editing One Touch 16 Press the right Any key to select 17 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt lt Register gt One touch Button Registration Select One touch to Register Ed Group Register New Destination 005 E SHB0002 006 tp GRP0002 007 008 a Register Name gt GRP 1touch a One touch Button Name gt GRP0002 Destination Registration gt 003 Register If you want to register another group address 18 Press D Main Menu to return to the repeat from step 5 Main Menu screen Checking Editing Addresses Registered in One Touch
96. Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the destination you want to check or edit then press the left Any key to select lt Edit Erase gt 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Register Address Switch Destination Index lt All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO gt g Canon Fax 03190000X Ca Sales sales xxx xxx Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings g Developmen 1004 ftphost BR Nasion Gro E Common Settings Edit Erase J Register New J Communications Settings aR Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual note You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time Use 4 or P to select the index key e g ABC to restrict the display range of entries Select All to return to the full address list Ifthe desired destination is not displayed use V LA or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired destination If you select All destinations registered in one touch are also displayed However you cannot delete those destinations For information on how to delete the destinations registered in one touch see Erasing
97. V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select User Settings TX Settings RX Settings Back G Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Manual Auto Switch gt then press OK RX Settings Select Remote RX gt On a Manual Auto Switch gt On KX Restriction gt Off 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Manual Auto Switch Auto Switch to Auto RX Use W A or Scroll Wheel to set the amount of time the machine waits before automatically switching to the document receive mode then press OK Fax Tel Ring Time Ha You can also use numeric keys Seconds You can also use numeric keys to set the time Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode xe 5 107 xe4 5 108 4 Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the 1 2 3 Unidentified Senders This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their fax numbers telephone numbers to your machine This can be useful when you do not want to receive direct mail DM The default setting is lt Off gt Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or
98. Wheel to scroll to the Display Destination desired destination gt 03 DO0000X Ifyou select All destinations registered in Back one touch are also displayed However you cannot edit those destinations For information on how to edit the destinations registered in one touch see Checking Editing Addresses Registered in One Touch on p 3 47 2 Confirm that lt Edit gt is selected then press OK T Edit Name 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Display Name Details lt Confirm Edit Address Book Dest gt then Canon Fax press OK Done aL LL Lb w Confirm Edit Address Book Dest Erase from Add Book Ly SS e I Edit Erase RegisterNew 3 22 3 Edit the address details Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters Canon USA FAX BAI Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations NOTE 8 For information on how to register fax numbers see Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book on p 3 2 For information on how to register e mail addresses see Registering E Mail Addresses in the Address Book on p 3 7 For information on how to register l fax addresses see Registering Fax Addresses in the Address Book on p 3 10 For information on how to register file server addresses see Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book on p 3 12 For informat
99. access to the folder 0806 An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e mail message or l fax Change the user name or password See Specifying a New Destination Scan to File Server in the e Manual Check the e mail or l fax address Huljoouseajqnoly 12 33 Huljoousajqnoly 12 34 Error Codes Error Code 0808 0810 0812 0813 0816 0818 0819 0820 was communicating with the FTP server The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect The destination is not correct An error occurred on the server side during transmission A POP Post Office Protocol server connection error occurred while receiving an l fax The POP server returned an error during the connection A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server The POP password setting is incorrect The POP Server name setting is incorrect eseiption don A timeout error occurred while the machine Check that the FTP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check that the FTP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check the destination setting Check the status and setting of the file server Check the POP Server name in E mail I Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from th
100. documents in memory Also print send or delete any documents stored in memory Check the DNS Domain Name System Server Settings in TCP IPv4 or v6 in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Specify the recipient other than group addresses Make sure that the line is disconnected You cannot register a group to contain more than three levels of subgroups Modify the group so that it contains three levels of groups or less Register the One touch that is not used Check the IP Address Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen See Network Settings in the e Manual The cover is open Check the cover and make sure that it is completely closed Huljoouseajqnoly 12 25 Error Messages Message Description ction Check the cable The machine and cable are not connected properly Turn OFF the machine check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable and then turn the machine ON Check the originals Paper or originals are jammed Remove any jammed paper or originals See Clearing Jams on p 12 2 Clean the scan area The feeder scanning area may be Clean the feeder scanning area See dirty Scanning Area on p 2 3 then press OK Hang up the receiver The receiver of the external Hang up the receiver telephone is off the hook Insert the toner car
101. for the return of empty cartridges This program may be modified or discontinued without notice The Clean Earth Campaign Supporting Environmental Initiatives With NATIONAL oe CANADA Nature Conservancy ENVIROTHON CANON NATIONAL PARKS SCIENCE SCHOLARS lt whe NATURE P i 7 LA SOCIETE CANADIENNE National g Park CONSERVANCY CONSERVATION OUNDATION 8 gt J FANA ES DE LA NATURE F NATURE THE CANON LE PROGRAMME CARTRIDGE RECYCLING Dr RECYCLAGE DES CARTOUCHES DE CANON PROGRAM U S A PROGRAM Packaging Hi Option A 1 Single Box Return Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end blocks from the new cartridge s box Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge Seal the box 11 14 Recycling Used Cartridges Hi Option B Volume Box Return We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges Place as many cartridges as possible into one box Carefully seal the box with tape or Call 1 800 OK Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box W Option A 2 Multiple Box Return We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges Complete Option A 1 Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Canon Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications Maximum weight 70 Ib 31 8 kg Maximum le
102. forward received fax documents to any desired destination If a received document matches the specified forwarding conditions it is forwarded to the specified destination Received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination note The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 12 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c 50 10 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions You can set whether to print fax documents with forwarding errors and whether to store them in memory See Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors on p 5 131 f a forwarding error occurs when all of lt Print Image gt lt Store Image to Memory gt and lt Memory Lock Settings gt are set to lt Off gt the received documents will be lost Specifying Forwarding Settings This section describes how to register erase print check and change the forwarding settings Storing Forwarding Settings You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations note To be able to forward received documents you need to activate the settings registered here See Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings on p 5 124 xe4 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Function
103. from the distant place provides you with easy job management For details see Job Management in the e Manual The Remote UI enables you to specify the machine s system settings You can specify the various custom system settings more easily and speedy For details see Customizing System Settings in the e Manual Dd amp wold sbuljjas D 10 3 Dd e wos sSHUIN S 10 4 Starting the Remote UI To start the Remote UI follow the procedure described below Prepare the Network 4 Set up the machine for use in a network then connect the machine and the computer to your network router or a hub For details see Setup Computers and Software in the Starter Guide Start the web browser Enter the IP address of the machine in Address or Location then press Enter on the keyboard about blank Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O A Ol Osean ders A BA iddress Http fixxx XXX XXX XXX For details on how to check the IP address see Setting and Checking the IP Address in the e Manual The Remote UI screen appears Enter the required data The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using Win case of default settings 1 Select System Manager Mode or End User Mode Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Ed
104. gt Register Use the software keyboard to enter the one touch name 11 Button Name Max 12 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 12 characters for the one touch name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt 12 One touch Name Max 12 Char Set Characters 13 14 15 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Fax Register New Addresses a Register Name gt Canon I fax a Register One touch Name gt T favil Destination Registration gt f Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s l fax address Fax Address Max 128 char Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the l fax address For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Fax Address Max 128 char Set Characters ifax xxx com A71 16 Press the right Any key to select 17 lt Register gt Fax Register New Destination Register Name gt IFAX1 touch One touch Button Name gt IFAX0002 Destination Registration gt ifax xxx com Register If you want to register another l fax address 18 repeat f
105. gt lt Send Fax gt lt Fax gt lt E mail gt lt l Fax gt lt File Server gt lt Send Log gt lt Address Book gt lt Favorites gt lt One touch gt lt Scan to Store gt lt Store on Memory Media gt lt Remote Scan gt and lt Direct Print gt 1 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF91 70c MF9150c Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Control Panel aulydeW y Huls A sojeg aulydeW y Huls sojeg Control Panel Left Side of the Control Panel aw f Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Color imageCLASS MF8450c 2SD MS Card Slot Insert an SD MS Card when using the Direct Print function 3 CF Card Slot Insert a CF Card when using the Direct Print function NOTE When two different types of cards are inserted the machine only recognizes the one that was inserted first Right Side of the Control Panel 24 Power switch Sub Power Supply 25 USB Slot Insert USB devices when scanning documents to a memory medium 26 Volume Control Dial x Display Parts and Functions The settings screen for each function is shown on the display on the control panel For details about each setting refer to the pages on corresponding function For instructions on how to display each screen refer to Main Control Panel on p 1 6 note Depending on the number of destina
106. gt then press OK FTP Enter User Name Host Name gt hostname Folder Path gt share a User Name gt Use the software keyboard to enter the user name User Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only Storing Editing One Touch 9 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt User Name Max 24 characters Set Characters username A Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Password gt then press OK FTP Password Entry a Password gt Back 1 Use the software keyboard to enter the password Password Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 24 characters when lt FTP gt is selected as the server protocol or up to 14 when lt Windows SMB gt is selected For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 41 oog ss appy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 42 Storing
107. gt is set to lt On gt These jobs are printed when lt Memory Lock Settings gt is set to lt Off gt 1 2 Press C__ Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Printer Settings Timer Settings i Adjustment Cleaning i Report Settings System Management Set j Done J If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Error Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Print Image gt then press OK Forwarding Error Settings Select Print Image gt On a tore Image on Memory gt Off Back xey 5 131 Forwarding Received Fax Documents xe4 5 132 6 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Print Image Print Failed Forward Image lt Off gt Does not print the image lt On gt Prints out the image if forwarding fails Use V A or Scroll Wheel to selec
108. gt is set to lt On gt you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone See Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone Remote Reception on p 5 104 note If you do not pick up the handset you receive neither telephone nor fax calls However setting lt Manual Auto Switch gt to lt On gt enables you to receive fax documents automatically after the telephone rings for a specified length of time See Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode on p 5 106 Introduction to Using Fax Functions DRPD Mode DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line allowing you to have both a fax number s and a telephone number s using only one telephone line Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company Contact your telephone company for availability Before using this mode Make sure to do the following Subscribe to a DRPD service Contact your telephone company for availability Connect your external telephone to the machine See Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual Set the receive mode to lt DRPD gt See Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 Selecting the Receive
109. key to select lt Confirm Erase gt Start Send Resolution Settings Design Group Dest 2 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase J Add Destination Press __ Main Menu Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E b Additional Func 3 Specifying Destinations 2 Check the destination you want to clear is selected then press the left Any key to select lt Erase gt Confirm Detailed Destination Press Erase to Erase Destination ii Design Group Erase Done If multiple destinations are specified clear the other destinations as necessary 3 Specify a destination again Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter Fax New E Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Con t Enter l Fax New Be Enter File Server New Favorites One touch 5 37 oe 7 xe4 5 38 Specifying Destinations 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations then press OK Select Clear One touch Press Set to Set Destination Dest O gt Sales I FAX o BH Sale
110. mm 356 0 Append CR to LF Yes No Enlarge A4 Print Width Off On Off On Text Resolution Gradation Resolution Gradation Resolution Gradation Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page e Manual Print sbulqjas aulydey 13 15 Setting Menu Gamma 1 5 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 4 sRGB Gamma 1 5 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 4 sRGB Gamma 1 5 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 4 Text Normal Photo Normal Photo Normal Matching Method o ee Saturation Colorimetric Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Text Off On Off On Off On CMS Matching Selection Printer Host sbulqjas aulydeyy 13 16 Applicable Page e Manual Print Setting Menu ems wacningy Gomme Text Gamma CMS Gamma CMS Gamma CMS Gommaconedion e Manual Advanced Smoothing Off Smooth 1 Smooth 2 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c Timer Settings item Settings Applicable Page Date Time Settings es es Current Time Settings MM DD YYYY p 5 12 Time Zone Settings GMT 12 00 to GMT 12 00 GMT 5 00 e Manual Introduction of the Machine On Auto Sleep Time Off 1 22 On 3 to 240 minutes 15 k Auto Auto Clear Time sd Time 0 0ff 1 to 9 minutes 2 OOOO MB 1 23 sbuljjas aulydey 13 17 sbulqjas aulydey
111. mode memory setting 1 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK M1 M2 Register Settings M7 ul Register Name Ba Erase Details Register Erase 7 2 Use the software keyboard to enter a name then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 10 char Set Characters You can enter up to 10 characters for the name For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Register the current settings Details If you want to check the details of the setting use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Details gt then press OK Register the current settings Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Recalling Mode Memory Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory This section describes how to recall the registered mode memories 7 Press C Main Menu 4 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Al a Aaitional FUNG 5 3 Press the left Any key to select lt Mode Memory gt Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 E LTR p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img J Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired mode memory then press OK Recall Mode
112. note Make sure to press D Log In Out after using the machine when the Department ID User ID Management is set lt Toner Cartridges The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine Color imageCLASS MF9170c Color imageCLASS MF9150c is approximately 6000 pages for K Black and is approximately 6000 pages for each C Cyan M Magenta and Y Yellow The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine Color imageCLASS MF8450c is approximately 6000 pages for K Black and is approximately 4000 pages for each C Cyan M Magenta and Y Yellow The page counts are based on 5 coverage when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals printed If your average original contains a lot of graphics tables or charts the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner When you are replacing a toner cartridge be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge contact your local Canon dealer or CanonCustomerCareCenter 1 800 828 4040 The term 5 coverage denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5 of the total area of a sheet For the Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Toner Cartridge name Canon Cartridge 111 K C M Y For the Color imageCLASS MF8450c Toner Cartridge name Can
113. prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen When entering the value in millimeters you can also use W LA Scroll Wheel or numeric keys Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Frame Erase Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 i Binding Erase S Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Zl Copies 12 _ Mode Memory Preview Img J uldo V 4 49 BHulAdo gt E Erasing Shadows Lines 1 0 Press Start 11 4 50 0002 P 1 Printing a 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 122 Avail Mem 99 k Cancel Done J If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Adjusting Color Balance This mode enables you to adjust the color balance depending on the color of the originals The adjusted color balance can be stored and named so that you can use them repeatedly 7 set documents 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to display lt Color Adjustment gt then press OK D Color Adjustment 100 E L LTR l i Binding Erase S Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off i Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img in a a PE ET Ve 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select For details see Pla
114. quality then press OK Set Original Image Quality Text and Photo Mixed Originals Text Photo Text a Photo t Back lt Text Photo gt This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs lt Text gt This mode is best suited for scanning text originals Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly lt Photo gt This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones e g printed photos 1 2 3 2 Sided Original You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2 sided originals that are placed in the feeder and scan each side separately The default setting is lt Off gt note The 2 sided original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the direct sending or manual sending mode When you are scanning originals with a horizontal landscape orientation such as LTRR make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder If these originals are placed vertically the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to display lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt _ then press OK Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then
115. received documents in memory to a desired destination 1 2 5 140 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select E Copy Send Store T Print O Receive Device Info Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Received Job Status gt then press OK Fax Select Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back 4 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job whose detailed information you want to check then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Received Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 10 15 0001 10 00 Sales Receiving Sales Waiting Details Erase Check the details of the selected job Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0001 Status Set Time Dept ID Destination Forward Done Waiting 07 30 2008 09 20 Sales W if you want to erase the selected job 1 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt then go to the next step Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0001 Status Set Time Waiting 07 30 2008 09 20 Dept ID Destination Forward W If you complete this procedure 1 Go to step 8 note You can forward the selected job to another destination by pressing the left Any key to select lt Forward g
116. reduce originals from one standard paper size to another 7 set originals 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select ee lt Copy gt then press OK 2 Additional Func V7 77 LT Rr a gt 4 gt L 2 Is SS OLIA Wa For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press C Main Menu 4 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Copy Ratio Settings gt then press OK Copy Ratio Settings E L LTR l 100 1 1 aasa Text Photo Map E E Non 1 Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the zoom ratio then press OK Set Copy Ratio Make Copies of Same Size Custom Copy Ratio 100 Direct 200 Maximum 129 STMT LTR 78 LGLLTR 64 LTR STMT You can select the preset zoom from the following lt 100 Direct gt lt 200 Maximum gt lt 129 STMT PLTR gt lt 78 LGL PLTR gt lt 64 LTR gt STMT gt lt 50 Minimum gt NOTE If you want to specify the other copy ratio see Custom Copy Ratio on p 4 32 Enlarge Reduce Images 6 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Copy Ratio Settings 100 J LTR 100 1 1 Jalal Text Photo Map E E Non1 Off Mode Memory Preview Img 7 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1 4 12 a Avail Mem 99 C
117. register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites See Registering Favorites on p 5 54 For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen 7 Press __ Main Menu 4 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func 3 Press the left Any key to select lt Favorites gt Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New li Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to check then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item M2 M3 M4 Back You can check detail settings Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen Favorites Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen 1 Press C Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the favorites you want to check then o press the left Any key to select lt Details gt 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item E M2 M3 M4 Back 2 Additional Func You can check detail settings Press the right Any 3
118. saves you the effort of entering that destination s address each time you send a job note Storing addresses in the Address Book is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c You can register a total of 300 destinations in the Address Book including 200 destinations registered in one touch Each address entry is treated as a single entry so if a destination is registered in a group address that destination and the group address are counted as two entries Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file which can be imported into the machine For information on how to export and import the Address Book see Setting from a PC in the e Manual For easy reference it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one touch For information on how to print the lists see Report Settings on p 13 19 New destinations cannot be registered in the Address Book if lt Limit New Destinations gt in lt Send Function Restriction gt in lt System Management Set gt is set to lt On gt Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the Address Book note This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use W LA or S
119. select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Heavy 2 gt lt Transparencies gt lt Labels gt lt Rough gt Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen gt i us Ifa Power Failure Occurs If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging a built in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes During a power cut functions are limited as follows You cannot send receive copy or print documents You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use note To fully charge the built in battery it takes approximately 2 hours when the main power switch is on If the built in battery is not fully charged the data may not be saved properly Furthermore charging of the built in battery may stop if the machine enters sleep mode with the lt Sleep Mode Energy Use gt set to lt Low gt During the approximate 2 hours it takes to fully charge the built in battery set the lt Sleep Mode Energy Use gt to lt High gt or prevent the machine from entering sleep mode by setting the lt Auto Sleep Time gt to lt Off gt Huljoous
120. slow in starting this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a slower speed You can select lt 33600 bps gt lt 14400 bps gt lt 9600 bps gt lt 7200 bps gt lt 4800 bps gt or lt 2400 bps gt Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Receive Start Speed 5 111 xe4 xe4 2 5 112 1 3 4 Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out Memory Lock Reception lock reception The default setting is lt Off gt Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Printer Settings Timer Settings i Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set j Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 4 Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it However there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings OK Select Communicatio
121. text See Scan in the e Manual lt Register Favorites gt Stores frequently used send settings for future use See Scan in the e Manual 7 8 9 Press Start Start Send Color File Format Settings as serverl E B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi mm Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes Press Start Start Send Color File Format Settings a server m a B amp W TIFF EEJ 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination Basic Scanning Operations 10 Follow the instructions on the display 1 1 When scanning is complete press the then press Start once for each right Any key to select lt Done gt original 10002 Send Waiting to scan Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change LJ LTR 410002 Send Waiting to scan Dest 1 a Page 2 a Document Size Change J LTR a Avail Mem a Avail Mem Cancel gay a Done 99 E3 Cancel Done
122. the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Selecting Paper Source Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard PaperSizes This section describes how to copy onto standard sized paper using the stack bypass tray note If lt Stack Bypass Paper gt setting in lt Paper Settings gt from the Additional Functions screen is set to lt Off gt the paper size type setting screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to lt On gt copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type See Setting Paper Size and Type on p 2 20 7 Set originals a ss le scan SAB Y For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press C_D Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Gy 4 2 Additional Func Load the paper into the stack bypass tray Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired paper size then press OK uldo Set Stack Bypass Paper Size Set to LTR LTR LGL STMT EXEC FLSC A B Sizes You can select from the following paper sizes lt LTR gt lt LGL gt lt STMI gt lt EXEC gt lt FLSC gt lt OFI gt lt B OFI gt lt M OFI gt lt G LTR gt lt G LGL gt For details see Paper Requirements on p 2 7 NOTE The available pap
123. the software keyboard to enter the one touch name 11 Button Name Max 12 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 12 characters for the one touch name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt 12 One touch Name Max 12 Char Set Characters 13 14 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Fax Register New Addresses a Register Name gt Canon Fax a Register One touch Name b Fay1 a Destination Registration gt f Register Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the fax number Fax Enter using the numeric keys a zj Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Option You can enter up to 120 characters for fax number If you want to move the position of the cursor use V LA or Scroll Wheel If you want to ge ce the number or character eee to the left of the cursor use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Backspace gt then press OK If you want to insert a pause of several seconds use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Pause gt then press s OK If you insert a pause within the fax number the letter lt p gt is displayed between the numbers If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number the letter lt P gt app
124. then press OK 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Various 2 Sided Settings gt then press OK D Various 2 Sided Settings 100 E L LTR p m Auto color Select gs Drawer 1 LTR j Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J uldo j 4 27 Bulkdo gt 2 Sided Copying Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt 2 Sided to 1 Sided gt Set 2 Sided Copy Type Original Book Type E Off j 1 Sided to 2 Sided ile z 2 Sided to 2 Sided Layout Settings G Press the right Any key to select lt Layout Settings gt Set 2 Sided Copy Type Original Book Type El Off El 1 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 1 Sided 4 Back Layout Settings 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Vertical Original gt or lt Horizontal Original gt then press OK Set Original Orientation Vertical Original g Vertical Original Horizontal Original t Back 4 28 8 9 10 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Book Type Original gt or lt Calendar Type Original gt for the original layout then press OK Set Original Layout Type Book Type Original 23 Book Type Original Calendar Type Original t Back lt Book Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original will have the same top bottom orie
125. to a file server The feeder s scanning area is dirty Clean the feeder s scanning area No destination is registered for the Register the destinations before using One touch you pressed the Address Book function The paper size is not appropriate for Set the paper size to lt LTR gt or lt LGL gt a two sided copy then load paper of the same size This message appears when turning Wait until the message disappears ON the main power switch or when the machine is not ready for printing Huljooyuseajqnoly 12 29 D us Error Codes If a job or operation does not complete successfully check the error code and perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed You can check the error code on the Details screen when you select lt Log gt on the System Monitor screen If a send receive or fax job does not complete successfully the error code is printed in the RESULT column on the Activity Report and TX Report Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code 05 16 2008 15 50 FAX 123XXXXXX 001 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KAR ERROR TX REPORT KER KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK TX FUNCTION WAS NOT COMPLETED TX RX NO 0005 RECIPIENT ADDRESS 111XXXXX DESTINATION ID ST TIME 05 16 15 50 TIME USE 00 00 PAGES SENT 0 RESULT NG 0018 yBUSY NO SIGNAL Error Code For details on reports see Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual See the table below for i
126. to dace the number or character Wie eS to the left of the cursor use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Backspace gt then press OK If you want to insert a pause of several seconds use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Pause gt then press OK If you insert a pause within the fax number the letter lt p gt is displayed between the numbers If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number the letter lt P gt appears When dialing an overseas number insert a pause after the country code and at the end of the fax number If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange which accepts only tone signals use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Tone gt then press OK If you want to insert a space between numbers use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Space gt then press OK If you want to delete the entire number you entered press Clear note For information on how to set the ae of a pause see Communications Settings o Dy I 3 8 For information on how to insert a pause for an overseas number see Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses on p 5 22 You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number If you enter a pause at the end of the number the pause is always 10 seconds long 12 13 14 If you want to set the ECM TX sending speed and lon
127. up 3 Press C Main Menu 7 18 5 6 Press the right Any key to select lt Index Print gt Select Memory Media Select this Memory Media Memory Media A Memory Media B Back Index Print Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired memory medium then press OK Select Memory Media Press Set to Select JPEG Memory Media A Memory Media B Back NOTE You can not select multiple memory media or folders at once Ifyou press the right Any key to select lt Set gt only the data saved outside folders will be printed Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired folder then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Browse Folder Press Set to Select JPEG FH Up __ Ganon_ 1 __ Ganon_2 canon_3 If the selected folder contains a subfolder the files in that folder will not be printed note The maximum depth of a sub folder you can select is 20 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting then press OK Start Print Color Mode Settings Es Color 4 Drawer 1 LTR t Back Press OK after making each setting lt Color gt Selects full color or B amp W lt Drawer 1 gt Selects paper source for printing Press Start When printing is complete remove the memory media note
128. using Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen then click OK Click OK V 5 27 xe4 xe4 5 28 Sending Fax Documents 6 Specify recipient name and fax number in the Sending Settings sheet gt click Add to Recipient List NOTE The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment For more information click Help in the bottom right hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help You can select a recipient from the address book by clicking Address Book See Fax in the e Manual For Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista you can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved by default Power Users and higher have access to the folder If you are not permitted access to the folder log on as a user who has access to the folder or click Specify a Folder in the Edit Address Book sheet and save the address book file in a folder such as the My Documents folder where you have write permission See Fax in the e Manual 7 If you want to attach a cover sheet select Cover Sheet sheet gt specify a format for the cover sheet See Fax in the e Manual for cover sheet attachment 8 Click OK x Canceling Sending Fax Documents Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress 7 Press
129. xe4 Communications Settings Select E mail l Fax Settings Fax Settings Memory LOCK SeTTINgsS Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Start Soeed gt then press OK Fax Settings Select Send Start Speed gt 33600 bps Receive Start Speed gt 33600 bps Back xe4 5 90 Send Start Speed 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired start soeed then press OK Sending Start Speed Modem Send Speed 33600 bps 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps If your document transmission is slow in starting this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a Slower speed You can select lt 33600 bps gt lt 14400 bps gt lt 9600 bps gt lt 7200 bps gt lt 4800 bps gt or lt 2400 bps gt 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Receiving Faxes 4 Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select This enables you to save paper The default setting is lt Off gt 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l Device Info 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q Volume Settings Common Settings
130. 03 No Reg 004 No Rea Registering Fax Addresses in One Touch This section describes the procedure for registering l fax addresses in one touch note This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to One touch gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt ORREN ZO Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings E Common Settings gf Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual Additional Func 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register
131. 1 Set an original on the platen glass Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to 4 display lt Shadow Frame Erase Settings gt then press OK Shadow Frame Erase Settings 100 E L LTR Frame Erase Off Color Balance Default Collate Off Copies 1 Mode Memory J Preview Img J For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 2 Press CD Main Menu 5 lt Book Frame Erase gt then press OK Set Frame Erase Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select Book Frame Erase Shadow Rem 3 lt Copy gt then press OK J Off Original Frame Erase Ly Book Frame Erase i Binding Erase t Back A 2 Additional Func uldo V 4 45 Bulkdo gt Erasing Shadows Lines 6 7 4 46 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR Originals LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to enter a frame erase width value then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Adjust using up down or the dial salen v 1 16 1_15 16 note To switch to the A B Sizes press the left Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt Enter the each erase width value E If you want to specify the erase width value for center Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Center gt then press OK Set Fra
132. 1 destinations one new destination can be specified If you specify a group of several destinations each destination is counted as a separate address If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group When lt Restrict Seq Broadcast gt is set to lt Prohibit Broadcast gt you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients See Security in the e Manual You cannot cancel to send only one destination out of the multiple destinations f you specify e mail or file server addresses as destinations lt Color File Format Settings gt appears on the Send Settings screen However this setting is disabled when sending faxes 1 Place your originals ee scare D CAMA O gt A A Press C Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Es Additional Func S 7 ZL PS Za SESS LPS i 4 5 Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry 3 Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New EE J One touch NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Press the right Any key to select lt Add Destination gt Start Send Resolution Settings Sales 200x200 dpi jem Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm
133. 1 1 Jara Text Photo Map E E Non 1 Off Mode Memory Preview Img Mode Memory Preview Img 4 32 8 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 122 Avail Mem 99 t Cancel Done J If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Enlarge Reduce Images BHulAdo gt E 4 33 Burdon lt Selecting Image Quality You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals A correct selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the original The default setting is lt Text Photo Map gt Printed Image Mode Photo Mode Text Mode RES RT PLAN RES RT PLAN The world s coral reefs where brilliantly colored fish and a Text Photo Map Mode The world s coral reefs where brilliantly colored fish and a s m OMe s gt myriad of other tropical creatures myriad of other tropical creatures pen come together a a y Ps come together Aptly nicknamed Be a eA Tropical Forests under the sea these spots of breathtaking beauty serve as home to countless varieties of life and to us of the land this alluring dream like world forms a tropical paradise filled with romance note Combinations of these four modes Text Pho
134. 15 50 00 00 23 59 Cancel Enter all four digits of the time including zeros using 24 hour notation Examples 3 50 p m gt 1550 To cancel to enter the time press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt to return to the previous screen 7 NOTE Ifyou set a time earlier than the current time the document will be sent at that time on the next day If you make a mistake when entering the send time press Clear to clear your entry then enter another four digit number Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 03 1XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jam Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 03 1XXXXXXX 200x200 dpi Dest 1 jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination j 10 Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0002 P 1 Ready to sc
135. 3 2007 05 14 2007 05 16 2007 05 17 Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting then press OK Start Print Color Mode Settings Color Drawer 1 LTR Layout Off Copies Print Date Off Print File Name Off note For details about lt Print Settings gt see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media on p 7 14 Press Start to start printing When printing is complete remove the memory media note Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point Puud 7 23 Puud 7 24 Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Selecting Files by Extension You can print only the selected files or all files of the specified extension 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot 6 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Direct Print gt then press OK 2 3 Press C__ Main Menu 4 Direct Print Device Info Additional Func 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired memory medium then press OK Select Memory Media Select this Memory Media Memory Media A Memory Media B Back Index Print Press the left Any key to select lt Display Select gt Browse Folder File
136. 4 61 Registering Mode Memory s sssessssessseesssessssessseeesseessss 4 61 Recalling Mode Memory sssessseesssessseesssessssessseeesseessss 4 63 Checking Mode Memory s s sssessssessssesssesssseessseesseessseess 4 64 Deleting Mode Memory ssssessseesssessseesssessseesssseesseessss 4 65 Chapter Changing Standard Mode sssssssssssssssccecccsssssssssso 4 66 Initializing Standard Mode sesesssssssssssssssssccseeseso 4 68 Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking CODY LOGS sevsviesssccesssssanessincanieenincccsnsdsseecasetaneicenseeaneans 4 69 Checking Copy JOS s ssssessseesssessseesssessseessseessseeosseesseees 4 69 Canceling Copy JObsS esssessseesssessseesssessseessseessseeosseesseees 4 70 Checking Copy LOS ssssrincsenmaineransumast 4 71 BHulAdo gt Bulkdo gt a Overview of Copy Functions In addition to the enlarging reducing the copy you can make 2 sided copies or use the N on 1 mode which reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper Originals Using stack bypass tray v 4 e Standard paper sizes e Irregular sizes of paper e Envelopes Copy settings Image Quality 34 Text Photo Map Mode Printed Image Mode RESORT PLAN The world s coral reefs where myriad of other tropical creatures come together Density p 4 17 Original Lighter Photo Mode Original Darker Text Mode RESORT PLAN is of the land this alluring d
137. 48 3 Edit the address details Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon Fax Backspace Set Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations NOTE For information on how to register fax numbers see Registering Fax Numbers in One Toudh on 3 26 For information on how to register e mail addresses see Registering E Mail Addresses in One Touch on p 3 31 For information on how to register l fax addresses see Registering Fax Addresses in One Touch on p 3 34 For information on how to register file server addresses see Registering File Server Addresses in One Touch on p 3 37 For information on how to register group addresses see Registering Group Addresses in One Touch on p 3 44 8 Storing Editing One Touch 4 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Fax Select a Name Display gt FAX1touch a Display One touch Name gt FAX0002 a Display Destination gt 012300000000 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS 3 49 oog ss appy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 50 Storing Editing One Touch Erasing Addresses Registered in One Touch This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered in one touch note This section describes how to erase one touch destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also erase them from t
138. 7 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired color then press OK Set Color to Balance Yellow Removal Level Adjustment Yellow 6 Red 6 Green 6 Blue 6 Back Use V LA 4 gt or Scroll Wheel to adjust the strength of the color then press OK Set Yellow Removal Level Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial 4 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt then press OK Set Color to Balance Yellow Removal Level Adjustment Yellow 6 Red 6 Green 6 Blue 6 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Density Background Rem Set 100 amp J LTR 12 Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img 8 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 122 Avail Mem 99 t Cancel Done J If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Adjusting Density BHulAdo gt E 4 21 BHulkdo gt 2 Sided Copying This mode enables you to make two sided copies from one sided or two sided originals or make one sided copies from two sided originals This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities The def
139. A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings pan Select 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press RX Settings OK Back Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings Common Settings Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select A _ Communications Settings 6 lt Sharpness gt then press OK ui Address Book Settings Done TX Settings amp Select a Sharpness gt 0 a PDF Compact Img Quality a Default Screen for Send gt Default Screen Done J xe4 Xej 5 84 7 8 Adjusting Sharpness Use 4 P or Scroll Wheel to slide the indicator towards lt Low gt or lt High gt then press OK Sharpness Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial lt Low gt To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones the setting should be towards lt Low gt This setting lessens the moir effect a shimmering wavy pattern lt High gt To scan text or lines clearly the setting should be towards lt High gt This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 4 Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation When you select lt Send FAX g
140. ASIE One touch NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Job Recall Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes Press Start Start Send amp Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination xe4 5 65 5 66 Job Recall 9 10 Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0001 lt P 1 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 2 Page 1 Document Size Change LJ LTR a Avail Mem 99 G Cancel Done When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 0001 P 2 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 2 a Document Size Change LJ LTR
141. Addresses fegistereoninOne leuen Omipes 50 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select 6 lt Erase from Add Book gt then press OK Erase from Add Book Edit Erase Register New Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 lt Yes gt then press OK Erase the highlighted destination If you want to cancel erasing the destination select lt No gt 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Storing Editing Address Book 3 25 oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ssesppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 26 Storing Editing One Touch You can register up to 200 destinations in one touch note Since each address entry is treated as a single entry if a destination is registered in a group address that destination and the group address are counted as two entries Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file which can be imported into the machine For information on how to export and import the Address Book see Setting from a PC in the e Manual For easy reference it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one touch For information on how to print the lists see Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual New destinations cannot be registered in one touch if lt Limit New Destinations gt in lt Send Function Restriction gt in lt System Management Set gt is set to lt On gt
142. Avail Mem 99 G J LTR a Avail Mem gay a Cancel Done Cancel Done Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop Canceling Sending E Mail Documents Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress 1 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select during transmission lt Send Job Status gt then press OK 2 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select Send Store lt Send Store gt then press OK Select Send Job Status Send Store Log Status Monitor Cancel Select Back aii Copy A Send Store Fax T Print O l Receive Device Info Done ew J Jelu 3 6 8 4 Basic E Mail Operations Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to cancel then press the right Any key to select lt Cancel gt Send Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0019 20 15 UnvSe 0018 19 50 UnvSe 0017 19 45 UnvSe 0016 18 50 UnvSe Error 0009 17 50 UnvSe Waitina__ Details Cancel Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to cancel Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen This chapter describes the basic print features Overview of Print FUNCT
143. BCA EVITE 0 CONTACTO SHEA CAUTION Hot surface avoid contact ACHTUNG Heisser bereich A A ATTENTION Temperature e evee 2279 2 a a PRECAUCION Alta temperatura PIFEDEN 5 7 Place the fixing unit on a flat surface Open the fixing unit cover 8 9 Remove the jammed paper When the Message Does Not Disappear 12 Lower the scanning platform Be careful not to get your fingers caught 13 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch Huljoousajqnoly 12 21 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 22 1 Lif the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly an error code lt E00012 gt appears on the display Follow the procedure below to install the delivery feeder unit correctly If the error code does not disappear after the delivery feeder unit is installed correctly contact Canon Customer Care Center note You have to remove the delivery feeder unit and re install the delivery feeder unit correctly When you remove the delivery feeder unit you have to turn the main power switch OFF Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected If the main power switch is turned OFF all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord h
144. CLASS MF9170c Location Device Name Product Nene Color imageCLASS MF9170c Location Printer Q Ready to print Scanner O Ready to scan Printer O Re ady to print O Ready to send or receiving fax Scamner O Ready to scan English 4 Fax O Ready to send or receiving fax Language Engli ish EZ Select a logon mode System Manager Mode Enables administrative control for the ggm Select a logon mode System Manager Mode Enables administrative control for the device and print jobs End User Mode Enables to browse device and job information Enter Document User Nam ar User Name Canon Internet System Manager ID 10000x Password eeccces O End User Mode Enables to browse device and job information Enter Document User Name to contre at ae W in case system manager ID and password is set Select System Manager Mode or End User E For Department ID Management mode Model l Enter the Department ID and Password and E Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer EENEI cl ic k O K File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Internet Q sax X x a 0 JO search ie Favorites B amp E Address amp http zj xxx xxx xxx xxx _top html Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
145. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL About the Part Containing Mercury Applicable Only to the USA LAMP S INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS For CA USA only Included battery contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for details Legal Notices Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images Using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce certain documents and the use of such images as scanned printed or otherwise reproduced by your product may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and or civil liability A non exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below This list is intended to be a guide only If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan print or otherwise reproduce any particular document and or of the use of the images scanned printed or otherwise reproduced you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance Paper Money Travelers Checks Money Orders Food Stamps Certificates of Deposit Passports Postage Stamps canceled or uncanceled Immigration Papers Identifying Badges or Insignias Internal Revenue Stamps canceled or uncanceled Selective Service or Draft Papers Bonds or Othe
146. Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 4 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings OK Select Common Settings Fax Settings Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Settings gt then press OK xe4 Common Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt 2 Sided Print gt then press OK RX Settings amp Select a 2 Sided Print gt Off a Receive Reduction gt On Received Page Footer gt Off Xej 5 92 Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK 2 Sided Print Print RX Documents on 2 Sides 8 Press __ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Reducing a Received Document You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper The default settings are as follows lt Receive Reduction gt On lt RX Reduction gt Auto lt Reduce Direction gt Vertical Only 1 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func l 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Addition
147. Continue Printing if Toner is Out Continue Printing if Toner Low Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low 5 99 xe4 Xej 5 100 lt ECM Reception ECM Error Correction Mode is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise ECM reduces errors when receiving faxes in a poor telephone line condition The default setting is lt On gt note To communicate using ECM make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines Even when ECM is activated errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection If there is trouble with the line it will take more time to receive the documents 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt one Common Settings Back 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select User Settings 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press TX Settings OK Back Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings Done E Common Se
148. Control Panel sesssessesseescescocsocesccsocsscssoesosese 1 6 Main Control Panel cccsecsssssecsssssecseesseees 1 6 Registering the Custom KeysS sssesssesssessse 1 8 Left Side of the Control Panel 06 1 10 Right Side of the Control Panel 1 10 Display Parts and FUNCtIONS s0000 1 11 Main Menu Screen q scscsssssesssessssssenssesees 1 11 Copy Top Screen ssscssscssecssesssessssseescsescsess 1 12 Send Type Selection Screen 1 13 Store Type Selection Screen uu 1 14 Select Memory Media Screen Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c Only 1 14 Log In Mode sessesssesseessesseessesssessesseesserseesseeseess 1 14 Toner Cartridges eesseeseeesocesoeesocesocssoesseeeo 1 15 Maintaining the Toner Cartridges 1 16 Checking the Toner Level ccceceeeeees 1 17 Checking the Device Information 1 18 Entering Characters csscccssscsssrcssseeees 1 19 Telephone Line Setting csscccsseeees 1 20 Timer Settings ssccsssssscccssssccssssseccssseees 1 22 Setting the Sleep Mode uu eseseseeseeesees 1 22 Setting Auto Clear TIMG s ssessesseessesssessesss 1 23 Setting the Daylight Saving Time 1 24 2 Originals and Print Media 2 1 Originals Requirements sesssesseessoessoesseeeo 2 2 SCANNING Al Gas casesseccsacesecssscseansinszedersavesorseivere 2 3 Placing Origitnals
149. Developmen 1004 ftphost tig Design Grn Edit Erase Register New Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt l Fax gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select 7 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Register Name gt Uestination Kegistration gt Back Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon I fax A 1 85 eg Sym Se Backspace Set 10 11 12 Storing Editing Address Book Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Fax Register New Addresses Register Name gt fannnfT fay a Destination Registration gt Back Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s l fax address Fax Address Max 128 char Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the l fax address For inform
150. Editing One Touch 2 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Password Max 24 characters Set Characters password A 3 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt FTP Enter User Name a Host Name gt Canon File Folder Path gt share a User Name gt username Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt File Register New Destination a Register Name gt FILE1touch One touch Button Name gt FILE0002 Destination Registration gt hostname Register H if you select lt Windows SMB Browse gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired workgroup then press OK Browse File Server Specify from Network Server ANDROMEDA YAMADAN HORK3 WORK4 If the desired workgroup is not displayed use W LA or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired workgroup 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired file server then press OK Browse File Server Specify from Network Server tH 46 EH GANDER EH AGIRA fi PEGASSA i GuyRos Set NOTE If the desired file server is not displayed use W LA or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired file server 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired file server then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Browse File Server Specify from Network Server fen 4 8 aa PRIVA
151. F United Kingdom CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Europark Fichtenhain A10 47807 Krefeld Germany CANON ITALIA S p A Via Milano 8 20097 San Donato Milanese MI Italy CANON ESPANA S A c Joaquin Costa 41 28002 Madrid Spain CANON LATIN AMERICA INC 703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami Florida 33126 U S A CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive North Ryde Sydney N S W 2113 Australia CANON CHINA CO LTD 15F Jinbao Building No 89 Jinbao Street Dongcheng District Beijing 100005 China CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue 04 01 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 CANON HONGKONG CO LTD 19 F The Metropolis Tower 10 Metropolis Drive Hunghom Kowloon Hong Kong f ae FT5 1831 010 XXXXXXXXXX CANON INC 2008 120V PRINTED IN CHINA
152. F151100 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept an interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules Do n
153. FF image cannot be scaled for printing If the size of the TIFF image exceeds the size of the selected paper only the part that fits on the paper is printed Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Inserting Memory Media A CAUTION When a memory medium is inserted into the slot the access lamp lights up Do not touch the memory medium at this point because the machine is accessing to the data in the memory medium Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media When inserted some memory media protrude from the slot Do not force them into the slot any further Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media Make sure that the memory medium is correctly oriented before inserting it into the slot Forcing an improperly positioned memory medium into the slot may damage the memory medium and or the machine Depending on the SD card it may take a few seconds to recognize it How to insert a memory medium Insert only one memory medium into the slot Confirm that the Access lamp has lit up USB Memory SD Secure Digital memory card SDHC memory card Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO Duo miniSD Card microSD Card Insert into the upper Slot Puud 7 13 Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print 7 14 Media Type Inserting Media Compact Flash CF Card The Access
154. For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 5215 xe4 Xej Introduction to Using Fax Functions Registering Your Machine s Fax Number Your machine s fax number must be registered When you send a document the number that you registered is printed on the recipient s paper 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings Common Settings wR Address Book Settings 7 Done 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings i 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt User Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Unit Telephone gt then press OK User Settings Select Register Unit Telephone z gt Tone a Offhook Alarm Jel Line Type Selection gt On Done Enter the machine s fax number using 0 9 numeric keys then press the right Any key to select lt Register gt Register Unit Telephone
155. GFi1SUc MNF AH SOc gg Y ate c Operation Guide Before Using the Machine Ii Originals and Print Media Registering Destinations in the Address Book i E Copying Fax I E mail E Printing Scanning it Network Setting from a PC Maintenance Troubleshooting Pi Machine Settings Appendix Please read this guide before operating this product After you finish reading this guide store it in a safe place for future reference ENG Z Manuals forthe Machine The manuals for this machine are divided as follows Please refer to them for detailed information Read this manual first What you can do with the machine Starter Guide Machine setup Connection and settings before using the Read this manual to learn the machine required settings and connections Connecting the machine to a network before using the machine Software installation Read this manual next This Document Safety instructions Basic Operation Guide Registering destinations in the Address Book Copy Read this manual to learn Fax information about basic operations E mail and machine functions Specifications Read the sections of these manuals that correspond to your intended use Located on User Software CD e Manual Advanced features Scan Read this manual to learn detailed Network information about advan
156. Huljoouseajqnoly 12 37 If lt Set the correct paper gt is displayed For the Paper Drawer Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Paper Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select _J L Paper Settings 2 Volume Settings C Common Settings A Communications Settings a Address Book Settings Done 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Drawer 1 gt or lt Drawer 2 gt then press OK Huljoouseajqnoly Paper Settings amp Select a Stack Bypass Paper Std gt Off Drawer 1 LTR a Drawer 2 LTR Only when the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 is attached 12 38 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select paper size then press OK Paper Size Drawer 1 Set to LTR LTR LGL EXEC FLSC OFI AZB Sizes You can select from the following paper sizes lt LI RS lt UGL gt lt EXECS lt FLoC gt lt OFI gt lt B OFI gt lt M OFI gt If you use A B size paper press the right Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt and perform the step above Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select paper type then press OK Paper Type Drawer 1 Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 You can
157. ID is 25 If you do not want to change the ID press OK without entering any numbers Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen xe4 Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception note Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents make sure the followings An external telephone is connected properly Your telephone is set to tone dialing 1 When you receive a call pick up the external telephone When you hear a beep use the numeric keys to enter the two digit remote reception ID to start reception If you hear someone on the line you can start talking to the other party When the reception is complete hang up the telephone 5 105 xe4 Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the Manual RX mode The default setting is lt Off gt 1 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q21 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 5 106 4 Use
158. IONS ccccossssscccesssssssscees 7 2 Introduction to Using Print Functions 00000 7 4 Printing Documents from Computer cscscrsssoees 7 5 Scaling Documents ssssssssssssssssssssssososososoesesecoeseoseee 7 7 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet ssssssssssssssss 7 9 2 Sided Printing vcsscerssssseseavsecssvnsnvsesssssssassvsnrecescscevceses 7 10 Printing from Memory Media Direct Print 7 11 Memory Media Supported by This Machine 7 11 Data Supported by This Machine scsscssssssessenee 7 12 Inserting Memory Media cssssscsscsscssceccescecssccseseenes 7 13 Removing Memory Media ssssssesssssssessssssesesssseeessss 7 14 Printing from Memory Media ssscsecscsscssscsscreenes 7 14 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print LOGS E E E O OE E 7 27 Checking Print JODS sicsscssececssesossonsansscssenesassnsssensensassnseree 7 27 Canceling Print JODS seniiunnnvnniumncirionaneanowemnnn 7 28 Checking Print Logs ennienni 7 29 Puud n Puud lt Overview of Print Functions You can print on both sides of paper or use the mode that reduces multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper You can also print out data from a memory medium inserted into the slot of the machine UFRII LT Printing from a computer Network connection USB connection e Manual Refer to Print Direct print p 7 11 Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Only
159. If you do not require a faxed copy of the information press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses When you dial or register an overseas number you may need to insert a pause within the number 1 Place your originals 2 Press C_D Main Menu 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func a4 7 Or AS eae s OS SD Za A Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book yes Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New TE One touch Enter the international access code using 0 9 numeric keys Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys pe 12 Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook If necessary use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Pause gt then press OK 4 Enter Fax with Numeric Keys T 12 Set Destination Backspace Tone Hook note You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in lt Set Pause Time gt The default setting is two second See Adjusting the Pause Time on p 5 69 7 9 Sending Fax Documents Enter the country code the area code and the fax number of the recipient Ha
160. L Use V A or Scroll Wheel to e OSE ILAR 4 i i oA A display lt Density Background Rem Set gt For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 then press OK Press C Main Menu D Start Car 100 E L LTR p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR je Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img BulAdo gt Adjusting Density 4 18 Use V A 4 P or Scroll Wheel to adjust the copy density then press OK Set Density Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial Lighter Darker Fe ee Background J To make dark originals lighter move the density scale to the left To make light originals darker move the density scale to the right Use 0 Q numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Density Background Rem Set 100 O LTR 12 ei m Auto color Select E Drawer 1 LTR jm Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J 7 Press Start 0002 lt P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status ie 4 2 a Avail Mem 99 Cm Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 8 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Adjusting Density Adjusting Base Color This mode enables you to adjust or remove the base color of the origi
161. Machine Originals and Print Media suena This chapter describes the types of paper and originals that can be used with the machine and how to load paper into the stack bypass tray Originals Requirements ccccccsscssccccscccccccscesees 2 2 Scanning Al OA inssssr aiaa a 2 3 Placing Originals sroin 2 4 On the Platen GlaSS ssseesssessseesssessseessseeosseesseeesseessseesssee 2 4 Lh TFS CCST recive xountunmmnnemetnaieannnesindnaaenaness 2 5 Paper REQuireMent csccccccrcsssssssssccccccccsscssscccsees 2 7 Printable Arca secscsicssisninvsscesnscdasscesssisessenianisniacpscecsviivasss 2 9 L ading Papl ssisisscasnsneasscaseveesteresshevoousassacceakesanasewerens 2 10 In the Paper DraWef es ssesssesssessscsssessesoseesseessessseeseeessee 2 10 In the Stack Bypass Tray s seseesssessseesssessseesssseesseessss 2 15 Setting Paper Size and Type sssssosossosossssesosseossesee 2 20 For the Stack Bypass Tray sissscsssssvasovsczseaseasouseasavovssenveazeys 2 20 For the Paper DraWef ssesssesssesseesssesseesseesseessessseeseeessee 2 22 Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart cccccccsssssssssseees 2 24 eIp W JUL pue sjeulIBLIO eIp W JUL pue sjeulbBlO 2 2 D b Originals Requirements Available original type size weight and quantity are shown in the table below Size W x L Max 8 1 2 x 14 Max 14 x 8 5 355 6 mm x 215 9 mm Max
162. Main Menu screen 4 5 BHulkdo gt Bulkdo gt Canceling Copy Jobs note If you cancel a copy job during scanning make sure to remove the original Press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt 1 0002 P 1 Printing 100 EB C LTR Print Status a Sheet Copies 1 4 12 a Avail Mem 99 C Cancel Done The display will return to the Copy top screen NOTE While the machine is scanning printing or waiting to print you can cancel a copy job by pressing 6 Stop 2 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 4 6 x Selecting Color Mode This section describes how to select the color mode color B amp W The default setting is lt Auto color Select gt 7 Set originals 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Color Mode Settings gt then press OK Color Mode Settings 100 mm J LTR l p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR jem Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img OSLER SAI R 5 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 the color mode then press OK Press CD Main Menu Set Color Mode Copy with Original Color Format p m Auto color Select 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Ea Color lt Copy gt then press OK abet a Copy A l lt Auto color Select gt For the automat
163. Media Direct PEE ecaa 7 11 Memory Media Supported by This IVa GIANTS iea 7 11 Data Supported by This Machine 7 12 Inserting Memory Media 7 13 Removing Memory Media cccececseees 7 14 Printing from Memory Media s000 7 14 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print LOGS ccssccsssscessceeees 7 27 Checking Print JOS seseissiscnsseasrsoersneeseienisien 7 27 Canceling Print JObS ssessesssessesssesseesserseesse 7 28 Checking Print LOGS cecscsseseseessseeesesees 7 29 8 SCANMIING ccscccccsscsccssssccssseres S 1 Overview of Scanner Function 06 8 2 Introduction to Using Scanner PVC EONS ssoites cc ders ccedsvctescancessssceceiesvessseecevatexeons 8 4 For Scanning Documents to a File E VOM rset cx heist cence cece A A AAT 8 4 For Scanning Documents from a Networked COMputel cecssscsesesseseeseees 8 4 Basic Scanning Operations sssccssssees 8 5 Scanning Documents to a File Server 8 5 Scanning Documents to a USB Memory 8 7 vii s u U05 s u U05 Contents Scanning Documents from a Networked COMPpUtET s ssesssessesssesseesserseesse 8 9 9 Network ccccccccsccccccccscsccccceses J 1 Flowchart for Setting Up Network 9 2 What is the Net work ccccccccccssssccecssseees 9 3 Overview of Network Functions 9 4 10 Settings from a PC 0 10 1 Overview of
164. Memory Recall this Mode Memory geo mM Jo m Jo m3 Jo m4 t Back Details J Register Erase Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen BHulkdo gt 4 63 Bulkdo gt Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory 4 64 Checking Mode Memory This section describes how to confirm the registered mode memories 1 2 Press C Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK AT 2 Additional Func Press the left Any key to select lt Mode Memory gt Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 E LTR E1 Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img J Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired mode memory then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Recall Mode Memory Recall this Mode Memory go m Jo m2 Jo m3 Jo m4 amp Back Details J Register Erase J 5 Check the details of the mode memory then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Mode Memory Details ei m Auto color Select j Density 0 Bg B 2 Sided Off J 100 1 1 1 Drawer 1 LTR Done Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Deleting Mode Memory Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory This section describes how to delete the copy settings from the mode memory list 1 2 Press C Main Menu Use V A or
165. OIP Power Requirements This equipment should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC three wire grounded outlet only Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause electrical noise Air conditioners electric typewriters copiers and machines of this sort generate electrical noise which often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents Users in the U S A Connection of the Equipment This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXx If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular jack are provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See the Starter Guide for details The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact th
166. Paper Std gt then press OK Paper Settings Select a Stack Bypass Paper Std gt Off Urawer gt No Settings a Drawer 2 gt No Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Stack Bypass Paper Standard Stack Bypass Paper Standard Reg Option e If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings select lt Off gt then press OK and press Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 6 Setting Paper Size and Type Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select paper size then press OK Paper Size Stack Bypass Tray Set to LTR LTR LGL STMT EXEC FLSC A B Sizes You can select from the following paper sizes lt AR gt lt L lt S M a EXEC gt lt FLSC gt lt OF gt lt B OFI gt lt IVEOFIS gt lt G LIRRS lt Ge LGL gt lt Custom Size gt lt COM 10 gt lt Monarch gt lt DL gt lt ISO C5 gt lt ISO B5 gt f you use A B size paper press the right Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt and select the paper size you want to use Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select paper type then press OK Paper Type Stack Bypass Tray Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 You can select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Heav
167. Processing Data indicator is off there are no print jobs in the memory 1 2 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Print gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select a Copy A Send Store Fax O Receive Device Info J Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Job Status gt then press OK Print Select Job Status Log Copy Log Printer Log RX Print Log Memory Media Print Log Report Print 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired job then press the right Any key to select lt Cancel gt Print Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0009 07 37 0010 07 38 0011 07 38 Copy Printing Waiting Copy Copy Waiting Details Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt Is it OK to cancel Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print Logs Checking Print Logs 5 Check the print log then press the right Press CD Status Monitor Cancel 7 Any key to select lt Done gt 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select sere PREFETTI lt Print gt then press OK ETA TT Result NG Start Time 1999 01 11 09 18 Status Monitor Cancel Select E Copy A Send Store End Time 1999 01 11 09 34 Dept ID 0000002 Done O Receive Device
168. R G LGL COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 ISO B5 A4 A5 B5 e Manual Print Default Paper Type Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Transparencies Labels Rough Envelope sbulqjas UIYPEW 13 13 sbuljjas aulydey 13 14 Setting Menu Printing Quatty S High Gradation 2 TTonerdesty Save Toner Off On Line Control Resolution Priority Gradation Priority Payout Margin Direction Long Edge Short Edge Unit of Measure Millimeter Inch 1 97 to 1 97 inch 0 00 50 0 to 50 0 mm 0 0 e Manual Auto Error Skip Off Print On Collate Off On Timeout Off Timeout 5 to 300 seconds 15 Color Mode Auto Detect Color Black and White Gradation Settings Gradation Off Smooth 1 Smooth 2 Off On Off On Compressed Image Output Output Display Error Massage Initialize Printer Settings No Yes Paper Save Off On Orientation Portrait Landscape 0 44 to 99 99 cpi 10 Symbol Set DESKTOP ISO4 ISO6 ISO11 ISO15 ISO17 ISO21 ISO60 ISO69 ISOL1 ISOL2 ISOL5 ISOL6 ISOL9 LEGAL MCTEXT PC775 PC8 PC850 PC852 PC858 PC8DN PC8TK PC1004 PSTEXT Roman9 ROMANS WIN30 WINBALT WINL1 WINL2 and WINL5 Custom Paper Size Setting Off On Unit of Measure Millimeter Inch 00 to 8 50 inch 8 50 5 00 to 14 00 inch 14 00 127 0 to 356 0
169. RX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select User Settings TX Settings RX Settings Back Done Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Incoming Ring gt then press OK RX Settings Select a ECM RX gt On a Reception Mode Selection gt Autn RX a Incoming Ring gt Off Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt Incoming Ring Use Call Tones for Incoming lt Off gt Incoming tone does not ring If you select lt Off gt press OK then go to step 9 lt On gt Incoming tone rings If you select lt On gt press OK then go to the next step Use V A or Scroll Wheel to set the number of ring times then press OK Ring Times Ha You can also use numeric keys You can also use numeric keys to set the number of ring times Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Setting the Incoming Ring Tone xe4 5 103 4 Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone Remote Reception You can connect one external telephone to the machine When the telephone rings with the machine in the Manual RX mode you can use the external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine Activating the Remote Reception Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception The default settings are as follows lt Remote RX gt On
170. Received Document 5 97 xe4 xe4 5 98 4 Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low The default setting is lt Off gt note When lt Toner Out Continuous Print gt is set to lt On gt the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner The data is erased when the documents are printed out so you cannot print the same documents again 1 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt a Common Settings Fax Settings Back 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt RX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select T lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Back Additional Functions amp Select 7 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings A Communications Settings a Address Book Settings Done 6 7 8 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Toner Out Continuous Print gt then press OK RX Settings Select Toner Out Continuous Print gt On a Y UbCr Receive Gamma Val gt Gamma 1 8 Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK
171. Select from the list of registered addresses When lt Fax gt is selected in lt Forwarding Conditions Settings gt TIFF PDF When lt l Fax gt is selected in lt Forwarding Conditions Settings gt TIFF Black PDF Color TIFF Black JPEG Color PDF PDF Black JPEG Color Divide Pages Off On Forwarding Destination Select from the list of registered addresses When lt Fax gt is selected in lt Forwarding Conditions Settings gt TIFF PDF When lt l Fax gt is selected in lt Forwarding Conditions Settings gt TIFF Black PDF Color TIFF Black JPEG Color PDF PDF Black JPEG Color Divide Pages Off On No 5 12 Print List No 5 127 ee ee o o sbulqjas aulydey 13 27 sbulqjas aulydey 13 28 Setting Menu Print Image Off On p 5 131 Store Image to Memory Off On Remote Ul Off e Manual On Security Address Book Password Max 7 digits Restrict New Addresses Off On ac e Manual Restrict Sending From Log Off Security On On Restrict Seq Broadcast Off Broadcast Confirmation Prohibit Confirmation Auto Online Off On Auto Offline Off On Job Log Display Off e Manual On Security Memory Media Store Log Do not retain e Manual Retain Security USB Device Off e Manual On Security Dept ID User Name Display Off e Ma
172. Stack Bypass Tray a Drawer 1 LTR a Drawer 2 LTR t Back Selecting Paper Source 13 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the 14 Press Start desired copy quantity 1 to 99 0002 lt P 1 Printing Start Copy Paper Source Settings Cust 100 Ose 12 p m Auto color Select 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 2 Stack Bypass Tray Avail Mem 99 i Cancel Done j Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 15 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Using Stack Bypass Tray withEnvelopes This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass tray note If lt Stack Bypass Paper gt setting in lt Paper Settings gt from the Additional Functions screen is set to lt Off gt the paper size type setting screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to lt On gt copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type See Setting Paper Size and Type on p 2 20 7 Set originals 3 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK b Additional Func le scape a ZL lorry 2 SES BE Vy A For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press C
173. TE_GANDER da PUBLIC_GANDER NOTE To enter the user name and the network password select a file server from the list and press OK Enter the user name up to 24 character and network password up to 14 characters then press the right Any key to select Se 4 Specify the folder path user name and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in If you select lt FTP gt or lt Windows SMB gt 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Windows SMB Enter User Name Host Name gt GANDER PRIVATE_GAND a Folder Path gt sharel a User Name gt username 15 16 Storing Editing One Touch Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt File Register New Destination Register Name gt SMB One touch Button Name gt SMBO002 Destination Registration gt GANDER PUBLIC_GANDE Register If you want to register another file server address repeat from step 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Canon File gt GANDER PRIVATE__ 001 EH Filel 002 No Reg 003 No Reg 004 No Rea Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 3 43 yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 44 Storing Editing One Touch Registering Group Addresses in One Touch The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinati
174. This product emits low level magnetic flux If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities please move away from this product and consult your doctor Xi BIPJald BIPJaId xii Preface TelephoneEquipment A WARNING When using telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Do not use this machine near water i e near a bathtub kitchen sink or laundry tub or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool 2 Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm as there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 3 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Customer Support U S A Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble free operation If you encounter a problem with the machine s operation try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 12 If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1 800 828 4040 between the hours of 8 00 A M to 8 00 P M EST for U S A and 9 00 A M to 8 00 P M EST for Canada Monday through Friday and 10 00 A M to 8 00 P M on Saturday On line support for 24 hours is also available at the website http www canontechsupport com Customer Support Canada Canon Canada Inc offers a full range of customer technical support option
175. Time min gt Minutes a TX Error Redial gt On Done Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy Auto Redial Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK 14 Redial Upon Send Error Auto redial Upon Send Error lt Off gt Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs lt On gt Auto Redial takes place if a sending error OCCUTS Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 15 5 73 xe4 Xej 4 Checking the Dial Tone beforeSending The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon The Check Tone Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine made by a company other than Canon is trying to send you a fax your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine instead of the original destination you had intended Setting lt Check Tone Before Sending gt to lt On gt enables you to avoid such sending problems The default setting is lt On gt 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt OREA Common Settings Fax Settings Back Device Inte Use V A or
176. Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Group gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK Group Register New Name a Register Name gt Uestination Kegistration gt 000 Back Register Storing Editing Address Book 8 Use the software keyboard to enter the group name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters GROUPOO00 10 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Group Register New Addresses Register Name gt Grounfnnl Destination Registration gt 000 Back Register yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 19 oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS 3 20 11 12 Storing Editing Address Book Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the destination to store in the group address then press OK Group Select Destination for Group dal gt e rle ip J Canon USA O31XXXXXXX Sales I FA 1003 ifa
177. _D Main Menu BHulkdo gt Bulkdo gt Selecting Paper Source 4 4 16 Load envelopes into the stack bypass For details see In the Stack Bypass Tray on p 2 15 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired size of envelopes then press OK Set Stack Bypass Paper Size Set to COM10 Envelope Custom Size COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 A B Sizes You can select from the following sizes of envelopes lt COM10 gt lt Monarch gt lt DL gt lt ISO C5 gt lt ISO B5 gt For details see Paper Requirements on p 2 7 Press OK to select lt Stack Bypass Tray gt Set Paper Source Make Copies with Stack Bypass Stack Bypass COM10 as Drawer 1 LTR Drawer 2 LTR 4 Back 7 8 Press Start Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 B comio Auto color Select Stack Bypass COM10 Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen e Adjusting Density You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original The copy tone becomes lighter as the indicator moves to the left and darker as it moves to the right The default setting is lt 0 gt y Lighter Darker Original Original 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK uldo AT 2 Additional Func I Z
178. a Drawer 2 LTR Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Stack Bypass Paper Standard Stack Bypass Paper Standard Reg If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings select lt Off gt then press OK and press Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 6 If lt Set the correct paper gt is displayed Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select paper size then press OK Paper Size Stack Bypass Tray Set to LTR LTR LGL STMT EXEC FLSC A B Sizes You can select from the following paper sizes lt ITR gt lt LGLS lt SIMT gt lt EXECS lt FLSC gt lt OFl gt lt B Orl gt lt V Orl gt lt G LI RRS lt G LGL gt lt Custom Size gt lt COM 10 gt lt Monarch gt lt DL gt lt ISO C5 gt lt ISO B5 gt If you use A B size paper press the right Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt and select the paper size you want to use Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select paper type then press OK Paper Type Stack Bypass Tray Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 You can select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Heavy 2 gt lt Transparencies gt lt Labels gt lt Rough gt Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen
179. a copy You need to set up the paper size and type for each drawer in advance For details about configuring the paper size and type see Setting Paper Size and Type on p 2 20 7 Set originals 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK AT 2 Additional Func lS U A Scroll Wheel t z A 4 se V A or Scro Vheel to VA A display lt Paper Source Settings gt then For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 press OK Press Z Main Menu Ge weer Paper Source Settings 100 E LTR be 1 m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR jem Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img uldo V 4 9 Buikdo gt Selecting Paper Source 5 4 10 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired paper source then press OK Set Paper Source Make Copies with Drawer 1 Paper Stack Bypass Tray Drawer 1 LTR Drawer 2 LTR Back Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 p m Auto color Select ge Drawer 1 LTR j Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J Press Start EB 0004 Copy Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1 3 12 a Avail Mem 99 G3 Cancel Done J If you want to copy multiple originals using
180. ail documents 6 7 Sending fax documents 5 29 Canceling Copy Jobs 4 6 Canceling Print Jobs 7 28 CF card slot 1 10 Change Paper Size If displayed 12 36 Changing the paper size setting If lt Set the correct paper gt is displayed 12 36 Checking Fax reception status 5 140 Fax transmission reception log 5 141 Fax transmission status 5 138 Checking Current Settings 4 60 Checking Print Jobs 7 27 Checking Print Logs 7 29 Checking the device information 1 18 Clean Earth Campaign 11 13 Cleaning Exterior 11 2 Feeder Automatically 11 5 Fixing Unit 11 3 Platen Glass 11 4 xlpueddy xlpueddy Index Clearing jams 12 2 Back cover 12 18 Delivery Feeder Unit 12 22 Duplex unit 12 6 Fixing unit 12 16 Inside of the machine 12 13 Original jams 12 3 Paper delivery tray 12 5 Paper Drawer 1 12 10 Paper Drawer 2 12 11 Stack bypass tray 12 8 When the message does not disappear 12 19 Clear key 1 6 Collating 4 57 Color Balance 4 51 Deleting 4 56 Recalling 4 55 Registering 4 53 Color Mode 4 7 Common Settings 13 6 Communications Settings 13 8 Control panel 1 3 Left side of control panel 1 10 Main control panel 1 6 Right side of control panel 1 10 Copier Specifications 14 3 Copy Jobs Canceling 4 70 Checking 4 69 Copy Logs Checking 4 71 Custom Copy Ratio 4 32 Customize labels 1 8 Custom key 1 1 7 Custom key 2 1 7 Custom Keys Registering 1 8 D Delayed Sending 5 49 Delivery feeder unit Electro
181. ain for confirmation Enter the fax number you entered in step 4 then press OK See Security in the e Manual 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Destination gt then press OK Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 03 1XXXXXXX Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook j xe4 W if you want to clear the specified destination 1 Press the left Any key to select lt Confirm Erase gt Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 Pl 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase J Add Destination 5 31 Xej 5 32 Specifying Destinations 2 Check the destination you want to clear is selected then press the left Any key to select lt Erase gt Confirm Detailed Destination Press Erase to Erase Destination 03 1XXXXXXX Erase Done Using the Address Book 3 Specify a destination again Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter Fax New F Enter E mail New gt Enter I Fax New E Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J You must specify the destination to send documents A maximum of 300 200 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c destinations including 200 one touch destinations can be stored If you store addresses in the Address Book you can easily select them note l To use this feature you must first register destinatio
182. ajqnoly 12 39 if You Gannot Solve a Problem Customer Support U S A If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1 800 828 4040 between the hours of 8 00 A M to 8 00 P M EST for U S A and 9 00 A M to 8 00 P M EST for Canada Monday through Friday and 10 00 A M to 8 00 P M on Saturday On line support for 24 hours is also available at the website http www canontechsupport com Customer Support Canada Canon Canada Inc off ers a full range of customer technical support options For step by step troubleshooting e mail technical support the latest driver or document downloads and answers to frequently asked questions visit http www canon ca Free live technical support 9 A M to 8 P M EST Monday through Friday excluding holidays for products still under warranty 1 800 652 2666 For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you visit http www canon ca or 1 800 652 2666 If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http www canon ca Support program specifi cs are subject to change without notice Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon Product name Color imageCLASS MF8450c Color imageCLASS MF9170c Co
183. al Functions Select 7 Paper Settings Q Volume Settings E Common Settings Communications Settings wh Address Book Settings f Done J 5 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings amp Select Fax Settings Back xe4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Vv xe4 5 94 Reducing a Received Document 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Receive Reduction gt then press OK RX Settings Select a 2 Sided Print gt Off a Receive Reduction gt On Kecelved Page Footer gt Off Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt 7 Receive Reduction Reduce RX Document Image lt Off gt Does not reduce received documents If you select lt Off gt press OK then go to step 14 lt On gt Reduces received documents If you select lt On gt press the right Any key to select lt Set gt then go to the next step Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Reduction gt then press OK Receive Reduction Select a RX Reduction gt Auto a Reduce gt 90 a Reduce Direction gt Vertical Only Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Auto gt or lt Fixed Reduction gt 9 RX Reducti
184. al areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate note This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Users in the U S A The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this terminal equipment is 1 0 The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five Le Nombre d quivalence Ringer REN de cet appareil terminal est 1 0 Le REN attribu a chaque quipement terminal fournit une indication sur le nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s sur une interface t l phonique La terminaison sur une interface peut consister en n importe quelle combinaison d appareils a la condition seulement que la somme des Nombres d quivalence Ringer de tous les appareils ne soit pas sup rieure a 5 CANON CANADA INC 1 800 652 2666 9 A M to 8 P M EST Monday through Friday excluding holidays xxiii W S Y UI Sas Ayayes Jase XXIV
185. ame for favorites then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the name If you press lt Set gt without entering any characters the key name reverts to its current name default M1 to M4 For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 5 57 XJ xe4 5 58 Favorites Erasing Favorites You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen 7 Press __ Main Menu 4 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func 3 Press the left Any key to select lt Favorites gt Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to erase then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item M2 M3 M4 Back Details Register Erase Keys registered as favorites are displayed with icons NOTE You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by p
186. an Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 a Page 1 a Document Size Change mrem 99 G Cancel E Done a Avail Mem 1 1 When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 410002 Send Waiting to scan Dest 1 a Page 2 a Document Size Change Ld LTR a Avail Mem 98 a Cancel Done Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c Stop Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending 5 51 1 xe4 Uu 5 52 4 Direct Sending The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned The default setting is lt Off gt note If you do not select direct sending mode memory sending mode is used With direct sending mode you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending mode Memory sending is automatically set when using delayed sending or when multiple destinations are specified If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the direct sending mode you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report or on the lt Log gt for fax on the System Monitor scree
187. an cause personal injury If you have a back problem make sure to check the weight of this machine before carrying See Specifications on p 14 2 NOTE If you need to install the Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 in the machine place the feeder at the installation site first and then transport the machine to the site For directions on how to install the Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 see the sheet Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Setup Instruction Transporting the Machine SDULUdIUIL 11 21 Transporting the Machine SIULUDIUIL Troubleshooting Chapter This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams as well as to error messages Clearing Jam cseiccssscessisenssisnsasenuntevsisenxesevenesssaveceassasens 12 2 Orginal JaN S cascns an eencaeroawance 12 3 Paper Delivery Tray ssse sssesseessseesssessseessssesseerssseesseessss 12 5 Duplex UNnit sse sseesseessessseessessscsseeesecsssessessseeneeesseosseeseessees 12 6 Stack Bypass Tray ssensunsannnnmanncamannmanucninn 12 8 Paper Drawer cssssaieainstanaaianannanannamusaie 12 10 Optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 00 12 11 Inside of the MaCHING csessessssessesssecssscsesesseeseeseees 12 13 a Ug 2 UN senna 12 16 Back ONG un E tia eateries corse eee eee 12 18 When the Message Does Not Disappear 000 12 19 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly csiis 12 22 Error Message Ssssicisssssssis
188. ance Domestic Back 17 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt or lt Off gt then press OK ECM TX Send ECM Fax Documents 18 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Sending Speed gt then press OK Option Select ECM TX On Long Distance Domestic Back Done oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 29 oog ssesppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 30 Storing Editing One Touch 19 20 21 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the sending speed then press OK Sending Speed Modem Send Speed 33600 bps 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps Back If your document transmissions are slow to start it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a slower speed You can select lt 33600 bps gt lt 14400 bps gt lt 9600 bps gt or lt 4800 bps gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Long Distance gt then press OK Option Select ECM TX On Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the long distance setting then press OK Domestic Use Domestic Domestic Domestic 1 Domestic 2 Domestic 3 Back Select lt Domestic gt for dialing domestic local telephone numbers Select lt Long Distance 1 gt if Communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls when the overseas teleohone number is registered in th
189. ance setting under then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Recall Color Balance Recall this Color Balance Register Erase Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Settings gt Register Settings Register Name Erase E Register Erase W if you want to name the color balance setting 1 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK Cl C2 Register Settings C3 e z n peck E Register Erase 9 10 2 Use the software keyboard to enter a name then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 10 char Set Characters You can enter up to 10 characters for the name For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Register the current settings Press C C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Recalling Registered Color Balance This section describes how to recall registered Color Balance 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Al 2 Eo Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Color Adjustment gt then press OK Color Adjustment 100 L LTR i Binding Erase Gl Color Balance Default m lt y Co
190. ary network scan function was being used 0401 When the data was being written to the medium Use the memory medium with sufficient free the machine detected that the medium was full space Huljoousajqnoly 12 31 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 32 Error Codes ErrorCode Description Atom Rename the file and then write the data again 0403 The job was failed because the same file name existed Generally if the same file name exists a file will be automatically renamed by adding a number which ranges from 1 to 999 to the tail of its file name in order to avoid naming conflicts However this error occurred because the file with the same number already added to its file name existed 0404 The job was failed because the write protect Turn OFF the write protect switch of the medium switch of the medium was turned ON 0407 0408 0703 0705 0751 The job was failed because the medium was pulled out while the job was in progress While data such as image data were being transferred to the medium some error occurred The length of the full path to the specified file or folder exceeded the supported limit The transfer of the image to the USB memory was not properly performed because the length of the full path including the root and file name exceeded the limit The job was failed because the medium was pulled out while the read job was in progress While the data such as image d
191. as been disconnected Turn OFF the main power switch and 2 Open the front cover disconnect the power cord If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Open the front cover gently holding the handle note A Make sure that the Processing Data Indicator is turned off and check the display to confirm that a job is not being processed Push the levers A on both sides of the delivery feeder unit and remove the delivery feeder unit gently holding it by the tabs B A CAUTION Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt A of the delivery feeder unit The transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself therefore do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is damaged this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality 5 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly Install the delivery feeder unit so that the protrusions A of the delivery feeder unit fit into the guides B and click into place Confirm that the triangle marks A on the delivery feeder unit are aligned with the triangle marks B on the machine Huljoousajqn
192. at you just specified is not stored in the Address Book It is deleted once the document is sent If you frequently send documents to the same destinations store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book on p 3 2 You can specify only one destination at a time in lt Enter Fax New gt Specifying a New Fax Number You can specify a new fax number using and numeric keys note For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 2 Press C__ Main Menu 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Select Send Type lt Send FAX gt then press OK di H Address Book E Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New Enter File Server New Parana One touch J 2 Additional Func Enter a fax number using 0 amp and numeric keys Select Send Type New Fax Entry Specify from Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter New Fax Enter File Server New You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax number Details of each item are shown below lt Set Destination gt Set the desired destination lt Backspace gt Delete the last number entered lt Pause gt Insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number you are dia
193. ata was being transferred from the medium some error occurred The memory for image data is full when sending color documents The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than the Send Data Size Limit set in E mail l Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen The server is not functioning The network is down the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected Confirm that the medium is properly inserted and then write the data again Confirm a status of the medium and a file format The limit of the length of the full path is 120 Change or shorten the file name to be written The limit of the length of the full path is 120 Change or shorten the file name to be written Change the folder to which the data is saved Confirm that the medium is inserted and then read the data again Confirm the staus of the medium and the file format Wait a few moments and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete Erase documents stored in memory If the machine still does not operate normally turn the main power OFF and then back ON Change the setting for the Send Data Size Limit in E mail I Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Select a lower resolution If you are using l fax decrease the number of pages contai
194. ation on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Fax Address Max 128 char Set Characters ifax xxx com A71 Sym abcdef oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ss appy Bun p3 BuNOIS Storing Editing Address Book 13 Press the right Any key to select 14 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt lt Register gt Register New Destination Select F Fie Fax Register New Destination Register Name E mail gt IFAX0001 Destination Registration gt 1fax xxx com Back Fax File Group Done Register If you want to register another l fax address 15 Press C Main Menu to return to the repeat from step 6 Main Menu screen RegisteringFile ServerAddressesin itheAddress Book This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the Address Book note If lt Language Switch gt in Common Settings is set to lt On gt the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly so you may not be able to refer to them This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK P
195. ations Settings gt then press OK 3 Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 5 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings amp Select Fax Settings Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back 6 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Change Send Func Mode gt then press OK TX Settings Select Change Send Func Mode X lerminal ID gt On a Color Send Gamma Value gt Gamma 1 8 Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register gt then press OK Change Send Function Std Mode Register Send Function Std Mode Initialize Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting item then press OK Register Color Mode Settings E a B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi al Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Register You can specify the following settings lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See Selecting Resolution on p 5 41 lt Density Background Removal gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See Adjusting Density on p 5 42
196. ault setting is lt Off gt MS Making Two Sided Copies from One Sided Originals 1 gt 2 Sided Originals I Making Two Sided Copies from Two Sided Originals 2 gt 2 Sided Original E Making One Sided Copies from Two Sided Originals 2 gt 1 Sided Original note When you use the feeder to make two sided copies from two sided originals or one sided copies from two sided originals the original size must be LTR LGL FLSC or A4 For the paper size that can be used for the 2 sided copying see the following e Manual gt Print gt Printer Settings from the Machine gt Settings Menu gt 2 Sided The same paper size can be used for the 2 sided copying and 2 sided printing 4 22 1 to 2 Sided Copying 1 Wy 4 Set originals VIT 7 LZZ IEL EE AA A e For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C__ Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK A 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Various 2 Sided Settings gt then press OK Various 2 Sided Settings 100 E L LTR m Auto color Select as Drawer 1 LTR mm Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J 6 7 2 Sided Copying Use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt 1 Sided to 2 Sided gt Set 2 Sided Copy Type Copy Boo
197. ax New Enter File Server New Using the One Touch You can specify up to 200 destinations in one touch Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one touch note To use this feature you must first register destinations in one touch See Registering Fax Numbers in One Touch on p 3 26 Ifyou use the Color imageCLASS MF8450c you can register only one touch destinations in the Address Book For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 xey Press __ Main Menu 3 Press the right Any key to select lt One 7 touch gt 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select om eT lt Send FAX gt then press OK GB Address Book Enter Fax New gt Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New BE Enter File Server New Parana One touch Ky Additional Func 5 34 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired destination then press OK Select Clear One touch Press Set to Set Destination O Canon Fax o Ca Sales a i Development O Design Group Reg Edit Erase Set You can select multiple destinations at a time note To cancel a selected destination select the destination again to clear the check mark Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Select Clear One touch Press Set to Set Destination 001 03 TXXOOOX w Canon Fax
198. ax information service using 0 9 numeric keys Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 12 Tone RX Start One touch 200x200 dpi Done Wif you are using one touch Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt One touch gt then press OK Enter Fax with Numeric Keys p 12 Tone RX Start 200x200 dpi Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired one touch then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Select Clear One touch Press Set to Set Destination 001 03 1XXXXXXX Dest 1 w Canon USA FAX O y Canon FAX Set xe4 5 21 xe4 Sending Fax Documents 6 When the recorded message of the 7 Enter the numbers requested by the information service answers use V A information service using 0 9 or K Scroll Wheel to select lt Tone gt to numeric keys switch to tone dialing then press OK Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys Hya Enter Fax with Numeric Keys y 127031 T 12 Tone Tone RX Start RX Start One touch One touch 200x200 dpi 200x200 dpi Done J Done If you are already using this machine with 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select tone dialing this step is not necessary lt RX Start gt then press OK if you require After you press lt Tone gt lt T gt appears on the a faxed copy of the information display Ha Enter Fax with Numeric Keys 127031 Tone RX Start One touch 200x200 dpi Done
199. ay be slight variations in actual use Copy Scanning Area 1 4 5 mm 4 1 4 5 mm L 1 8 1 8 3 mm 3 mm Fax Scanning Area 1 8 3 mm t F 1 8 2 mm T T 1 8 1 8 3 mm 2 mm 2 3 eIp W JUL pue sjeuibno eIp W JUL pue sjeulbBliO Placing Originals Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder depending on the size and type of the original and the copy modes that you want to use On the Platen Glass Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals such as books and magazines heavy or lightweight originals and transparencies 1 Lift up the feeder 3 Align the original with the appropriate paper size marks If your original does not match any of the paper size marks align the center of your original with the arrow mark 2 Placing Originals 4 Gently close the feeder NOTE Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete The original is ready for scanning A CAUTION When closing the feeder be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Do not press down the feeder forcefully as this may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury In the Feeder Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time and press Start The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning a
200. be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected f the main power switch is turned OFF all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected Turn OFF the main power switch and 2 Lift the scanning platform A until it is locked disconnect the power cord Huloouseajqnoly 12 19 Huljoousajqnoly 12 20 3 When the Message Does Not Disappear Grasp and pull the tab A on the left side of the top cover to open the fixing cover Move the control panel into the upright position Press the blue tabs A and hold the fixing unit by the parts indicated with arrows A CAUTION The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns CAUTION ATTENTION ACHTUNG iPRECAUCION ATTENZIONE HOT SURFACE TEMPERATURE ELEVEE HEISS NICHT ALTA TEMPERATURA SUPERFICIE SOGGETTA AD ALTE 2m EVITE EL CONTACTO ARE AVOID CONTACT EVITER CONTACT BER HREN BHUMAHME ATENGAO tm 2 TOPAYAR NOBEPXHOCTb SUPERF CIE QUENTE REG Bee HE MIPMKACAT
201. by sheet to the scanning area The feeder also automatically turns over two sided originals to make one or two sided copies 2 Slide Guides Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the originals 3 Original Supply Tray Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up Original Output Tray Originals that have been scanned from the Original supply tray are output to the original output tray in the order that they are fed into the feeder Original Stopper Prevents the originals from falling off the paper delivery tray Open the stopper from its original position for LTR A4 size paper For LGL size paper pull out the extension first and then open the stopper Control Panel Machine controls Stack Bypass Tray Feeds non standard size or thick thin type paper stacks 8 Stack Bypass Tray Extension Pull out to load paper stack 9 Slide Guides for Stack Bypass Tray Adjusts to the width of the paper Machine Components 0 Paper Stopper Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray Open the stopper from its original position for LTR A4 size paper For LGL size paper pull out the extension first and then open the stopper Paper Delivery Tray Copies prints and faxes are output to the paper delivery tray 2 Main Power Switch y Press to the USB Port Connect
202. can Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change LJ LTR a Avail Mem 99 G Cancel Done This section describes the flow of sending PC faxes note Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using For details application software 1 2 Open the document you want to fax from the application Select Print from the File menu NOTE The procedure for displaying the Print dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using Select your fax from Name then click Properties 11 4 5 When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt a Dest a Page a Avail Mem Cancel Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop Sending Fax Documents 0001 lt P 2 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original 1 2 a Document Size Change LJ LTR gay eae Done see the instruction manuals provided with the NOTE The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the Printers folder or Printers and Faxes See Fax in the e Manual The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are
203. ccsseeese 14 1 Specifications seeseeseessoesoesseeseeseesoeeseesoesoee 14 2 gt ou Preface Thank you for choosing a Canon product Before using the machine please read the following instructions for your safety Important Safety Instructions A WARNING Except as specifically described in this guide do not attempt to service the machine yourself Never attempt to disassemble the machine opening and removing its interior covers will expose you to dangerous voltages and other risks For all service contact your local authorized Canon dealer Handling and Maintenance A CAUTION Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it because it may be hot and result in burn injury Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine Do not subject the machine to strong physical shocks or vibrations Always unplug the machine before moving or cleaning it To avoid paper jams never unplug the power cord open the left cover or add or remove paper in the machine while printing When transporting the machine be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine Place the toner cartridge in its original protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth to prevent exposure to light Always use the hand grips on the left and right side of the machine when you lift the machine Never lift the machine by any of its trays or attachments Do not insert any objects into the slots or o
204. ccurs 12 39 If lt Set the correct paper gt is displayed 12 36 Changing the paper size setting 12 36 Reloading the paper 12 36 If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly 12 22 Illustrations used in this manual xiv Image Quality Copy 4 34 Fax 5 45 Important safety instructions ix Inserting Memory Media 7 13 Inside of the machine Clearing jams 12 13 Introduction to Using Print Functions 7 4 J Job Recall 5 64 K Keys and buttons used in this manual xiii L Legal Notices xv Copyright xv Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images xvii Third party software xvi Trademarks xv Loading paper 2 10 In the paper drawer 2 10 In the Stack Bypass Tray 2 15 Log In Out key 1 6 xlpueddy xlpueddy 14 10 Index M Machine components External view back 1 4 External view front 1 2 Internal view 1 5 Machine functions Overview ii Machine Setting 13 2 Printing 13 2 Main power indicator 1 6 Main power switch 1 3 Maintenance Replacing the Toner Cartridges 11 7 When a Message Appears 11 7 Manuals for the machine i Memory Media 7 11 Mode Memory 4 61 Checking 4 64 Deleting 4 65 Recalling 4 63 Register 4 61 Multiple Copies 4 59 N Network Connection 7 4 Non 1 4 36 2 On 1 4 36 4 37 4 On 1 4 36 4 37 Numeric keys 1 6 O OK key 1 7 One Touch Checking editing address details 3 47 Erasing 3 50 Registering e mail addresses 3 31 Registering fax nu
205. ce 2 Long Distance 3 Destination Registration Max 120 characters Register Name Max 16 characters p 3 10 Destination Registration Max 120 characters sbulqjas aulydeyy 13 11 sbulqjas aulydey 13 12 Setting Menu Register Name Destination Registration Folder Name Password Register Name Destination Registration Register One Touch Register Name Register One Touch Name Destination Registration ECM TX Sending Speed Long Distance Register Name Register One Touch Name E mail Address Register Name Register One Touch Name l Fax Address FTP Windows SMB Windows SMB Browse o O Max 299 destinations S On Domestic Long Distance 1 Long Distance 2 Long Distance 3 D Setting Menu Applicable Page Register Name Max 16 characters Register One Touch Name Max 12 characters p 3 37 FTP Windows SMB Windows SMB Browse Max 120 characters Folder Name Max 120 characters Register Name Max 16 characters Register One Touch Name Max 12 characters p 3 44 Destination Registration Max 299 destinations Max 199 destinations for the Color imageCLASS 8450c Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c and MF9150c Printer Settings tem Settings Applicable Page Number of Copies 1 to 999 Copies 1 e Manual Print 2 sided lt 7 UL 1 sided Paper Feed E Default Paper Size LTR LGL STMT EXEC FLSC OFI B OFI M OFI G LT
206. ced machine operations and functions and how to customize machine Security settings Troubleshooting Remote user interface Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies and omissions However as we are constantly improving our products if you need an exact specification please contact Canon The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine uIyDEW BU 104 Sjenuew SUOIIDUN UIYDEW JO M Q Overview of Machine Functions Depending on the system configuration and product purchased some functions may not be available Copying In addition to the Color and B W copying you can use various copy functions Basic Operation Guide Copying see on p 4 1 e Manual Copying Printing In addition to the printing from a computer you can print a document directly from memory media Basic Operation Guide Printing see on p 7 1 e Manual Printing Faxing In addition to the normal faxing you can send faxes from a computer and send faxes Basic Operation Guide Fax see on p 5 1 e Manual Fax Scanning You can store the scanning documents to the computer the file server and the USB memory Basic Operation Guide Scanning see on p 8 1 e Manual Scanning Network This machine can be connected to a network Connecting to a network enables you to use various functions Basic Operation Guide Netwo
207. cing Originals on p 2 4 the desired color then press OK Press CoD Main Menu Set Color to Balance 2 Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select mas yan Wy lt Copy gt then press OK ieee ack Back Set jJ Recall Register 2 Additional Func uldo V Bulkdo gt Adjusting Color Balance 7 4 52 Use V LA 4 P or Scroll 8 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the Wheel to adjust the strength of each desired copy quantity 1 to 99 color then press OK Start Copy Color Adjustment 100 amp J LTR 12 Frame Erase Off Set Yellow Adjustment Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial Gl Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Z Copies 12 Mode Memory Preview Img To weaken the selected color move the adjust scale to the left To heighten the selected color move the adjust scale to the right 100 E J LTR Press Start 0002 lt P 1 Printing Sheet Copies Print Status 4 12 Press the left Any key to select lt Set gt Avail Mem 99 ces Cancel Done Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Magenta 0 If you want to copy multiple originals using the Cyan 0 platen glass set an original and press Start Black 0 Back once for each page Set J Recall Register J 10 Press C Main Menu to ret
208. copies See 2 Sided Copying on p 4 22 lt Copy Ratio Settings gt Adjusts the size by enlarging reducing original images See Enlarge Reduce Images on p 4 30 lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Specifies No 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK the image type of originals See Selecting Image Quality on p 4 34 A copy lt Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page gt Reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper AA See Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on a 1 on p 4 36 lt Sharpness Settings gt Adjusts the contrast of Es the originals See Adjusting Sharpness on p 4 39 Additional Func lt Shadow Frame Erase Settings gt Erases unnecessary shadows and lines See Erasing Shadows Lines on p 4 41 lt Color Adjustment gt Adjusts the color balance for the copy See Adjusting Color Balance on p 4 51 lt Finishing Settings gt Sorts copies into sets See Collating Copies on p 4 57 lt Number of Copies Settings gt Makes multiple copies See Making Multiple Copies on p 4 59 When you press Reset all settings will return to the Standard mode If you want to keep your own settings as the Standard mode see Changing Standard Mode on p 4 66 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy C
209. correct setting The default setting is lt Tone gt Press C_D Main Menu 1 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Func l Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q El F Volume Settings Common Settings Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt User Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings OK Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Tel Line Type Selection gt then press OK User Settings Select a Register Unit Telephone gt Tel Line Type Selection gt Tone Ofthook Alarm gt On xe4 Xej Introduction to Using Fax Functions 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Manual gt then press OK the type of telephone line then press OK Tel Line Type Selection Set Tel Line Type to Manual Back Tel Line Type Selection Pulse lt Pulse gt Pulse dialing lt Tone gt Tone dialing f you do not know the telephone line type call your tel
210. creen is displayed on the initial Send screen lt One touch gt The One touch Selection Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen lt Default Screen gt The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen 8 Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Restoring the Send Function Settings to TheirDefault You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings note You cannot initialize lt Register Unit Name gt and lt Retry Times gt lt Retry Times gt is disabled for the fax functions 1 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt Select Common Settings Fax Settings Back Device Info Additional Func 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings a Select 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select TX lt Communications Settings gt then press RX Settings OK Back Additional Functions amp Select 7O Paper Settings 9 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings ui Address Book Settings Done Vv xe4 5 88 6 7 8 Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default Use V A or Scroll Wheel to sel
211. croll Wheel to select lt Details Edit gt then press OK lt All gh ea Print List i r Details Edit 8 9 Forwarding Received Fax Documents Check or change the forwarding settings Forward Without Conditions Receive as Fax For instructions on changing forwarding settings see Storing Forwarding Settings on Deo Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination 1 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select E Copy Send Store TE Print O Receive Device Info Done 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Received Job Status gt then press OK Xx Fax Select Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to transfer Received Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 10 15 0001 10 00 Sales Receiving Sales Waiting Details Erase 5 129 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 5 Press the left Any key to select lt Details gt 8 Press CD Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Received Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 10 15 Sa
212. croll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to Add Book gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6 1 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt My coy A 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select 7O Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings WR Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK Address Book List Select Register Address Register One touch Back Press the right Any key to select lt Register New gt Register Address Switch Destination Index oe p Canon Fax 031X0000K Ga Sales sales xxx xxx E Developmen 1004 ftphost tig Design Grn Edit Erase Register New Storing Editing Address Book Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax
213. cuments see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to recall then press OK 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item E M2 H3 M4 Back Details Register Erase 2 Additional Func If you select favorites that already has specified destinations the Send Settings screen appears You can change the send 3 Press the left Any key to select settings or add destinations at this time lt Favorites gt note Select Send Type Specify from Address Book You can also check the settings stored in the Address Book favorites by pressing the left Any key to select Enter Fax New lt Details gt p Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New If you select favorites that has no specified Favorites J One touch destinations the Select Send Type screen appears You can specify destinations note To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen press Reset 5 61 xe4 Xej 5 62 Favorites Checking Settings forRecalled Favorites This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen note To use this feature you must first
214. d E mail Address in E mail l Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Check that the SMTP server is operating properly Check the network status Check the network cables and connectors If the machine still does not operate normally turn the main power off and then back on Check TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Check TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Check TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally or check the network status Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check the destination setting Check the status and setting of the file server Check the name of the SMTP Server in E mail I Fax in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen See Setting IPv4 DNS in the e Manual Check the DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen See Settings from the Machine E Mail I fax in the e Manual Check that the DNS server is functioning normally 0804 You have no permission to access the folder Change the setting on the server to enable
215. d is hereby conveyed or granted by Canon s licenser to you for any intellectual property of LICENSORS 3 You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the Canon product you purchased the PRODUCT 4 You may not assign sublicense market distribute or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of Canon and LICENSORS 5 Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when a you assign all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions to transferee and b such transferee agrees to be bound by all these conditions 6 You may not decompile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human readable form 7 You may not modify adapt translate rent lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE 8 You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT 9 The human readable portion the source code of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice CANON INC MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON INFRINGEMENT CANON INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR
216. d document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions xe4 that you have specified note Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time according to the receive type of the received document To be able to forward received documents you need to activate the settings registered here See Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings on p 5 124 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select 1 lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func 5 121 Xej Forwarding Received Fax Documents 5 122 3 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Press the left Any key to select lt Menu gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off All
217. d paper cannot be removed easily h A CAUTION proceed to the next step Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step 12 14 Remove the jammed paper while lifting the duplex print transport guide A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step Lower the duplex print transport guide until it clicks into its original position i D Clearing Jams Hold the tab A of the delivery feeder unit and lift the delivery feeder unit until it clicks gt 7 Gi al 7 q zy J SEY iV AS 8 Lz NOTE If the delivery feeder unit comes off see If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly on p 12 22 A CAUTION Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is closed completely If the duplex print transport guide is not closed completely this may result in misfeeds or paper jams Remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step Huloouseajqnoly 12 15 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 16 Clearing Jams 10 Close the front cover A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Fixing Unit If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on t
218. dge box The Clean Earth Campaign THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon s Clean Earth Campaign which supports four critical environmental areas Recycling in the Workplace Conserving Environmental Resources Scientific Research and Education Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation The remaining Clean Earth initiatives are supported in the U S through sponsorships of the National Park Foundation the National Wildlife Federation and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The Nature Conservancy of Canada Since its inception The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities Instead this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process thus conserving an array of resources Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy When your cartridge is of no further use simply follow the instructions detailed for U S or Canadian residents We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet SDULUdIUILI 11 13 SIULUdIUIL Recycling Used Cartridges Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate
219. e Clear this File Selection Selected 2 Copies w DSC00034 JPG ww DSC00069 JPG 0O O DSC00109 JPG DSC00110 JPG Display Clear Print Settings E if you want to print all files of the specified extension Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Ext Select All gt then press OK Specify Filter Conditions Filter by Extension Select All Select All Specified Date Specify Date Select All Specify Extension Specify Ext Select All Back 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired extension then press OK Set Extension Select All JPEG Puud 7 25 Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print 10 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired setting then press OK Start Print Color Mode Settings Color Drawer 1 LTR Layout Off Copies Print Date Off Print File Name Off note For details about lt Print Settings gt see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media on p 7 14 1 1 Press Start to start printing When printing is complete remove the memory media note Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point 7 26 Print Logs Checking PrintJobs note Make sure that the Processing Data indicator
220. e Additional Functions screen Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check the POP Server name in E mail I Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check the POP Server name in E mail I Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally Check the network status Check the POP Server password in E mail l Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen Check the POP Server name in E mail I Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen You have reached the quota for the number of Reset or increase the page quota or contact your pages you can scan for faxing system administrator You have received data that cannot be processed Check the settings and ask the sender to resend cannot print the attached file the data You have received data that cannot be processed Check the settings and then ask the sender to MIME information is incorrect resend the data You have received data that cannot be processed BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect Check the settings and then ask the sender to resend the data Error Codes ErrorCode Descript
221. e Address Book If errors persist try selecting lt Long Distance 2 gt or lt Long Distance 3 gt 22 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Option Select ECM TX On Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Destination gt then press OK Fax Enter using the numeric keys ah O123XXXXXXX Backspace Pause Tone Option Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt Fax Register New Destination a Register Name gt FAX1touch a One touch Button Name gt FAX0002 Destination Registration gt 012300000000 Register If you want to register another fax number repeat from step 5 25 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Canon Fax 012300000000 001 Fax 002 No Reg 003 No Reg 004 No Rea Done Registering E MailAddressesin One Touch 26 Storing Editing One Touch Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen This section describes the procedure for registering e mail addresses in one touch note By storing your own e mail address you can specify a reply e mail address This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen
222. e Address Book it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 Registering Favorites You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen note The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen Press C Main Menu 3 Press the left Any key to select 7 lt Favorites gt 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select om ormie aki lt Send FAX gt then press OK Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New E gt Enter File Server New Favorites One touch 2 Additional Func 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to register then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Set Favorites Recall This Favorites Item H1 M2 M3 M4 Back Register Erase Keys registered as favorites are displayed with icons NOTE You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select lt Details gt Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK Register Name Erase
223. e Copy gt The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top bottom orientation lt Calendar Type Copy gt The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top bottom orientation 10 Press OK 11 Set 2 Sided Copy Type Original Book Copy Book El Off j 1 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 1 Sided 4 Back Layout Settings Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy 2 Sided Settings 100 J LTR 12 m Auto color Select Density 0 Bg gt 2 Sided to 2 Sided 100 1 1 Mode Memory Preview Img 1 2 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies 1 4 12 5 Print Status Avail Mem 99 Gas Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page After scanning all originals press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 2 to 1 Sided Copying note When you use the feeder to make one sided copies from two sided originals the original size must be LTR LGL FLSC or A4 1 Set originals TEZ PLOY For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C Main Menu 13 3 2 Sided Copying Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt
224. e local telephone company The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 10 is a REN of 1 0 This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs In Case of Equipment Malfunction Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide disconnect the equipment from the telephone line unplug the network cable if connected and unplug the power cord The telephone line should not be reconnected or the power cord plugged in until the problem is completely resolved Users should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling Canon Customer Care Center 1 800 828 4040 Rights ofthe Telephone Company Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services which may affect the operation of this equipment When such changes are necessary the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user xix W S Y UI Sas W S Y UI Sas XX Users in the U S A FCG Notice Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c MF8450c
225. e printer before loading paper If paper is loaded while the optional paper drawer is partially pulled out the optional paper drawer may fall resulting in damage to the machine or personal injury Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides A and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded The side paper guides move together R LG mg NOTE Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly If the guides are positioned incorrectly it may cause paper jams dirty prints etc Loading Paper Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides A and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded note Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly If the guides are positioned incorrectly it may cause paper jams dirty prints etc Fan the paper stack and even the edges eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO V 2 13 eIp W JUL pue sjeulbliOC Loading Paper 2 14 6 7 Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up Align the rear edge of paper stack with the rear paper guide note When loading paper be careful not to cut your fingers on the edges of the paper Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark A The optional paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of pape
226. e register name is longer than 10 characters the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book If the registered destination name is longer than 13 characters the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book To cancel a selected destination select the destination again to clear the check mark Specifying Destinations Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Select Clear Destination Press Set to Set Destination 4 All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO gt o Canon Fax 03100000X w a Sales sales xxx xxx E Developmen 1004 ftphost O ti Design Gra Reg Edit Erase Set W if you want to clear the specified destination Press the left Any key to select lt Confirm Erase gt Start Send Resolution Settings Canon Fax 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase J Add Destination xe4 2 Check the destination you want to clear is selected then press the left Any key to select lt Erase gt Confirm Detailed Destination Press Erase to Erase Destination y Canon Fax If multiple destinations are specified clear the other destinations as necessary 5 33 Specifying Destinations 3 Specify a destination again Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book yey Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter F
227. e right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Favorites Register Current Mode Edit Name Zo MI Jo w Jo W 4 M4 t Back Details Register Erase Keys registered as favorites are displayed with icons NOTE You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select lt Details gt Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Settings gt then press OK Register Settings Register Name Erase Details Register Erase Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt or lt Details gt then press OK Register the current settings No Yes Details To store the current settings select lt Yes gt To cancel storing the settings select lt No gt If you select a key that has settings stored select lt Yes gt to overwrite the previous settings You can check detail settings to select lt Details gt Press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Favorites Register Current Mode Edit Name Go mM Zo wm Jo W 4 M4 t Back Details Register Erase 9 10 Favorites Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK Register Settings Register Name Erase Details Register Erase Use the software keyboard to enter a n
228. e touch Specify the file server s address Set Server Protocol FTP Protocol ETP Windows SMB Windows SMB Browse Back For information on how to specify the file server s address see Scan in the e Manual Buluueds V Buluuess 8 6 Basic Scanning Operations Make the scan settings you require Start Send Color File Format Settings a server a B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi mm Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination You can specify the following settings lt Color File Format Settings gt Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending See Scan in the e Manual lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See Scan in the e Manual lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt Scans two sided originals for sending See Scan in the e Manual lt Delayed TX Settings gt Specifies the transmission time See Scan in the e Manual lt Send Document Name Settings gt Sets the name of the document for sending See Scan in the e Manual lt Subject Message Settings gt Sets the message body
229. eady green light a job is waiting or a document has been received in memory Reset key Press to restore the current settings to the Standard mode 2 OK key Press to confirm the settings and proceed to the next screen Scroll Wheel Turn left and right to select menu items or setting items VW LA 4 P keys Press to move the cursor position 5 Back key Press to return to the previous screen Any key Press to select the setting item displayed on the bottom of the display 7 Status Monitor Cancel key Press to display the System Monitor screen The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status and log of Copy Send Fax and Print jobs and cancel the ongoing jobs The status of device or consumable can also be checked 8 Display The settings screen for each function is shown on this display Some settings screens may have several pages See Display Parts and Functions on p 1 11 9 Custom Key 2 You can assign the desired function for this key For details see Registering the Custom Keys on p 1 8 20Custom Key 1 You can assign the desired function for this key For details see Registering the Custom Keys on p 1 8 1 Main Menu key Press to display the setting menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen when you are on the mode screen Control Panel aulydeW y Huls A sojeg ulypew y Huls aojeg Control Panel Registering the Custom Keys You can as
230. eaning gt then press OK Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Adjustment Cleaning amp Select a Paper Length Confirmation gt Off a pecial Mode P gt Ff Fixing Unit Cleaning Done 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Adjustment Cleaning gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done adueuajuleyy SIULUDIUIL Cleaning the Machine 5 Confirm that lt Start Cleaning gt is 6 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the displayed then press OK Main Menu screen Printing starts Fixing Unit Cleaning Print Cleaning Sheet Start Cleaning Cancel Discard the cleaning paper after use NOTE The cleaning process cannot be canceled Please wait until it is completed Scanning Area Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent Cleaning the Platen Glass Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure below A CAUTION When cleaning the machine first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock Open the feeder 2 Clean the platen glass and the underside 1 of the feeder with a cloth dampened with water Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth
231. ears When dialing an overseas number insert a pause after the country code and at the end of the fax number If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange which Ta only tone signals use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Tone gt then press OK If you want to insert a baa between numbers use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Space gt then press TOK 15 If you want to delete the entire number you entered press Clear NOTE For information on how to set the ata ofa pause see Communications Settings o 13 8 For information on how to insert a pause for an overseas number see Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses on p 5 22 You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number If you enter a pause at the end of the number the pause is always 10 seconds long If you want to set the ECM TX sending speed and long distance settings press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Fax Enter using the numeric keys 012300000000 Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Option These settings are optional If you do not want to set the optional settings skip to step 23 Storing Editing One Touch 16 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt ECM TX gt then press OK Option Select Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Dist
232. ecify the length of X then press OK Set the Length for X Adjust using up down or the dial note You can adjust values for lt X gt between 3 and 8 Wes 8 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select the vertical length lt Y gt then press OK Specify Size Long Edge Length Set Size Enter mm 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to specify the length of Y then press OK Set the Length for Y Adjust using up down or the dial NOTE You can adjust values for lt Y gt between 5 and 14 4 14 10 Use V or Scroll Wheel to select lt Set Size gt then press OK Specify Size Confirm the Set Size X 3 vas v Gas 1 1 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired paper type then press OK Enter mm Set Stack Bypass Paper Type Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond 2nd of 2 Sided J You can select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Rough gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Heavy 2 gt lt Labels gt lt Envelope gt For details see Paper Requirements on p 2 7 note If you want to print the back side of the printed paper press the right Any key to select lt 2nd of 2 Sided gt 12 Press OK to select lt Stack Bypass Tray gt amp Set Paper Source Make Copies with Stack Bypass
233. ect J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wis Address Book Settings Done 5 67 Xej 5 68 ECM Transmission Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 6 lt ECM TX gt then press OK TX Settings Select a ECM TX gt On Set Pause lime gt 2 Seconds a Auto redial gt On Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK ECM TX Send ECM Fax Documents lt Off gt Does not use ECM lt On gt Uses ECM 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 1 2 3 e Adjusting the Pause Time Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code country code and the destination s telephone number all at once In such cases insert a pause after the international access code When the machine dials the number it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number This helps to improve the connection The default setting is lt 2 Seconds gt note You can insert a pause on the screen where you specify the fax number See Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses on p 5 22 Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long Press C_D Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l
234. ect lt Initialize TX Settings gt then press OK TX Settings Select a Initialize TX Settings tj Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to initialize Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Send Start Speed 1 2 3 This function enables you to change the send start speeds which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document The default setting is lt 33600 bps gt Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set j Done J If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out to enter the System Management Settings menu 4 6 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK
235. ection Screen Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New gt Enter l Fax New gt Enter File Server New Lp ki A Fn i Lag Lo E Favorites One touch Address Book Displays the Address Book screen See Chapter 3 Registering Destinations in the Address Book 2 New Fax Entry Enter a fax number using the numeric keys See Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 3 New E mail Entry Displays the E mail address entry screen See Chapter 6 E mail 4 New I Fax Entry Displays the I Fax address entry screen See Basic Methods for Sending I Faxes on p 5 25 5 New File Server Entry Displays the file server address entry screen See Scan to File Server in the e Manual Select Send Type Specify from Log Specify from Log Y Bak l F Favorites One touch Specify from Log Select a destination from the last three destinations See Chapter 5 Fax and Chapter 6 E mail Back Select this item to return to the previous screen ulypew ey Huls sojeg aulydeW y Huls sojeg Display Parts and Functions Store Type Selection Screen Select Store Type Store on File Server Store on File Server amp Store on Memory Media 2 Remote Scan 3 Back Store on File Server Stores the scanned originals on the spec
236. eed to the next step Huljoouseajqnoly Vv Huljoousajqnoly Clearing Jams 5 Remove the jammed original Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine as it may tear 6 Return the release lever A to its original position T EN SETLIST SS Close the feeder cover Clearing Jams Paper Delivery Tray If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the output tray Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from the output tray Recover Later Next 1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and 2 Open and close the front cover to reset gently pull it out the machine If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Use the handle A to gently close the front cover A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught NOTE If unfixed toner is on the removed paper it may adhere to the paper to be printed next 12 5 Huljoousajqnoly Huljoouseajqnoly 12 6 Clearing Jams Duplex Unit If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from the in
237. eee 5 36 Sending Originals to More Than One Location Broad Casting s sseessesseessessees 5 39 Selecting Resolution ssccsssccssseesseees 5 41 Adjusting Density ccssccssscssssessscseees 5 42 Manual Exposure Adjustment 0000 5 42 Adjusting Base Color e sssesssesssesssessseesseessees 5 43 Selecting Image Quallity csssesseees 5 45 2 Sided Original ccsscssssccsssecssscesssees 5 47 Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending ssessessesseescesocescesossse 5 49 Direct Sending eesseesecesocssscesocesocssocesecesoee 5 52 FAVONITES seceisosessssscecsseonsdetecsteptacsvetsuctecsecesees 5 54 Registering FavoriteS sesessessesessessessesess 5 54 Erasing Favorites s ssssesessesessesesseseseeseseesesee 5 58 Using the Favorites e sesessesssesseossesseessesseess 5 61 Checking Settings for Recalled PAVONE S ian 5 62 Jop REGAN gaceseccserssstacrestersviceteisuieeaeeie 5 64 ECM TransmMissiOn cscccsssscsssssccssssccsseess 5 67 Adjusting the Pause Time ssccssseseees 5 69 Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy Auto Redial cssccsssssscsseeeens 5 71 Checking the Dial Tone before Send orearen NEE 5 74 Standard Send SettingS ssccsscsseees 5 76 Storing the Standard Send Settings 5 76 Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default sssesssssssseessseessseesssessssesss 5 78 P
238. eek Sunday Back The End Date Month to End DST screen appears Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Month gt then press OK End Date Month to End Daylight Saving Time Week Final Day of the Week Sunday Back Set 15 16 17 18 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the month when the daylight saving time ends then press OK Month End Date Month Selection July August September October November December Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Week gt then press OK End Date Week to End Daylight Saving Time Month October Day of the Week Sunday Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the week then press OK Week End Date Week Selection Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Day of the Week gt then press OK End Date Day of the Week to End DST Month October Week Final Day of the Week Sunday Back Set 19 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the day of the Week then press OK Day End Date Day Selection Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 20 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt End Date Day of the Week to End DST Month October Week Final Day of the Week Sunday 2 1 Press CD Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Timer Settings 1 27 ulypew y Huls 31049 Timer Settings Before Using the
239. een ssessseesssesessessssesseessseess 1 13 Store Type Selection SCreen ssesseesssesessessssesseessseess 1 14 Select Memory Media Screen Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c Only 1 14 Login WOO Ss ccitasmendtnaninisinsieanrinanandnan 1 14 TONED Cartridges eisisssntsssvesnssccsvccceacesncetssnstseasesncscsuwense 1 15 Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ccssscsecseceeeesee 1 16 Checking the Toner LeVell ecsssecssesessessssssscesseeeees 1 17 Checking the Device Information ssssssssssssesssssos 1 18 Entering CharacterS ssssssceccesescssssssssssssssscsececesssoo 1 19 Telephone Line Setting sssssssscecccscssssssssssssssssseseee 1 20 Timer Settings is cccscssccasisssscncundersinsncedsenseessassvasssseasseceas 1 22 Setting the Sleep MOde ssseesssessssesssessssesssseesseessseess 1 22 Setting Auto Clear Time sssessseesssessssesssesssseessseesssessseess 1 23 Setting the Daylight Saving Time es ssssessssessssessseess 1 24 ulypew y Huls A 31049 1 Machine Components This section describes the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the machine Front 2 9 Nut sR WAL Susy l LERA KS PANS Nb INN A UAL IN Tell if RS Nf BY i fe pi fi f xa SSe5 Cty Before Using the Machine le2 Feeder Originals placed in the Feeder are automatically fed sheet
240. een you can adjust the machine settings to customize the way the machine works See Machine Settings on p 13 2 Device Info Select with the left Any key Device Info JA Additional Func On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status and the copy scan and print page counts See Checking the Device Copy Information on p 1 18 Displays the Copy Top screen See Copy Top Screen on p 1 12 ulypew y Huls sojeg aulydeW y Huls aojeg Display Parts and Functions Copy lop Screen Start Copy amp Color Mode Settings Selected item and its description Shows the highlighted item and its description Current Setting Lists the current settings 3 Scroll Bar Indicates that more items can be viewed using V A or Scroll Wheel Quantity Displays the copy quantity Paper Supply Displays the selected paper Copy Ratio Displays the copy ratio Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 E LTR E1 Auto color Select eL E Drawer 1 i gt zi 2 Sided Off mek Mode Memory Preview Img Color Mode Settings Sets the color mode color or black and white 2 Paper Source Settings Selects the paper source 3 Density Background Removal Settings Sets the density 4 2 Sided Settings Sets 2 sided copying Preview Img You can confirm the current standard settings See Checking Current Set
241. egister New Addresses Select 10 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK E mail Register New Name a Register Name gt a Register Une touch Name gt Destination Registration gt Register j Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon E mail A 1 amp 3 8 Sym Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch Name gt then press OK E mail Register One touch Name Register Name gt fannnfF mail a Register One touch Name gt a Uestination Registration gt Register 1 1 Use the software keyboard to enter the 14 one touch name Button Name Max 12 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 12 characters for the one touch name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 12 If you are finished press the right Any key 1 to select lt Set gt 5
242. elect the one touch you want to register then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select a j 3 E mail Fax File Group Done 7 8 Storing Editing One Touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Register Name gt Register Une touch Name gt a Destination Registration D Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon Fax A 1 oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 27 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 28 Storing Editing One Touch Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch Name gt then press OK 10 Fax Register One touch Name Register Name gt fannnfFayx a Register One touch Name gt a Uestination Kegistration gt Register Use
243. elephone answering machine CNG detecting signal data modem Specifications Send to file server TIFF B amp W PDF B amp W JPEG Colon POF Color Compact Resolution TIFF PDF B amp W 100 x 100 dpi 150 x 150 dpi 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi JPEG PDF color 100 x 100 dpi 150 x 150 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 600 x 600 dpi PDF color compact 300 x 300 dpi System Environment Windows XP Professional Home Edition Windows 2000 Server Professional SP1 or later Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Solaris Version 2 6 or later Mac OS X Red Hat Linux 7 2 fincertace H00RASETH TORRE TIFF B amp W PDF B amp W JPEG Color PDF Compact Color Resolution I FAX 200 x100 dpi 200 x 200 dpi TIFF PDF B amp W 100 x 100 dpi 150 x 150 dpi 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi 600 x 600 dpi JPEG PDF color 100 x 100 dpi 150 x 150 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 600 x 600 dpi PDF color compact 300 x 300 dpi System Environment Windows XP Professional Home Edition Windows 2000 Server Professional SP1 or later Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Solaris Version 2 6 or later Mac OS X Red Hat Linux 7 2 Original Size E mail LTR LGL A4 A5 B5 l Fax LTR LGL A4 A5 B5 1 Sentas LTR Mail Forwarding Server Software Sendmail 8 93 or later UNIX Microsoft Exchange Server Windows Micro
244. en press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK 5 System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Erasing Forwarding Settings You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored 7 Press C_D Main Menu 3 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l Forwarding Received Fax Documents Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired forwarding setting then press OK Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off TEE O Fwd w o Cond l Fax O sales 1 Each time you press OK the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched lt gt The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions lt gt The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main
245. ene ee en a ree 3 24 Storing Editing One Touch scesee 3 26 Registering Fax Numbers in OG OUI mrna na 3 26 Registering E Mail Addresses in One TOUCh sssesssesesesssesssesssesssessseosseosseesssessse 3 31 Registering l Fax Addresses in One TOUCh ssesseesseesseesseesseesseesssesssesssesssessseossee 3 34 Registering File Server Addresses in One TOUCh se sseesseesseesseesseesssesssesssesssesssessseossee 3 37 Contents Registering Group Addresses in One JOUCh ss essseessecesseesssasessesssareesacassacessacsoneee 3 44 Checking Editing Addresses Registered in One TOUCh esssesssessesseesseesseesseesseesseesseesss 3 47 Erasing Addresses Registered in ONG gt TO UC assirinati 3 50 4 COPYING scccccccccscccccccsccccccecee 4 1 Overview of Copy Functions ssessessessescese 4 2 Basic Copying Method ssesssessessesscesccsose 4 4 Canceling Copy JODS ccsscsssscsssssssscsssesees 4 6 Selecting Color Mode cssccsssccssscesserees 4 7 Selecting Paper SOULCE csssccsssrcssseeees 4 9 Copying on Papers in Drawe ls ssc 4 9 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper SIZES usssisssscssessscrressssissesevisssisssssssinsis sss 4 11 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper se ssesssessseesseesseerseesseerseeeseerseeesss 4 13 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes sxctecsnasisrsersasiniremvieiessranenaneisaniann 4 15 Adjusting Density eesses
246. ephone service provider for details Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Registering the Machine s Name Your name or company s name must be registered as the machine s name When you send a document the name that you registered is printed as the sender s name on the recipient s paper 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Functions amp Select ZO Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings Common Settings Communications Settings uf Address Book Settings f Done Additional Func 4 5 6 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings amp Select Fax Settings Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select RX Settings Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Unit Name gt then press OK TX Settings Select a Register Unit Name gt Data Compression Ratio gt Normal a Retry Times gt 3 Times Done Introduction to Using Fax Functions Use the software keyboard to enter the machine s name then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Unit Name Registration 24 char Set Characters
247. er The Direct Print function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Memory Media Supported by This Machine The memory media listed below are compatible with this machine USB Memory Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot USB Memory SD Secure Digital memory card SDHC memory card Compact Flash CF Card supports Type I II 3 3 V Microdrive Puud Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print USB Memory Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO Memory cards that can be inserted in the slot using an adapter If one of the following memory cards is inserted without an adapter the card may get stuck in the slot Be sure to attach an adapter to the memory card before inserting it into the slot miniSD Card microSD Card Memory Stick Duo Memory Stick PRO Duo 1 Use the special adapter provided with the card 2 Use the SD Card Adapter provided with the card Data Supported by This Machine Note the followings so you can use an appropriate memory media Supported file systems of a memory are FAT 16 and FAT 32 You can not select the data contained in other folder at once You can not select a data in a lower level folder The following data can be used e JPEG DCF Exif2 21 JFIF e TIFF note The size of the TI
248. er IP Address Use Same Host Name Off Domain Name as IPv4 On Max 47 characters Canon xxxxxx represents the last six digits of a MAC address Domain Name Max 47 characters DNS Dynamic Update Set Off On Manual Address Regist Off On Register Stateful Address Off On WINS Configuration Off On e Manual WINS Server Address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Settings LPD Print Settings Off On RAW Print Settings Off On Use Bidirectional Off On Off On Use WSD Browsing Off On Use Multicast Discovery Off On Use PASV Mode for FTP Off On FTP Extension Off On Use HTTP Off On sbulqjas aulydey 13 23 sbulqjas aulydey 13 24 Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page rornumbersernes wissen sme issn ronsetings On HTTP Proxy Server Address Max 128 characters HTTP Proxy Server Port 1 to 65535 80 Number Use Proxy within the Same Off Domain On Use Proxy Authentication Off Settings On Receive MAC Address Off On Confirm Dept ID Password Off On SMB Settings Off On Workgroup Max 15 characters Use LM Announce Off On e Manual Network Settings Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page SNMP Settings Off On Community Name 1 Max 15 characters Public Community Name 2 Max 15 characters Writable SNMP1
249. er sizes will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased Bulkdo gt Selecting Paper Source 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired paper type then press OK Set Stack Bypass Paper Type Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond F E UJ 2nd of 2 Sided You can select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Heavy 2 gt lt Transparencies gt lt Labels gt lt Rough gt For details see Paper Requirements on p 2 7 NOTE If you want to print the back side of the printed paper press the right Any key to select lt 2nd of 2 Sided gt Press OK to select lt Stack Bypass Tray gt Set Paper Source Make Copies with Stack B Stack Bypass Tray al Drawer 1 LTR 2 Drawer 2 LTR t Back Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 8 Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 LJ LTR Auto color Select Stack Bypass LTR 12 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img Press Start 0002 P 9 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 4 12 5 a Avail Mem 99 C Cancel Done j If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Ma
250. ers 8 note You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros such as lt O000000 gt If you enter fewer than seven digits the machine stores the password with leading zeros Example If lt 02 gt or lt 002 gt is entered lt 0000002 gt is stored f you make a mistake when entering the password press Clear then enter the correct password Set the machine to print an RX report or not Report Print Output Result Report If you want to print an RX report when receiving v documents use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK If you do not want to print an RX report select lt Off gt then press OK note If you want to print an RX report you need also to set lt RX Report gt to lt On gt See Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual 5 113 Xej Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out Memory Lock Reception 5 114 9 10 Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode Memory Lock Time Settings Specify Memory Lock Time Do Not Specify Specify Back If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify gt then press OK If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings select lt No gt select lt Do Not Specify gt then press OK Go to step 12 If lt Do Not Specify gt is selected the Memor
251. f the copied image If you want to copy text and lines more clearly move the sharpness scale to the right If you want to copy a halftone original such as a picture move the sharpness scale to the left The default setting is lt 0 gt 7 Set originals 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Sharpness Settings gt then press OK Sharpness Settings 100 amp J LTR l 100 1 1 ent Text Photo Map H E Non1 Off Mode Memory Preview Img Lg ey sce aS Lo RELEG n SEB A For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press C_D Main Menu 5 Use V LA 4 P or Scroll Wheel to adjust the sharpness then press OK Set Sharpness Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK To make copies of printed images or other halftones move the sharpness scale to the left To make copies of blueprints or faint pencil drawn images move the sharpness scale to the right uldo Bulkdo gt Adjusting Sharpness 6 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Sharpness Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 100 1 1 laly Text Photo Map W E Non 1 Off Mode Memory J Preview Img 7 Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing a 100 E J LTR a Sheet Copies Print Status 1 47 12 a Avail
252. f the same color is attached then insert the cartridge until it stops fie ST Hold the toner cartridge properly by the faa it ag blue tabs on the both sides with the Hed IES arrowed side facing up After removing all the packing materials 1 1 on the each toner cartridges and installing the cartridges remove the paper on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit A CAUTION Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that is not directed in this procedure A CAUTION When removing the paper be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit SDULUdIUIL 11 11 SDULUDIUIL J Recycling Used Cartridges 12 Close the front cover A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Ifthe front cover does not close properly do not force it to close Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine 11 12 L Recycling Used Cartridges Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called The Clean Earth Campaign This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use to remanufacture new cartridges which at the same time keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartri
253. feeder unit The transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself therefore do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is damaged this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality i Huljoouseajqnoly gt 12 13 Clearing Jams 2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and 4 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and pull it out in the direction of the arrow gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow A CAUTION Gently remove the jammed paper in the A CAUTION direction of the arrow to prevent unfixed toner Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine from spilling If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily When removing the paper be careful not to proceed to the next step touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge Do not force a jammed paper out of the eres i 5 Press the lock release buttons A on the If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily duplex print transport guide and lift the proceed to the next step duplex print transport guide B If you are not performing two sided printing proceed to the next step 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Huljoousajqnoly A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jamme
254. ftware keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 note If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 15 oog ssesppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 16 Storing Editing Address Book 9 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt User Name Max 24 characters Set Characters Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Password gt then press OK FTP Password Entry a Password gt Back 1 Use the software keyboard to enter the password Password Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 24 characters when lt FTP gt is selected as the server protocol or up to 14 when lt Windows SMB gt is selected For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only 2 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Password Max 24 characters Set Characters FTP Enter User Name Host Name gt Canon File Folder Path gt share a User Name gt username File Register New Destination Register Name gt FILE0001 Destination Registrat
255. g numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register One touch Back 5 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to register then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed y Canon Fax No Reg Ga Sales H Development Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Group gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK Group Register New Name a Register Name gt Kegister Une touch Name gt a Destination Registration gt 000 Register j 9 10 Storing Editing One Touch Use the software keyboard to enter the group name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Group0001 Use
256. g Sharpness sss cessscsvsanssnanossenensscsnsniorinesasersivesosacseanencsennt 5 83 Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation 5 85 Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Defaullt 0 5 87 Send Start SHCEO sj iiscsinnninvnsinniononimmnnsamnmamnns 5 89 Receiving Faxes Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper sse00 5 91 Reducing a Received Document s ssssssssssssoosesosssossssosssosssoosesossssosss 5 93 Printing Footer Information on a Received Document s000 5 96 Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is LOW sssssssssssossssssoss 5 98 ECM Recepti Oien 5 100 Setting the Incoming Ring TONE ssessssosssoosssossscosssosssoossoosssosssoosseo 5 102 Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone Remote Receptiofi ssnnnnmusronnionnnan 5 104 Activating the Remote ReCeption ecsssssssssssseesssssssssssessnsssssssen 5 104 Receiving Documents with the Remote RECEptiOn ssssssssssee 5 105 Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode 5 106 Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders 5 108 Receive Start SHGOO sssisisisisrssiisicsrscsainriinanimannnrenuinimininn 5 110 Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out Memory Lock Reception s ssssssssssssossssoossseossssoosesoossssoosssoosssooossseo 5 112 Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception MOda sirnana iii 5 115 Forwarding Received Faxe
257. g criterion lt Space gt Inserts a space between numbers lt gt Use to insert a country code Use lt gt after the country code and before the fax number lt Backspace gt Deletes the last number entered Press the right Any key to select lt Next gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Send by Fax xe4 5 119 Forwarding Received Fax Documents xe4 5 120 12 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the forwarding destination then press OK Register Address Press Set to Set Destination lt All 0 GHI JKL MNO o Ca Sales sales xxx xxx oO H Sales FTP 1004 ftphost O ti canon grou o q Canon Fax 03200000x NOTE You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time To forward to multiple destinations select a group address You can use or P to restrict the displayed range of destinations To be able to select a forwarding destination it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand See Storing Editing Address Book on p 3 2 To cancel a selected destination select the destination again 13 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Address Press Set to Set Destination 4 All 0 GHI JKL MNO o Ca Sales sales xxx xxx o Ek Sales FTP 1004 ftphost Ww i Canon grou o y Canon Fax _n32ma000K 14 15 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel
258. g distance settings press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Fax Enter using the numeric keys 012300000000 Set Destination E Backspace Pause Tone These settings are optional If you do not want to set the optional settings skip to step 20 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt ECM TX gt then press OK Option Select Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt or lt Off gt then press OK ECM TX Send ECM Fax Documents 15 16 17 Storing Editing Address Book Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Sending Speed gt then press OK Option Select ECM TX On Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the sending speed then press OK Sending Speed Modem Send Speed 33600 bps 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps Back If your document transmissions are slow to start it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition Select a slower speed You can select lt 33600 bps gt lt 14400 bps gt lt 9600 bps gt or lt 4800 bps gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Long Distance gt then press OK Option Select ECM TX On Sending Speed 33600 bps Long Distance Domestic Back Done yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 5 oog ssesppy
259. ght Any key to select lt Done gt 410002 Send Waiting to scan Dest 2 Page 2 Document Size Change LJ LTR gy Ca Done a Avail Mem Cancel Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop 1 x Selecting Resolution You can specify the resolution before scanning the original The default setting is lt 200 x 200 dpi Fine gt note The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi is LGL For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 Press C_D Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 4 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Resolution Settings gt then press OK A Resolution Settings t 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 a 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Use W A
260. ghter Darker 1 gt Background Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker Adjusting Density Adjusting Base Color This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper that have turned yellow from age note For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Density Background Rem Set gt then press OK 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK a Start Sane t 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 E 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination J A Additional Func 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Background gt 3 Specify a destination Set Density Select Send Type Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial New Fax Entry Address Book Lighter Darker 4 gs a a z Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New Background aS Enter File Server New FEES One touch J note For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 xe4 5 43 xe4 5 44 Adjusting Density 6 7 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to selec
261. gister Name gt Destination Registration gt Back Register 9 10 Storing Editing Address Book Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon File A 1 amp gt Ri Sym Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK File Register New Addresses a Register Name gt fannnfFiled a Destination Registration gt Back Register j yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 13 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS Storing Editing Address Book 11 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select a server protocol then press OK Set Server Protocol FTP Protocol FTP Windows SMB Windows SMB Browse Back lt FTP gt Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2 6 or later Mac OS X Internet Information Services 5 0 on Windows 2000 Server Internet Information Services 5 1 on Windows XP Professional Internet Info
262. gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Register Name gt Destination Kegistration gt Back Register Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order oog sseJppy Bun p3 BUNOS V 33 oog ss appy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 4 9 10 11 Storing Editing Address Book If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon Fax A l 2 H t Sym Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK Fax Register New Addresses Register Name gt fannnfFayx Destination Registration gt Back Register j Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the fax number Fax Enter using the numeric keys Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone You can enter up to 120 characters for fax number If you want to move the position of the cursor use V LA or Scroll Wheel If you want
263. he Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to erase Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase from One touch gt then press OK Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7 1 Press C Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Address Book List lt Additional Func gt Aasia Register Address Register One touch Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the one touch you want to erase then press OK 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select EEr to Register Ed lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Canon Fax O31XXXXXXX 001 y Canon Fax Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings 002 No Reg 003 Sales 004 H Development Done E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings WR Address Book Settings Dome j note You cannot erase multiple one touch Ifa password has been set for the Address Book E ale Me aa he enter the password to enter Address Book f the desired one touch is not displayed use Settings menu Enter the password using V LA or Scroll Wheel to
264. he step above Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select paper type then press OK Paper Type Drawer 1 Set to Plain Plain Plain H Recycled Paper Color Bond Heavy 1 You can select from the following paper types lt Plain gt lt Plain H gt lt Recycled Paper gt lt Color gt lt Bond gt lt Heavy 1 gt lt Rough gt f you use the paper drawer 2 repeat the steps 4 to 6 for the paper drawer 2 Only when the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 is attached Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Setting Paper Size and Type 2 23 eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO eIp W JUL pue sjeulbliC L Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper i e paper with logos note If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper place the side you want to copy on face up when using a paper drawer face down when using the stack bypass tray Output Example Confidential Preprinted Orientation in paper Paper drawer Preprinted side Face up Orientation in stack bypass tray Orientation on the platen glass Original side Face down Orientation in the feeder Preprinted side Face down Original side Face up Registering Destinations in Chapter the Address Book This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address B
265. he display remove the jammed paper from the fixing unit Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Close the fixing cover and return the scanner unit Recover Later Next 1 Lift the scanning platform A until it is 2 Open the fixing cover holding it by its left locked tab A A CAUTION The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine are hot during use Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns CAUTION ATTENTION ACHTUNG iPRECAUCION ATTENZIONE HOT SURFACE TEMPERATURE ELEVEE HE ISS NICHT RATURA SUPERFICIE SOGGETTA AD ALTE INTACT PERATURE NON TOCCARE Santa PEDBNSD FC8 0580 EDI gt PET lt CAUTION Hot surface avoid contact ACHTUNG Heisser bereic A A ATTENTION Temperature e evee 127 t3R em PRECAUCION Alta temperatura PIFEDRNDDO 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out Clearing Jams Close the fixing cover Be careful not to get your fingers caught Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step Huljoousajqnoly 12 17 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 18 Clearing Jams Back Cover If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the LCD display remove the jammed paper from the back side of the machine Then press the right A
266. he paper size stored in stack bypass tray Standard Settings set stack bypass tray Standard Settings to Off in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen See Setting Paper Size and Type on DON Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper Slide Guides If you are feeding large size paper pull out the auxiliary tray and extend the tray extension Load the paper into the stack bypass tray Insert the paper stack as far as it will go When you print on paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it see Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart on p 2 24 W Before inserting paper 1 When you use the stack bypass tray to make copies straighten out curled paper prior to use as shown below Curled paper may cause a paper jam Feeding Direction gt 2 If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper curl the front edges of the paper upward as shown below Feeding Direction gt W To print on the back side of preprinted paper 1 Load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass tray as shown in the illustration below The screen for selecting the paper size appears Loading Paper note When loading paper into the stack bypass tray align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides If the paper is not loaded correctly a paper jam may occur
267. ic a selection of color or B amp W lt Color gt For copies in full color Ep lt Black gt For black and white copies Additional Func uldo V BulAdo gt Selecting Color Mode 6 7 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 m Auto color Select os Drawer 1 LTR j Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img Press amp Start 0002 lt P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1 67 12 a Avail Mem 99 G3 Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Selecting Paper Source You can manually specify a paper source The default setting is lt Drawer1 LTR gt note f you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100 the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy For details see Scanning Area on p 11 4 The suffix lt R gt such as in STMTR used in paper size designations indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass tray horizontally Copying on Papers in Drawers You can select paper drawer 1 or 2 optional for
268. ified file server See Scan to File Server in the e Manual 2 Store on Memory Media Stores the scanned originals in the memory media See Scanning Documents to a File Server in the e Manual 3 Remote Scan Enables to use the Network Scan function See Network Settings in the e Manual Back Select this item to return to the previous screen Select Memory MediaScreen Color imageCLASS MF91 70 9150 Only For details about the Select Memory Media Screen see Printing from Memory Media Direct Print on p 7 11 amp Browse Dry Media Press Set to Set Destination Memory Media A Back Insert a memory media select a media then press OK Log In Mode If the Department ID Management or User ID Management is set the Log In screen is displayed For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management see Security in the e Manual For Department ID Management User ID and Password Ha User ID and Password Key Entry User ID Password After entering press the ID key When finished press the ID key Press OK enter the Department ID and password then press 0 Log In Out For User ID Management Dept ID and Password Ha Dept ID and Password Key Entry Dept ID Password After entering press the ID key When finished press the ID key Press OK enter the User ID and password then press 0 Log In Out
269. ight paper at a time When printing on special types of paper such as heavyweight paper or transparencies make sure to correctly set the paper type especially if you are using heavyweight paper If the type of paper is not set correctly it could adversely affect the quality of the image Moreover the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair or the paper could jam f you are printing on envelopes do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated If you select lt Custom Size gt for copying you cannot use the 1 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 2 Sided Frame Erase or Image Combination mode See Copy in the e Manual If you select lt COM 10 gt lt Monarch gt lt DL gt lt ISO C5 gt lt ISO B5 gt for copying or printing you cannot use the Collate 1 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 2 Sided Frame Erase or N on 1 mode See Copy in the e Manual Envelopes may be creased in the printing process e For high quality printouts use paper recommended by Canon For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine see Paper Requirements on p 2 7 eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO V 2 15 eIp W JUL pue sjeulbBliO 2 16 Loading Paper 1 2 Open the stack bypass tray Z Z a note If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass tray is different from t
270. il l Fax File Server Send Log Address Book Favorites One touch Scan to Store Store on Memory Media Remote Scan Direct Print Copy Send Fax Scan to Send FAX E mail l Fax File Server Send Log Address Book Favorites One touch Scan to Store Store on Memory Media Remote Scan Direct Print The default settings is Store on Memory Media for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c and MF9150 Send Fax for the Color imageCLASS 8450c 13 6 Brightness Adjustment Darker Brighter 5 Reverse Color Display Off On Auto Clear Settings Selected Function Initial Function Inch Entry Off On Cey o Stack Bypass Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Reeve Stack Bypass Off On Off On Off On Stack Bypass Off On Off On Off On Sleep Mode Energy Use Low High Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page e Manual Introduction of the Machine 13 7 sbuljjas aulydey sbuljjas aulydey 13 8 Setting Menu Stack Bypass Speed Priority Print Side Priority Speed Priority Print Side Priority Speed Priority e Manual Print Side Priority Introduction of the Language Switch Off Machine On Error when Feeder is Dirty Off On Initialize Common Settings No Yes Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Communications Settings common seinas OO TX Settings Register Un
271. il in the e Manual lt E mail Priority Settings gt Sets your e mail priority See E mail in the e Manual lt Register Favorites gt Stores frequently used send settings for future use See E mail in the e Manual 7 Press Start Start Send Color File Format Settings admin xxx xxx xx Dest 1 w B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes Press Start Start Send Color File Format Settings 1 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination Basic E Mail Operations 10 Follow the instructions on the display 1 1 When scanning is complete press the then press amp Start once for each right Any key to select lt Done gt original 0001 lt P 1 Ready to scan 0001 lt P 2 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 2 Document Size Change Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change LJ LTR a
272. ile in the TIFF format lt PDF gt Forwards the file in the PDF format NOTE This procedure is not necessary if a fax number or an l fax address is specified as the destination in step 8 Go to step 13 To view a TIFF file a software application that supports the TIFF format such as Imaging for Windows is required To view a PDF file Adobe Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader is required xe4 1 1 Press the right Any key to select lt Divide Pages gt File Format Send as TIFF TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages PDF Do Not Divide into Pages Back Divide Pages 5 123 xe4 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 12 Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings You can set whether received documents are forwarded 1 2 5 124 If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files each of which consists of only one page use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK twice Divide into Pages Separate Files and Send If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt then press OK twice Press C_D Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 13 3 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt th
273. in Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 10 Selecting Paper Source Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper This section describes how to copy onto non standard sized paper using the stack bypass tray note If lt Stack Bypass Paper gt setting in lt Paper Settings gt from the Additional Functions screen is set to lt Off gt the paper size type setting screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to lt On gt copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type See Setting Paper Size and Type on p 2 20 1 Gy Set originals VA Serna z DL os SE Z For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C_D Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK 2 Additional Func If you set envelopes transparencies or labels in the stack bypass tray the collate mode cannot be selected Load the paper into the stack bypass tray Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Custom Size gt then press OK Set Stack Bypass Paper Size Paper Other Than Standard Size Custom Size COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 A B Sizes Press OK to select the horizontal length lt X gt Specify Size Short Edge Length 5 y Set Size Back Enter mm uldo Bulkdo gt Selecting Paper Source 7 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to sp
274. ing One Touch 3 26 Checking editing address details 3 47 Erasing One Touch 3 50 Registering e mail addresses in One Touch 3 31 Registering fax numbers in One Touch 3 26 Registering file server addresses in One Touch 3 37 Registering group addresses in One Touch 3 44 Registering l fax addresses in One Touch 3 34 Symbols Used in this manual xiii System Management Set 13 19 T Telephone Specifications 14 4 Telephone line jack 1 3 Telephone Line Setting 1 20 Timer Settings 1 22 13 17 Setting Auto Clear Time 1 23 Setting the daylight saving time 1 24 Setting the sleep mode 1 22 Toner Cartridges 1 5 1 15 Checking the toner level 1 17 Maintaining 1 16 Replacing 11 8 Transporting the Machine 11 19 14 12 U UFRII LT 7 4 USB Connection 7 4 USB port 1 3 USB Slot 1 10 V Volume Control Dial 1 6 1 10 Volume Settings 13 6 W When the message does not disappear Clearing jams 12 19 Canon CANON INC 30 2 Shimomaruko 3 chome Ohta ku Tokyo 146 8501 Japan CANON U S A INC One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A CANON CANADA INC 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 1P7 Canada CANON EUROPA N V Bovenkerkerweg 59 61 1185 XB Amstelveen The Netherlands CANON FRANCE S A S 17 quai du Pr sident Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex France CANON COMMUNICATION amp IMAGE FRANCE S A S 12 rue de l Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex France CANON U K LTD Woodhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8B
275. ion Adon 0821 You have received data that cannot be Check the settings and then ask the sender to processed TIFF analysis error resend the data The read job failed because TIFF or JPEG files Confirm that the supported file format is used were not supported or the image data was and then read data again corrupted 0827 You have received data that cannot be Check the settings and then ask the sender to processed contains MIME information that is not resend the data supported 0828 You have received HTML data Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML and then resend the data 0829 Data that contains more than approximately This machine can store up to approximately 1 000 1 000 pages is received pages of data in memory but will delete any data that exceeds this limit Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages 0839 The user name or password for the SMTP Check the user name and password for SMTP Authentication in Authentication Encryption Authentication in Authentication Encryption in E mail l Fax in Network Settings in System in E mail I Fax in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions Management Set from the Additional Functions screen is incorrect screen See Confirming Necessary Information for Scan to E Mail and l fax in the e Manual Hulooyuseajqnoly 12 35 Huljoousajqnoly 12 36 K If lt Set the correct paper gt 1s displayed When
276. ion gt hostname Back Register W if you select lt Windows SMB Browse gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired workgroup then press OK Browse File Server Specify from Network Server ANDROMEDA YAMADAN WORKS HORK4 WORKS Set j NOTE If the desired workgroup is not displayed use W A or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired workgroup Storing Editing Address Book 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the desired file server then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Browse File Server Specify from Network Server W 46 a PRIVATE_GANDER fq PUBLIC_GANDER 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired file server then press OK Browse File Server Specify from Network Server 4 6 GANDER AGIRA PEGASSA GUYROS Set note To enter the user name and the network password select a file server from the list and press OK Enter the user name up to 24 character and network password up to 14 characters then press the right Any key to select IES note If the desired file server is not displayed use W A or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired file server 4 Specify the folder path user name and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in If you select lt FTP gt or lt Windows SMB gt 5 Press the right Any key to select
277. ion on how to register group addresses see Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book on p 3 18 4 Press ther Edit Name Display Name Details Camon Storing Editing Address Book ight Any key to select lt Done gt USAa EAA Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 3 23 yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ss appy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 24 Storing Editing Address Book Erasing Addresses from the Address Book This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses from the Address Book note This section describes how to erase the destinations registered in the Address Book from the Additional Functions screen You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the destination you want to erase Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase from Add Books then press OK Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7 1 Press __ Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Address Book List lt Additional Func gt OERS Register Address Register One touch Back
278. ions are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon File A 1 3 8 Sym Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch Name gt then press OK File Register One touch Name Register Name gt fannnfFiled a Register One touch Name gt a Uestination Registration gt Register 1 1 Use the software keyboard to enter the one touch name Button Name Max 12 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 12 characters for the one touch name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 12 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt One touch Name Max 12 Char Set Characters 13 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK File Register New Addresses a Register Name gt Canon File a Register One touch Name gt Filal a Destination Registration gt f Register Storing Editing One Touch Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select a server protocol then press OK Set Server Protocol FTP Protocol FTP Windows SMB Windows SMB Browse Back lt FTP gt Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a c
279. is on or blinking When the Processing Data indicator is off there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status 1 2 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Print gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select ail Copy AT Send Store Fax O Receive Device Info Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Job Status gt then press OK Print Select Job Status Log Copy Log Printer Log RX Print Log Memory Media Print Log Report Print 4 5 6 4 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking You can check the numbers of prints and the print results or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired job then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Print Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0009 07 37 Copy 0010 07 38 Copy 0011 07 38 Copy Printing Waiting Waiting Details Cancel Check the print job status then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Details Display Selected Job Details 0015 Printing 2008 04 11 07 41 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Puud 7 27 Puud 7 28 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs Checking Print Logs Canceling PrintJobs note Make sure that the Processing Data indicator is on or blinking When the
280. it Name Max 24 characters p 5 14 Data Compression Ratio High Ratio Normal Low Ratio Retry Times 0 to 5 Times 3 e Manual Fax Scan E mail Change Send Func Mode Register e Manual Initialize Fax Scan E mail Color Mode Settings Color PDF Compact Color PDF Color JPEG e Manual B amp W TIFF Scan B amp W PDF Email Divide Pages Off On Setting Menu tem Settings Applicable Page Resolution Settings 100 x 100 dpi 150 x 150 dpi 200 x 100 dpi e Manual Normal 200 x 200 dpi Fine 200 x 400 dpi Fax Super Fine 300 x 300 dpi 400 x 400 dpi Scan Ultra Fine 600 x 600 dpi E mail Density Background Removal Lighter Darker 0 Background Off e Manual Background Removal Fax Background Fine Adjust Yellow Red Scan Green Blue E mail Original Type Text Photo e Manual Text Fax Photo Scan Priority level Text Priority Photo Priority 0 E mail 2 sided Original Settings Off Book Type Original p 5 47 Calender Type Original TX Terminal ID Off On Printing Position Inside Tel Number Mark FAX TEL Color Send Gamma Value Gamma 1 0 Gamma 1 4 Gamma 1 8 Gamma e Manual Scan E mail Text Photo Photo Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority N e Manual Scan E mail
281. it View Favorites Tools Help 5 eae z i cis F 7 gt _ aS Q Back gt x A p Search Sg Favorites tS Se Address amp http fixxx xxx xxx xxxf_top html Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Device Name Product Nene Color imageCLASS MF9170c Location Printer Q Ready to print Scanner O Ready to scan 0 Ready to send or receiving fax Sys en flanager Viode O End User Mode eormation Enter Document User Name to control print jobs of the owner User Name Starting the Remote UI 2 For System Manager Mode click OK For 2 For System Manager Mode enter the End User Mode enter the User Name and System Manager ID and the Password and click OK click OK For End User Mode enter the User F Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer N a m e a n d cl l C k O K File Edit View Favorites Tools Help A A a an m Q Back Q x a A Search Sf Favorites amp B N a Address amp http jj xxx xxx xxx xxx _top html Remote Ul lt Top Page gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sxx x a O JO search Sie Favorites Kz 2B B E Address amp http fixxx xxx xxx xxxf_top html Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Remote UI Copyright CANON INC 2008 All Rights Reserved Device Name Product Nme Color image
282. ize then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes 9 10 11 Direct Sending Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 a 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination J Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0002 P 1 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change DUR 99 Coe Cancel Done a Avail Mem When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 0001 P 2 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 2 Document Size Change LJ LTR Avail Mem 98 Ca Done Cancel Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop 5 53 Xej 5 54 lt Favorites You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory You can register up to 4 favorites This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings note The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased even if the power is turned OFF Ifan address included in a favorites is deleted from th
283. k Change Display Method 1 Change File Selection Display Select Print Settings 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Conditions gt then press OK Set File Selction Method Currernt Level File Filter Normal Specify Conditions Back 7 22 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the file that you want to print then press OK Select File Clear this File Selection Selected 6 Copies wy DSC00001 JPG wy DSC00002 JPG w DSC00033 JPG w DSC00034 JPG Display Clear Print Settings 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Print Settings gt amp Select File Clear this File Selection a Selected 6 a Copies w DSC00001 JPG Ww DSC00002 JPG uw DSC00033 JPG w DSC00034 JPG Display Clear Print Settings W if you want to print all files on the specified dates Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify Date Select All gt then press OK Specify Filter Conditions Filter By Date and Select Select All Specified Date Specify Extension Specify Ext Select All Back 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the start date then press OK Specify Date Range From 2007 05 13 2007 05 14 2007 05 16 2007 05 17 Back 3 Use V LA or Printing from Memory Media Direct Print Scroll Wheel to select the end date then press OK Specify Date Range To 2007 05 1
284. k up the handset when you hear the recipient s voice If you hear a high pitched signal instead of the recipient s voice go to step 10 Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes When you hear a high pitched signal use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Start gt then press OK before hanging up the handset Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing Sending Fax Documents If your machine is set for pulse dialing use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services e g banks airline reservations and hotel reservations note To talk to the other party you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine 1 2 Press C Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book gt Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New l Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Press the left Any key to select lt Hook gt a Enter Fax with Numeric Keys Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook 5 Enter the number of the f
285. k Type gt Sided to 2 Sided Ejs 3 2 Sided to 2 Sided fl 2 Sided to 1 Sided 4 Back Layout Settings note If there are odd number of originals when the 1 Sided to 2 Sided mode is used the back side of the last copy is left blank Press the right Any key to select lt Layout Settings gt Set 2 Sided Copy Type Copy Book Type El Off El 1 Sided to 2 Sided gj 2 Sided to 2 Sided Z 2 Sided to 1 Sided t Back Layout Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Vertical Original gt or lt Horizontal Original gt then press OK Set Original Orientation Vertical Original Vertical Original Horizontal Original t Back uldo V 4 23 Bulkdo gt 2 Sided Copying 8 4 24 9 Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Book Type Copy gt or lt Calendar Type Copy gt then press OK Set Finishing Layout Book Type Finishing 23 Book Type Copy Calendar Type Copy t Back lt Book Type Copy gt The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top bottom orientation lt Calendar Type Copy gt The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top bottom orientation Press OK Set 2 Sided Copy Type Copy Book Type Ej Off j 1 Sided to 2 Sided j p 2 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 1 Sided 4 Back Layout Settings 10 Use 0 9 numeric ke
286. keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 5 25 xe4 5 26 6 Sending Fax Documents Make the scan settings you require Start Send Resolution Settings Dest 1 john xxx xxx xx 200x200 dpi jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination You can specify the following settings lt Color File Format Settings gt Sets lt B amp W TIFF Divide into Pages gt or lt B amp W TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages gt lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See Fax in the e Manual lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See Faxin the e Manual lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See Fax in the e Manual lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt Scans two sided originals for sending See Fax in the e Manual lt Delayed TX Settings gt Sends scanned documents at a specified time See Fax in the e Manual lt Send Document Name Settings gt Sets the document s name See Fax in the e Manual lt Subject Message Settings gt Sets the subject line and message body text See Fax in the e Manual lt Reply to Settings gt Sets the reply to address See Fax in the e Manual lt Register Favorites gt Stores frequentl
287. l scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes 1 0 Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination 1 1 Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0001 lt P 1 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 Page 1 Document Size Change LJ LTR 99 Coe a Avail Mem Cancel Done Sending Fax Documents 12 When scanning is complete press the right Any key to select lt Done gt 0001 P 2 Ready to scan Start Scanning Next Original Dest 1 a Page 2 a Document Size Change J LTR a Avail Mem ny ae Cancel Done Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press c8 Stop Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents Manual Sending Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically note You cann
288. l size then press OK Set Original Size LTR Originals LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes note To switch to the A B Sizes press the left Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the paper source then press OK Set Paper Source Set to Stack Bypass Tray Stack Bypass Tray Drawer 1 LTR Drawer 2 LTR Back If you select lt Stack Bypass Tray gt specify the paper size and type note If you want to make two sided copies of N on 1 see 2 Sided Copying on p 4 22 If you want to make N on 1 copies from two sided originals select lt 2 Sided to 1 Sided gt in the two sided settings For details see 2 Sided Copying on p 4 22 9 10 Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy Non Settings 100 amp LJ LTR 12 Custom Copy Ratio laly Text Photo Map Wi 20n1 Mode Memory Preview Img Press Start 0002 P 1 Printing a 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 4 12 5 99 Cms Cancel Done a Avail Mem If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page After scanning all originals press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Press __ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Adjusting Sharpness You can set the sharpness o
289. lamp lights up Microdrive SD MS Co cr a S ZB Insert into the lower Slot 1 Be sure to attach the memory medium to the special adapter before inserting it into the slot 2 Use SD Card Adapter Provided with the card Removing Memory Media A CAUTION Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point 1 Make sure that the access lamp is not blinking then remove the memory medium from the slot Printing from Memory Media 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Direct Print gt then press OK 2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up 3 Press C__ Main Menu Direct Print Device Info Additional Func 5 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the memory medium that stores the data that you want to print then press OK amp Select Memory Media Select this Memory Media Memory Media A Memory Media B Back Index Print If you want to print an index of all the files in the selected memory medium see Index Printing on p 7 18 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the folder that contains the data that you want to print then press OK Browse Folder File Select this File Selected 0 Copies O
290. layed sending However the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70 depending on the following conditions If multiple documents are being sent at the same time If large documents are being sent If there are jobs other than delayed sending Once the delayed documents are sent the documents are automatically deleted from memory You can check the status or cancel the transmission of jobs for which a preset send time has been specified See Checking Deleting Fax Transmission Documents on p 5 138 Place your originals 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Press C Main Menu xe4 V 5 49 Xej 5 50 Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending Specify a destination 4 Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Delayed TX Settings gt then press OK 5 Delayed TX Settings t 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 Delayed Send Off vet Direct Send Off of Favorites t Back Confirm Erase Add Destination J Enter the send time using 0 numeric keys then press OK 6 Set Delayed TX Send at Set Time 07 01 2008
291. les Receiving 0001 10 00 Sales Waiting Details Erase 6 Press the left Any key to select lt Forward gt Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0002 Status Receiving Set Time 07 30 2008 09 30 Dept ID Destination xe4 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the destination then press the right Any key to select lt Start gt Set Forwarding Destination Start to forward to selected AM ff Canon USA 031X00000X gt Sales I FA 1003 ifax E Sales FTP 1004 ftphost tig Sales GROU Start NOTE You can use 4 or P to restrict the displayed range of destinations To be able to select a forwarding destination it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand See Storing Editing Address Book on p 3 2 5 130 Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors Forwarding Received Fax Documents You can set how the machine handles the documents that failed to be forwarded The default settings are as follows lt Print Image gt On lt Store Image to Memory gt Off note Ifa forwarding error occurs when all of lt Print Image gt lt Store Image to Memory gt and lt Memory Lock Settings gt are set to lt Off gt the received documents will be lost If lt Memory Lock Settings gt is set to lt On gt forwarding error jobs are not printed even if lt Print Image
292. lication you are using do not used it together with this function If you do printing may not be executed correctly You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine the settings from the printer driver has priority Display the Page Setup sheet x General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quality Output Method E Print Profile E Default Settings Es jal Page Size a Output Size Match Page Size z Copies 1 a 1 to 999 Orientation Portrait Landscape Page Layout 1 Page per Sheet A I Manual Scaling Scaling 1004 25 to 200 Letter Scaling Auto Viow Saliinge I Watermark CONFIDENTIAL z Edit Watermark Page Options Restore Defaults Custom Paper Size Cancel Apply Select the page layout from Page Layout 4f Print x General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quality Profile bo Default Settings ee Qutput Method E Print Os Bg Page Size Letter x a Output Size Match Page Size Copies 1 a 1 to 999 Orientation Portrait Landscape Page Layout 2 Pages per Sheet iil Page Orde
293. ling If you insert a pause within the fax number the letter lt p gt is displayed between the numbers If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number the letter lt P gt appears When dialing an overseas number insert a pause after the country code and at the end of the fax number See Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses on p 5 22 lt Tone gt Select when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange which accepts only tone signals If you select lt Tone gt and press OK the letter lt T gt appears lt Direct Send gt Send documents directly to the recipient Select lt On gt then press OK If you do not select direct sending mode memory sending mode is used See Direct Sending on p 5 52 lt Hook gt Send a fax document manually or use tone dialing See Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents Manual Sending on p 5 19 or Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing on p 5 21 Specifying Destinations NOTE You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number Ifyou enter a pause at the end of the number the pause is always 10 seconds long You can press Clear to clear your entry If lt Confirm Entered Fax No gt in lt Restrict the Send Function gt in lt System Management Set gt under lt Additional Func gt is set to lt On gt you should enter the fax number ag
294. ll Wheel to display lt Standard Mode Reg lnitialize gt then press OK Standard Mode Reg Initialize l 100 E L LTR Sp Standard Settings Change 4 Back Preview Img Mode Memory Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 4 lt Initialize gt then press OK Standard Settings Change Change Standard to Factory Setting Register Initialize Back E Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy Logs This section describes how to confirm copy jobs logs or cancel copy jobs Checking Copy Jobs You can check the status of a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed 7 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select T Send Store J Fax T Print O Receive Device Info Done 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Job Status gt then press OK Job Status Log Back 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired job then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Copy Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0001 06 40 1 x 99 Printing 0002 06 40 1 x 99 Waiting 0003 06 40 1 x 99 Waiting 0004 06 40 41x99 Waiting Details Cancel Check the copy status then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Details Display Selected Job Details Printing 2008
295. llate Off Copies 1 Mode Memory J Preview Img 4 6 7 Adjusting Color Balance Press the right Any key to select lt Recall Register gt Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Magenta 0 Cyan 0 Black 0 Back Recall Register Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired memory key then press OK Recall Color Balance Recall this Color Balance Register Erase Press the left Any key to select lt Set gt Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 1 Magenta 1 Cyan 0 BlackO Back Set J Recall Register J Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen uldo V 4 55 Bulkdo gt Adjusting Color Balance Deleting Color Balance This section describes how to delete the color balance setting 1 Press C Main Menu 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK ai coy A 2 Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Color Adjustment gt then press OK 100 LJ LTR l i Binding Erase Gl Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Zl Copies 1 Mode Memory Preview Img J 4 Press the right Any key to select lt Recall Register gt Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Magenta 0 Cyan 0 Black 0 Back Set Recall Register J 5 Use V A or
296. llows 1 2 3 18 In the Select Send Type screen use W LA or Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt KS Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to Add Book gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6 Use W A or Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings ff Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register One touch Back Press the right Any key to select lt Register New gt Register Address Switch Destination Index lt All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO r Canon Fax 031X00000K a Sales sales xxx xxx g Developmen 1004 ftphost tig Design Grn i Edit Erase Register New J
297. lly and create a fire risk do not block the exhaust vent Never block or cover any openings on the machine by placing it on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface Do not place the machine in a cupboard or built in installation or near a radiator or other heat source unless proper ventilation is provided Leave at least 4 100 mm around all sides of the machine ST lesa 4 100 ue or more mi v O O E z a 44 7 8 1 140 mm 21 1 2 546 mm Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet Keep the area free so you can reach the outlet quickly If you notice anything unusual smoke strange odors noises around the machine unplug the power cord immediately Contact Canon Customer Care Center Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not place the machine where the cord will be walked on Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked Power Supply During electrical storms turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet Please note that any data stored in the memory including received fax documents will be deleted about 60 minutes after you turn off the main power switch or unplug the power cord Whenever you turn off the main power switch wait at least five seconds before you turn it on again Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptible power supply UPS A WARNING
298. lor imageCLASS MF9150c Serial number On the label located inside top of the front cover Place of purchase Huljoouseajqnoly Nature of problem Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results A CAUTION If the machine makes strange noises emits smoke or odd odor turn off the main power switch immediately disconnect the power cord and contact Canon Customer Care Center Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself note Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty 12 40 Machine Settings Chapter This chapter explains how to change and check the machine settings Machine Settings ciccscssssevecsesssoossssvasacccdenesncescssseesssesvss 13 2 Printing USER S DATA LIS recrescscccnsniconses 13 2 Accessing the Setting MenU sssessseesssessssessssessseessseess 13 3 Setting MGI sssscascscerscincsencesoosesiocnestianseineanwosssevanierss 13 5 Paper SUIS ssrscsserecan 13 5 Volume Settings ssiesisassceaatitatiararnannaioanauatmaine 13 6 COMMON SeN Ssnan caren 13 6 Communications Settings sss sssssseessesssessseessesseesseesss 13 8 Address Book Settings ssseessseesssessseesssessssesssseesseesssee 13 11 Printer SS UNS secrersrcsseninenaniaan 13 13 Timer Settings seirian iiia 13 17 Adjustment Cleaning ssssesessesseserssssersssserssseressseee 13 18 Report SettingS se ssessseresessessrreseesssesseesseroseesseossreseesss 13 19 System Ma
299. ls on p 2 4 quantity 1 to 99 then press OK 2 Press __ Main Menu Set the Number of Copies You can also use numeric keys 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK 12 v 1 99 6 Press Start Additional Func 0002 lt P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status Boal Avail Mem 99 ccs Cancel Done If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page 7 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen uldo Bulkdo gt Checking CurrentSettings This section describes how to confirm the current settings Press C Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select ane 2 lt Copy gt then press OK Additional Func Press the right Any key to select lt Preview 3 Img gt Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 E LTR E1 Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img 4 Check the current settings then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Preview Image Display Current Setting Details 5 Press C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen x Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory You can set any possible combination of copy modes and store them as a mode memory There are four m
300. ls are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise li Option B Volume Box Return eight or more cartridges We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges Call 1 800 667 2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box Seal the box Apply the Canon Canada Inc Canada Post label provided in this brochure Canon s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise Customers who hold a Commercial pick up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up Working to preserve endangered species is a long standing Canon interest To this end for every cartridge collected Canon Canada donates 1 shared equally between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the Nature Conservancy of Canada This donation is utilized in Canada SDULUdIUIL 11 17 SIULUDIUIL Transporting the Machine For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada please call or write to Canon 1 800 667 2666 Canon Canada Inc Corporate Customer Relations 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga ON L5T 1P7 11 18 gt u Transporting the
301. mbers 3 26 Registering file server addresses 3 37 Registering group addresses 3 44 Online Help 7 5 online help 7 10 Optional cassette Specifications 14 6 Optional Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 1 3 Clearing jams 12 11 Original output tray 1 3 Originals requirements 2 2 Original stopper 1 3 Original supply tray 1 3 Overview Machine functions ii Overview of Print Functions 7 2 P Paper delivery tray 1 3 Clearing jams 12 5 Paper drawer 1 3 Paper Drawer 1 Clearing jams 12 10 Paper Drawer 2 Clearing jams 12 11 Paper Requirements 2 7 Paper Settings 13 5 Paper Source 4 9 Paper stopper 1 3 PCL 7 4 Placing originals 2 4 In the Feeder 2 5 On the platen glass 2 4 Platen glass 1 5 Power failure 12 39 Power socket 1 4 Power switch Sub power supply 1 6 1 10 Preface ix Preset Zoom 4 30 Printable Area 2 9 Printer Specifications 14 3 Printer Settings 13 13 Printing Documents from Computer 7 5 Printing from Memory Media 7 14 Printing from Memory Media Direct Print 7 11 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 7 9 Printing USER DATA LIST 13 2 Processing Data indicator 1 6 R Receive mode Answer 5 7 Auto RX 5 5 DRPD 5 9 Fax Tel Switch 5 6 Manual RX 5 8 Recycling cartridge 11 13 CANADA PROGRAM 11 17 U S A PROGRAM 11 14 Reduce images Copy 4 30 Relationship between original orientation and preprinted paper output chart 2 24 Removing Memory Media 7 14 Report Settings 13 19 Reset key 1 7 Resolu
302. me Product Nme Color imageCLASS MF9170c Location Printer Scanner Fax Q Ready to print O Ready to scan O Ready to send or receiving fax Language User ID English b Enter User ID and Password B ii ki Ea D Internet note If no password is set you can log on without entering a password Operate the Machine Now you can manage the machine on the web browser For details see Settings from a PC in the e Manual F Remote Ul lt Device Status gt Color imageCLASS MF9170c Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sax bA 5 x a JO search Sie Favorites A B BS Ei Address amp http fixxx xxx xxx xxxf_devmgr html J Color imageCLASS MF9171c 2 2 Device Status Basic Functions Status Printer Ready to print Scanner O Ready to scan Fax e Ready to send or receiving fax Paper Information z Jey SEINE Stack Bypass None E A Exo Drawer 1 Some Letter LTR Consumables Information Remaining Cyan Toner OK Remaining Magenta Toner OK Remaining Yellow Toner OK Remaining Black Toner OK Memory Information Available Memory 100 Internet Viaintenance This chapter describes how to perform routine cleaning operations and replace toner cartridges Cleaning the Machine ccccccccsssssssssssssssssees 11 2 EXOT 9 ge
303. me Erase Width Set Frame Erase All at Once All Sides 3 16 Apply Settings Back Enter mm NOTE To enter values in millimeters press the left Any key to select lt Enter mm gt NOTE The default setting is lt 3 8 10 mm gt The maximum original frame erase width that you Gansetls lt Ielay lO Olin When entering the value in millimeters you can also use W LA Scroll Wheel or 9 numeric keys Ifyou want to change the value press Clear before entering the new value Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen E If you want to specify the erase width value for all sides Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt All Sides gt then press OK amp Set Frame Erase Width Set Frame Erase All at Once Center 3 8 All Sides 3 16 Apply Settings Back Enter mm 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to enter a frame erase width value then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Adjust using up down or the dial 3 16 v 1 16 1_15 16 note The default setting is lt 3 16 6 mm gt The maximum original frame erase width that you can e sy lo Oma Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Apply Settings gt then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Set Frame Erase All at Once Center 3 8 All Sides 3 16
304. mon Settings Fax Settings Back 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt User Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings Select Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press TX Settings OK RX Settings Back Additional Functions Select J L2 Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings Common Settings lt f Communications Settings ui Address Book Settings Done 6 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Tel Line Type Selection gt then press OK User Settings Select a Register Unit Telephone gt Tel Line Type Selection gt Auto a Utthook Alarm gt On 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Manual gt then press OK Tel Line Type Selection Set Tel Line Type to Manual Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 8 the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine then press OK lt Pulse gt Pulse dialing lt Tone gt Tone dialing Be sure to check the type of telephone line you are using and make the correct setting If this setting is incorrect you will not be able to communicate with other machines Tel Line Type Selection Pulse 9 Telephone Line Setting Press Co Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 1 21 ulypew y Huls aojeg aulydeW y Huls sojeg Zz Timer Settings Setting the Sleep Mode Whe
305. munications Settings Rs Address Book Settings Done J If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual m oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 37 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 38 4 Storing Editing One Touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK Address Book List Select Register Address Register One touch Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to register then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt File gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select E mail amp I Fax gs Group i Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Register Name gt a Register Une touch Name gt a Destination Registration gt Register j 8 9 10 Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinat
306. n Place your originals 4 Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch LRE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Press C Main Menu 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Direct Send Settings gt then Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select press OK lt Send FAX gt then press OK A Direct Send Settings w 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 E Delayed Send Off Direct Send Off F Favorites t Back Confirm Erase Add Destination 2 Additional Func 6 7 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Set Direct Send Send by Page lt Off gt Send after all pages are scanned lt On gt Send each page as it is scanned Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jam Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination J Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the original s
307. n The memory is full The original is too long The scan area is dirty The TEL number is not registered This size cannot be used with 2 Sided unit modes Wait a moment The machine is full of jobs Print send or delete any documents stored in memory Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one Send the document with low resolution When this message appears during using the feeder the scanning document stops halfway In this case clear the paper jam from the ADF The number of TX RX jobs that can The maximum numbers of jobs be stored in memory reached the that can be stored in memory are maximum as follows Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c and MF8450c with ITU T No 1 Chart standard mode Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving or 75 e mail and l fax jobs for receiving Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory Also print send or delete any documents stored in memory The originals fed from the feeder Reduce the length of the originals is longer than 24 7 8 630 mm or to within 24 7 8 630 mm then try are not feeding correctly again The originals are longer than If the originals are shorter than 14 14 355 6 mm when you are 355 6 mm then try the procedure sending e mail l fax or sending a again document
308. n Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the menu you want to access then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Paper Settings Volume Settings Common Settings Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done lt Paper Settings gt lt Volume Settings gt lt Common Settings gt lt Communications Settings gt lt Address Book Settings gt lt Printer Settings gt lt Timer Settings gt lt Adjustment Cleaning gt lt Report Settings gt lt System Management Set gt sbuljjas aulydey Machine Settings E sbuljjas aulydey 13 4 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select a submenu then press OK Paper Settings Select a tack Bypass Paper Std gt Off a Drawer 1 gt No Settings a Drawer 2 gt No Settings Done note For details on the submenu see Setting Menu on o 13 5 To register the settings or go to a submenu item press OK Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen K Setting Menu The default settings are indicated in bold text note Depending on the country of purchase some settings may not be available The menus described in this section are based on the model Color imageCLASS MF91 70c Depending on the model of your machine some settings may not be available Paper et Bypass Paper Std Off On Paper Size Inch Size LTR LGL
309. n the machine remains idle for a certain period of time it automatically enters the Sleep mode The default settings are lt On gt and lt 15 Minutes gt 1 2 Press Co Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Timer Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Printer Settings j Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings D System Management Set l Done 4 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Auto Sleep Time gt then press OK Timer Settings Select Date Time Settings a Auto Sleep Time gt 15 Minutes a Auto Clear lime gt 2 Minutes Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Auto Sleep Time Use Auto Sleep Use V A or Scroll Wheel to set the desired interval then press OK Auto Sleep Time Ha You can also use numeric keys Minutes You can set the interval using numeric keys 7 Press Co Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen note To enter the Sleep mode manually press Power on the operation panel The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when e the machine is in operation e the Processing Data indicator is lit or flashing a message is on the display and the Error indicator is flashing e there is a paper jam in the machine e the handset of the external
310. nagement SettingS ssesssesssessesseesseesse 13 19 sbuljjas uUIyPeW sbuljjas aulydeyy lt Machine Settings You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works To see the list of current settings print out USER S DATA LIST Printing USER S DATA LIST 1 2 3 Press C__ Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func I Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Report Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning T Report Settings System Management Set F Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Print List gt then press OK Report Settings amp Select Settings Back Use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt User s Data List gt then press OK Print List Select Address Book List User s Data List Back 6 1 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to print the user s data list If you do not want to print the list Use W LA or amp Scroll Wheel select lt NO gt then press OK Accessing the Setting Menu Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 7 3 Machine Settings Press C Mai
311. nals The default setting is lt Off gt 7 Set originals 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Density Background Rem Set gt then press OK Density Background Rem Set 100 ee L LTR p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR jm Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J ley scape Z For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press Co Main Menu Set Density Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Background gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Lighter Darker 11 j gt lt Copy gt then press OK Wy Background Additional Func BHulkdo gt Bulkdo gt Adjusting Density 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the background setting then press OK W if you select lt Background Removal gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Background Removal gt then press OK Set Background Settings Base Color Removal R Off R R Background Removal t Back 2 Press OK then skip to step 7 Set Density Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial Lighter Darker 40 gt Background W if you select lt Background Fine Adjust gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Background Fine Adjust gt then press OK Set Background Settings Manual Base Color Adjustment R Off R R 4 20
312. nd time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Timer Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select Printer Settings Timer Settings j Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Date Time Settings gt then press OK Timer Settings Select a Date Time Settings Auto Sleep lime gt 60 Minutes Auto Clear Time gt 2 Minutes 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Current Time Settings gt then press OK Date Time Settings Select a Current Time Settings gt 07 01 2008 15 50 Time Zone Settings Daylight Saving Time Set gt Off Done Enter the current date and time using 0 9 numeric keys then press OK Date Time Settings Enter using the numeric keys MM DD YYYY Se Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Setting the Type ofTelephone Line Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine Introduction to Using Fax Functions If this setting is incorrect you will be unable to communicate with other machines Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using and make the
313. ndividual error codes ErrorCode Description Adon 0001 Paper or originals are jammed Remove any jammed paper or originals See Clearing Jams on p 12 2 Huljoouseajqnoly 0003 Communications that take longer than the preset Reduce the resolution or divide the document time 64 minutes caused the error into two or more parts and then try sending the document again See Selecting Resolution on p 5 41 When receiving a document ask the sender to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it 12 30 Error Codes ErrorCode Description Adon 0005 The recipient did not answer within 35 Confirm that the recipient s machine is able to seconds communicate and try again The recipient s machine is not a G3 fax Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party 0009 There is no paper Load paper See Loading Paper on p 2 10 The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into Insert the paper drawer properly See Loading the machine Paper on p 2 10 The document could not be sent because the Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax recipient s machine was out of paper machine 0018 The recipient s machine did not respond when Confirm that the recipient s machine is able to your machine redialed communicate and then try again The documents could
314. ned for laser printers Canon recommends you to use Canon type transparencies with this machine pas ou Printable Area The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use F 1 4 5 mm 4 1 4 5 mm p X 1 4 1 4 5 mm 5 mm 2 9 eIp W JUL pue sjeulBliO eIp W JUL pue sjeuibno 2 10 K Loading Paper This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers and stack bypass tray In the Paper Drawer This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer or in the optional paper drawer 1 2 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine A CAUTION Make sure to take the paper drawer out of the machine before loading paper If paper is loaded while the paper drawer is partially pulled out the paper drawer may fall resulting in damage to the machine or personal injury 3 Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides A and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded The side paper guides move together IRACLS M Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly If the guides are positioned incorrectly it may cause paper jams dirty prints etc Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides A
315. ngth 108 in 2 743 mm Maximum girth length 2 x width 2 x height 130 in 3 302 mm If your shipment exceeds the above limits please call 1 800 OK Canon for special shipping information Please Note Do not send defective cartridges for replacement Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty SDULUdIUIL 11 15 SIULUDIUIL Recycling Used Cartridges Shipping Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide Residents of Alaska and Hawaii Do not use the UPS authorized returning label For Alaska and Hawaii Canon set up alternative mail service with the U S Postal Service Please call 1 800 OK Canon to receive U S Postal Service merchandise returning label Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery UPS may charge a fee for customers who call UPS to pick up a cartridge shipment if they do not already have a delivery scheduled or Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point 11 16 Recycling Used Cartridges CANADA PROGRAM CANADA PROGRAMME i Option A Single Box Return Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end blocks from the new cartridge s box Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge Seal the box Apply the Canon Canada Inc Canada Post label provided in this brochure Canon s labe
316. ning images that you are sending each time so that you do not exceed the Send Data Size Limit Set Divide into Pages to On in the File Format screen Check the recipient s address Check that the network is up 0752 0753 0755 0801 0802 The SMTP server name for e mail or l fax is not correct or the server is not functioning The domain name or e mail address may not be set The network is down A TCP IP error occurred while sending an e mail message Socket Select error etc You cannot send jobs because TCP IP is not functioning correctly The IP address is not set When the machine was turned ON an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP RARP or BOOTP server A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e mail message The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect The destination is not correct An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server The name of the SMTP Server in E mail l Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen is incorrect The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP IP Settings in Network Settings in System Management Set from the Additional Functions screen is incorrect Connection to the DNS server failed Error Codes ErrorCode Description eto Check the SMTP Server name domain name an
317. nnot be specified for each file Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select the layout type then press OK Set Layout Auto Print 2 Files on 1 Page W E Off Wj 20n1 Mj z 40n1 4 Back 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK The number of copies will be set to 1 when layout is set TIFF file selection will be cleared Is this OK Puud V 7 17 Puud Printing from Memory Media Direct Print E ie select lt Print Date gt or lt Print File 10 Press to start printing ame gt When printing is complete remove the memory media NOTE Only JPEG data can be printed Even if the G NOTE selected files contain TIFF data only JPEG data is printed Do not remove the memory medium when the characters indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt On gt then press OK Set Print Date Print Date Index Printing You can print an index of the data saved on a memory medium P NOTE 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select This functions is only available for JPEG If the selected medium lt Direct Print gt then press OK contains TIFF files they are not printed 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot Direct Print Additional Func 2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit
318. nnot occur 3 Order anormal business line from your telephone company s business representative The line should be a regular voice grade line or equivalent Use one line per machine DDD DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE Or IDDD INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS note Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards e g the 2500 touch tone or 500 rotary pulse dial telephones A dedicated extension off a PBX machine without Camp On signals is also permissible with the machine Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes which may cause a fax error Power Requirements The power outlet should be a three prong grounded receptacle Single or Duplex It should be independent from copiers heaters air conditioners or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled The rated value is 120 volts and 15 amperes The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation W S Y UI Sas W S Y UI Sas xxii Users in the U S A Notice This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications This is confirmed by the registration number The abbreviation IC before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry
319. not be sent because the Confirm that the recipient s machine is able to recipient s machine was busy communicate and then try again The settings on your machine do not match the Check that the settings on your machine match settings on the recipient s machine those on the recipient s machine and that the recipient s machine is able to communicate Try sending again No pause was included in the telephone Insert a pause after the country code or after number when sending a fax overseas the fax number of the recipient and then dial the number again See Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses on p 5 22 Change the Long Distance setting if you are sending documents to a destination stored in the Address Book or One touch See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book on p 3 2 or Storing Editing One Touch on p 3 26 0037 Documents could not be received because Print send or delete any documents stored in there is insufficient memory available memory The data size exceeds the available memory Reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format 0059 Your transmission is canceled because the Check to see that the correct fax number is number you dialed was different from the registered on the other party s fax machine number registered on the other party s fax machine 0099 A job was interrupted when the Direct Print or Try to execute the job if necess
320. nre nee een nn eee ene ee 11 2 TEELS LPA E ene near nee P se rene A EA ner er 11 3 SCING A eh acetates ace acnccecanneeecincetetestgaaeeesuaieses 11 4 Replacing the Toner Cartridges ssssssssssssssssseees 11 7 When a Message Appeal sssssssssssssssssssessessssesssessseees 11 7 Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One 11 8 Recycling Used Cartridges cccccsccscsssssssssseees 11 13 The Clean Earth Campaig0n ccsssssssssssssesseeseee 11 13 USA PROGRAM scires 11 14 CANADA PROGRAM CANADA PROGRAMME 11 17 Transporting the Machine ccccccccccccccesesees 11 19 DuLu ZUIeW SDULUDdIUIL Cleaning the Machine If the original is not copied clearly clean the machine For high quality printouts we recommend cleaning the machine once or twice a month A CAUTION Do not use alcohol benzene paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning Doing so may result in damage to the plastic parts Do not use tissue paper paper towels or similar materials for cleaning they can stick to the components or generate static charges Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly and clean the area around the base of the power plug s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp dusty or smoky location dust can build up around the power plug and become damp
321. ns Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Memory Lock Settings gt then press OK Activity Report amp Select E mail l Fax Settings Fax Settings Memory Lock Settings Done If the Memory Lock Password has been set enter the Memory Lock Password using numeric keys then press OK 6 Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out Memory Lock Reception Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt Memory Lock Settings Use Memory Lock Option lt Off gt Does not use the memory lock reception mode If you select lt Off gt press OK then go to step 12 lt On gt Uses the memory lock reception mode If you select lt On gt press the right Any key to select lt Option gt then go to the next step If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode enter a password up to seven digits using 0 9 numeric keys then press OK Memory Lock Password 7 digits Ha Enter Password Using Num Keys 0123456 Leave blank if not required If you set a password it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings or cancel the Memory Lock mode If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password press OK without entering any numb
322. ns in the Address Book See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book on p 3 2 If you use the Color imageCLASS MF8450c you can register only one touch destinations in the Address Book Address Books can be saved imported and transferred using the Remote User Interface See Settings from a PC in the e Manual For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 2 Press C__ Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E y Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book gt then press OK Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book ce Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter Fax New B Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired destination then press OK Select Clear Destination Press Set to Set Destination lt All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO O g Canon Fax 031X00000X o Ca Sales sales xxx xxx o Developmen 1004 ftphost O ij Design Gro Reg Edit Erase Set j The icons displayed on the Address Book are z Fax You can select multiple destinations at a time F E mail a a Fax File Server i Group note You can use 4 P to restrict the displayed range of destinations If th
323. nssiaans 5 41 Adjusting Density sssccsscassccsnssessccdssennsietsevecsansssnsscstcsersescneusersiacssinasats 5 42 Manual Exposure Adjustment wesssssssssssssesssssssssssesssssssesesssssssssssesessees 5 42 Adjusting Base Color sisiceassnoveivininteaosaeveeisiveevesadstessngntereanteenenosetanivennst 5 43 Selecting Image Quality ssssssssssssssscsssesssessesssessssssssssssssssseeseees 5 45 2 SIDED ORIGIN Al ssiri nasarian 5 47 Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending 08 5 49 Direct SENGING i sinisnnivniamdninmmnnnianunmannamnanni 5 52 E A E E A A E 5 54 Registering FAVOTES rrasiunarairi 5 54 Erasing Favorite S siiin 5 58 USING the FAVOCICES sissioni 5 61 Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites cssssssssesssssssseesssssesesssee 5 62 Job Recall smmscnvaninnsnramana 5 64 ECM Transmissi anii 5 67 Adjusting the Pause Time sssssssossssosssossssosssosssoosssosssoosssosssosssoosseosss 5 69 Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy Auto Redial 5 71 Checking the Dial Tone before Sending ssssssssssosssscossseossssoossseossse 5 74 Chapter Standard Send Settings scsscissssiescsseisessssonssssssenvasavesssnvvensoncavesvenssvnsne 5 76 Storing the Standard Send Settings csssssccsseesssssssessseeesssssssesseesssee 5 76 Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default 0 5 78 Printing the TX Terminal ID sssssssosssossssosssoosscosssoossoosssosssoossoosssoosse 5 80 Adjustin
324. nswering machine otherwise the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically 5 7 XJ xe4 5 8 Introduction to Using Fax Functions O Manual RX Mode In this mode you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone and only occasionally receive fax documents Before using this mode Make sure to do the following Connect your external telephone to the machine See Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual Set the receive mode to lt Manual RX gt See Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 When an incoming call is received If you do not pick up the Extension telephone rings handset while the WRI CANN TERE 2 eii daone e S ele te fax calls telephone is ringing If you pick up the handset For fax calls while the telephone is You hear a slow beep tone This means ringing another fax machine is trying to send you a document Follow the procedure below to receive the fax documents 1 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Fax gt then press OK 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Start gt then press OK 4 Hang up the handset For telephone calls You hear someone on the line Start your conversation If lt Remote RX
325. ntation lt Calendar Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top bottom orientation Press OK Set 2 Sided Copy Type Original Book Type E Off j 1 Sided to 2 Sided j 3 2 Sided to 2 Sided 2 Sided to 1 Sided t Back Layout Settings Use 0 9 numeric keys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy 2 Sided Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 E1 Auto color Select as Drawer 1 LTR Z 2 Sided to 1 Sided Mode Memory J Preview Img 1 1 Press Start 12 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 122 Avail Mem 99 Gas Cancel J Done J If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page After scanning all originals press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 2 Sided Copying BHulAdo gt E 4 29 Bulkdo gt Enlarge Reduce Images You can convert a standard sized original to a different standard sized copy preset zoom or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1 increments custom copy ratio The default setting is lt 100 1 1 gt W Preset Zoom Zoom by Percentage Copies Original Original Preset Zoom You can enlarge or
326. nual On Security e Manual Introduction of the Machine Update Firmware Off Follow the Machine s On instruction Start Setup Guide No e Manual Yes Introduction of the Machine PDL Selection PnP FAX UFRII LT PCL5c PCL6 UFRII LT XPS Appendix SPO CUI CATIONS sasinsccesasscusasecseseessxassoscnsavivsnssessasacesessevens 14 2 CSIC e IE EE E EE ET EA AEE ETE 14 2 CODO an a E IE EI 14 3 ed N E AA A N E E A A 14 3 PAC SHINS EEEE 14 4 T RON sueann eto er Ps eee ee 14 4 S S EA N EA A E E A EE E 14 5 Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Optional 14 6 NACE EE E A EAN AE N 14 7 o x pu ddy xlpueddy 14 2 L Specifications Power Source 120 V 127 V 60 Hz Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product Max Less than 1300 W 1350 W with optional Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Approx 96 Ib 44 kg including toner cartridges 21 1 2 W x 20 3 4 D x 24 7 8 H 546 mm W x 527 mm D x 632 mm H 21 1 2 W x 21 3 8 D x 36 7 8 H 546 mm W x 543 mm D x 936 mm H with optional Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Installation Space 21 1 2 W x 44 7 8 D x 31 1 4 H 546 mm W x 1140 mm D x 792 mm H with drawer pulled out and with back cover and feeder open 21 1 2 W x 44 7 8 D x 43 1 8 H 546 mm W x 1140 mm D x 1095 mm H with optional Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 attached drawer pulled o
327. nuine toner including counterfeits For details see the following website canon com counterfeit Checking theToner Level Toner Cartridge The Device Info screen indicates one of three levels for the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges If the toner gauge indicates that the toner is empty it is recommended that the toner cartridges be replaced See Replacing the Toner Cartridges on p 11 7 1 2 Press Co Main Menu Press the left Any key to select lt Device Info gt a coy Al b Additional Func l The screen below indicates there is sufficient toner in the toner cartridge Device Information Done Paper Info Toner B U e KOK O LTR OK C OK Avail Mem 99 OK The screen below indicates that only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine You can continue printing Proceed to step 4 Device Information Done Paper Info Toner 8 U K Low J ELTR Y OK C OK Avail Mem 99 OK Recovery Steps 4 note It is recommended that you purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when needed The screen below indicates the toner cartridge is running out of toner Device Information Done Paper Info Toner 8 WU K Empty O LTR Y OK C OK Avail Mem 99 MOK Recovery Steps ulypew y Huls sojeg f Press the right Any key to select lt Recover
328. ny key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from inside the back cover 3 Close the back cover 2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and 4 Open and close the front cover to reset gently pull it out the machine If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle 1 L When the Message Does Not Disappear When the message that indicates a paper jam occurring inside the top cover does not disappear even after the jammed paper is removed this indicates that the jammed paper still remains in the fixing unit Remove the fixing unit using the following procedure to remove the jammed paper A CAUTION The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns CAUTION ATTENTION ACHTUNG iPRECAUCION ATTENZIONE HOT SURFACE TEMPERATURE ELEVEE HEISS NICHT RATURA SUPERFICIE TTA AD ALTE AVOID CONTACT EVI BHVMAHME TOPAYAA MOBEPXHOCTb Sl i HE MPUKACATBCA CAUTION Hot surface avoid contact ACHTUNG Heisser bereich ATTENTION Temperature e evee 1279 aA PRECAUCION Alta temperatura PIFEDEN When you remove the fixing unit you have to turn the main power switch OFF Sending or receiving documents cannot
329. o specify the optional settings press OK again W If you specify the optional settings for lt Fax Tel Auto Switch gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Tel Auto Switch gt then press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Reception Mode Selection Fax Tel Auto Switch Auto RX Fax Tel Auto Switch Manual RX Answer Mode DRPD Select Fax Option 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Ring Start Time gt then press OK Fax Tel Auto Switch Select Fax Tel Ring Time 15 Seconds After Ring Action Receive Back Done 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to specify the duration 4 to 30 seconds for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing then press OK Ring Start Time Ha You can also use numeric keys Seconds You can also use numeric keys to specify the duration If the machine receives a fax the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically The default setting is lt 6 Seconds gt 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Tel Ring Time gt then press OK Fax Tel Auto Switch Select Ring Start Time 0 Seconds Fax Tel Ring Time 15 Seconds After Ring Action Receive Back Done 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to specify the duration 15 to 300 seconds of ringing then press OK Fax Tel Ring Time
330. o Ga Sales o g Development Q Design Groun Reg Edit Erase Set W if you want to clear the specified destination 1 Press the left Any key to select lt Confirm Erase gt Start Send Resolution Settings Canon Fax 200x200 dpi j Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase J Add Destination Specifying Destinations 2 Check the destination you want to clear is selected then press the left Any key to select lt Erase gt Confirm Detailed Destination Press Erase to Erase Destination Canon Fax If multiple destinations are specified clear the other destinations as necessary 3 Specify a destination again Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter I Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch 5 35 xe xe4 5 36 Specifying Destinations Using the Group Addresses Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one touch This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations You can register up to 299 199 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c destinations in one group You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one touch note For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 Specifying a Gr
331. o large If such is the case reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format 1 Open the document you want to print 3 Select your printer from Select Printer from the application then click Page Setup Select Print from the File menu ey Eeee 2 Gene inishing Paper Source Quality Select Printer S Untitled Notepad Oj x File Edit Format Help Status Ready J Print to file Mer Ctrl M ie Find Printer Open Chrl 0 Save ckrl 5 2 oe Pees Number of copies BEE Save 5 Cikas F Cotte EE eo eit Cancel ppiy The printer driver screen is displayed NOTE The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using Puud V 7 5 Printing Documents from Computer 4 Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen Match Page Size m 1 Page per Sheet a ea Click Print ia 1 Page per Sheet Match Page Size pase im I 2 Printing begins m Printing 1 x Scaling Documents You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size such as reducing a document created in LTR size to print on STMT or enlarging a document created in STMT size to print on LTR There are two methods for scaling a document select the output size of the document to scale it automaticall
332. ode memories and they can be assigned names for increased convenience This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings note Even if the power is turned OFF the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted Registering Mode Memory This section describes how to register the copy settings to a mode memory note Even if the power is turned OFF the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted 3 Press the left Any key to select lt Mode Memory gt 7 Press C__ Main Menu a 7x Sta o O 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select e ria een e lt Copy gt then press OK 100 OLR F E1 Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Jf Preview Img 2 Additional Func NOTE The currently specified settings are registered for the mode memory V 4 61 Bulkdo gt Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory 4 5 4 62 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the mode memory key that you want to store the copy settings under then press the right Any key to select lt Register Erase gt Recall Mode Memory Recall this Mode Memory go mi Jo m2 Jo m3 Jo m4 4 Back Details Register Erase Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Settings gt M1 MZ Mi Register Settings Md Register Name Ba Erase Details _ Register Erase W if you want to name the
333. olor Mode Settings 100 E J LTR 12 p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR j Density 0 Bg 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img J If you make a mistake when entering values press Clear and enter the correct values The copy quantity appears on the right side of the Copy top screen Basic Copying Method Press Start to start copying 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 1x 4 125 a Avail Mem 99 k Cancel Done When scanning is complete remove your originals note You cannot change copy mode settings such as the copy quantity paper size and copy ratio while the machine is copying NOTE You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying f you want to cancel a copy job see Canceling Copy Jobs on p 4 6 or Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs Checking Copy Logs on p 4 69 To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode press Reset If the machine remains idle for more than two minutes the display returns to the Main Menu screen Auto Clear Time You can change the value of time for the Auto Clear Time For details see Setting Auto Clear Time on D 1423 If you want to make another copy when there is an ongoing job press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Then repeat from the step 1 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the
334. oly 12 23 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 24 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly 6 Close the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught 7 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch D b Error Messages When a message appears on the display please refer to the examples of error messages in the table below Message Description ction Cannot find server Cannot use this function at this time Check TCP IP Check that all of the covers are closed This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available This message is displayed when you set the originals in the feeder in Fax Send mode The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined You have specified the group addresses when the line is off the hook You have specified the One touch that has registered with other than fax number when the line is off the hook The registered group is already nested for three levels of subgroups e g a group registered in a group in a group in a group You selected the One touch that has already been registered when you are registering group addresses You selected group addresses that has already been registered when you are registering a One touch The machine s TCP IP is not operating If you need more space wait for the machine to send any
335. ome filled with air flatten envelopes by hand in the direction of the them by hand before loading them into the arrows to remove any curls Repeat this stack bypass tray step five times for each set of five envelopes NOTE Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed Load the envelopes as shown below The screen for selecting the paper size appears note The stack bypass tray can hold 10 envelopes at a time Envelopes may be creased in the printing process Loading Paper eIp W JUL pue sjeulBLiIO 2 19 eIp W JUL pue sjeuibno For theStack Bypass Tray x Setting Paper Sizerand Type This section describes how to set paper size and type loaded into the paper drawer s and stack bypass tray You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass tray The default setting is lt Off gt 1 2 Press C__ Main Menu Multi purpose tray Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Paper Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions amp Select O O Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings a Address Book Settings Done 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Stack Bypass
336. ommon Settings Fax Settings Back 5 7 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings amp Select TX Settings RX Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Change Send Func Mode gt then press OK TX Settings Select Change Send Func Mode IX Terminal ID gt On a Color Send Gamma Value gt Gamma 1 8 Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Initialize gt then press OK Change Send Function Std Mode Initialize Send Function Std Mode Register Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to initialize Press __ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Standard Send Settings 5 79 xe4 4 Printing the TX Terminal ID The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax Information such as your fax number and name is printed enabling the recipient to know who sent the document The default settings are as follows lt TX Terminal ID gt On lt Printing Position gt Outside lt Tel Number Mark gt Fax 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt xe4 Device Info Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to selec
337. omputer running Sun Solaris 2 6 or later Mac OS X Internet Information Services 5 0 on Windows 2000 Server Internet Information Services 5 1 on Windows XP Professional Internet Information Services 6 0 on Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 7 0 on Windows Vista or Red Hat LNUX 7 2 lt Windows SMB gt Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX Linux Samba 2 2 8a or later or Windows 98 Me 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista lt Windows SMB Browse gt Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network NOTE After turning the main power on you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting lt Windows SMB Browse gt Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed See Network Settings in the e Manual oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS V 3 39 oog ss appy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 40 Storing Editing One Touch W if you select lt FTP gt or lt Windows SMB gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Host Name then press OK FTP Host Name Entry Host Name gt Folder Path gt a User Name gt 2 Use the software keyboard to enter the host name Host Name Max 128 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the host name For information on how to use the software keyboard
338. on Auto Adjust Image Reduction Auto Fixed Reduction Back lt Auto gt The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio If you select lt Auto gt press OK then go to step 12 lt Fixed Reduction gt The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for lt Reduce gt in the next step If you select lt Fixed Reduction gt press OK then go to the next step Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Reduce gt then press OK 10 Receive Reduction Select a RX Reduction gt Auto a Reduce gt 90 a Keduce Virection gt Vertical Only Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the reduction ratio then press OK 11 Reduce Reduce 90 12 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Reduce Direction gt then press OK Receive Reduction Select a RX Reduction gt Auto a Reduce gt One a Reduce Direction gt Vertical Only Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 13 lt Vertical and Horizontal gt or lt Vertical Only gt then press OK Reduce Direction Reduce Vertical Only Vertical and Horizontal Vertical Only Back lt Vertical and Horizontal gt The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions lt Vertical Only gt The image is reduced in the vertical direction only 14 Press Co Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Reducing a Received Document
339. on Cartridge 117 K C M Y Cartridge 111 Black Color imageCLASS MF9170c Cartridge 111 Magenta A 6 Color imageCLASS MF9150c Cartridge 111 Yellow i pede Cartridge 111 Cyan Cartridge 117 Black Approx 6 000 pages Color imageCLASS MF8450c Cartridge 117 Magenta Cartridge 117 Yellow Approx 4 000 pages Cartridge 117 Cyan ulypew y BuisN sojeg f ulypew y Huls sojeg Toner Cartridge Maintaining the Toner Cartridges Note the following when handling toner cartridges A WARNING Do not place the toner cartridges in fire Toner powder is flammable A CAUTION If there is a toner powder leakage make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder If it comes in contact with your skin rinse with cold water using soap If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder consult a doctor immediately When removing the toner cartridges from the machine make sure to remove them carefully If not removed with care the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth If this happens rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately Keep the toner cartridges away from small children If they ingest the toner powder consult a doctor immediately Do not disassemble the toner cartridges The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth If this happens rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately note Keep the toner cartridges away from computer screens
340. ons 199 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c as a single destination note You cannot register new destinations in a group address New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers e mail addresses l fax addresses and file server addresses You cannot register a group address in a group address This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to One touch gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5 1 Press C__ Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Select 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt 7O Paper Settings Q Volume Settings E Common Settings gf Communications Settings WB Address Book Settings Done J If a password has been set for the Address Book Device Info Additional Func enter the password to enter Address Book CM_ Cc Settings menu Enter the password usin
341. ont cover to reset the machine Close the front cover gently holding the handle A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Clearing Jams 12 9 Huljooyusajqnoly Huljoousajqnoly 12 10 Clearing Jams Paper Drawer 1 If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the paper drawer Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from drawer 1 Recover Later Next 1 Using the handle pull the paper drawer 3 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position half way out 2 Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it 4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle A A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Clearing Jams Optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the optional paper drawer Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from drawer 2 Rec
342. ook and how to edit and erase registered information Storing Editing Address Book ccscccsssecesceseeeees 3 2 Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book 3 2 Registering E Mail Addresses in the Address ole 0 Cara eet E Once en ere ee oe eee 3 7 Registering I Fax Addresses in the Address DB ON soscsesdccates cateaeaste eget NA 3 10 Registering File Server Addresses in the Address BOOK onar A EE E 3 12 Registering Group Addresses in the Address BOOR oaar E A AEA AN 3 18 Checking Editing Addresses Registered in the Address BOOKissiisiissrecisiiireerieninaniniuindssiieiainie 3 21 Erasing Addresses from the Address Book 3 24 Storing Editing One Touch sssssssscssccceseessosssssssss 3 26 Registering Fax Numbers in One Touch 3 26 Registering E Mail Addresses in One Touch 3 31 Registering I Fax Addresses in One Touch 3 34 Registering File Server Addresses in One Touch 3 37 Registering Group Addresses in One Touch 3 44 Checking Editing Addresses Registered in OO Gh eae 3 47 Erasing Addresses Registered in One Touch 3 50 yoog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS oog ssesppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 2 E Storing Editing Address Book The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers e mail addresses l fax addresses and file server addresses You can also register multiple destinations for a group address Registering a destination in the Address Book
343. or Scroll Wheel to select the desired resolution then press OK Set Resolution Send With This Resolution 200x100 dpi Normal 200x200 dpi Fine 200x400 dpi SuperFine 400x400 dpi UltraFine 5 41 xe4 xe4 5 42 4 Adjusting Density Manual Exposure Adjustment You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original note For details on how to send the documents see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes on p 5 17 1 2 3 Press C_D Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E ea Additional Func Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New g Enter File Server New Favorites One touch NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Density Background Rem Set gt then press OK D Density Background Rem Set w 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi yam Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Use P or Scroll Wheel to adjust the density then press OK Set Density Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial Li
344. or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine as this may result in burns or electrical shock The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns f loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing wash with cold water Warm water will set the toner When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician When removing jammed original or paper take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper After clearing all paper jams remove your hands from the machine immediately Even if the machine is not in operation your hands hair or clothing may get caught in the feed rollers which could result in personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing note Remove jammed paper while the power of the printer is on If the power is turned off the data being printed will be deleted When you remove the fixing unit to remove jammed paper however the data being printed will be deleted because you have to turn the machine OFF Applying excess force may result in
345. or printing specify the correct size of paper in the lt Paper Settings gt menu Check the destination Check the status of the network Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected Wait for a while and try browsing again If you still fail try selecting another server Not enough TCP IP resources Wait a moment and perform the operation again Perform the operation again A transmission error has occurred Check the line condition then try again because the line condition was poor Prepare a new toner cartridge The toner is running low Prepare a new toner cartridge The machine is not ready for Wait until the machine is ready scanning Preparing Press the OK key Printer Error Received in memory Remove the jammed paper from An original jam may have occurred in Remove the jammed original inside the cover of the feeder the feeder Remove the jammed paper from Remove the original from the feeder You cannot browse the network due to a lack of TCP IP resources This may be because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent through FTP or Windows SMB Stop has been pressed while scanning the document using the feeder Some kind of error has occurred in the machine The machine temporarily received the data in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine This error message appears with one of
346. ot make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Plaza Lake Success NY 11042 U S A TEL No 1 516 328 5600 The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual In order to program this information into the machine follow the instructions in the Starter Guide gt l us Users in Canada Pre Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See p 14 2 for the machine s weight and dimensions Order Information 1 Provide only a single line to touch tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a standard 4 pin modular phone plug Touch tone is recommended if available in your area 2 Order an CA11A modular jack USOC code which should be installed by the telephone company If the CA11A jack is not present installation ca
347. ot use group addresses for manual sending 1 Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine see Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual 2 Place your originals You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass V ee le xe4 xe4 Sending Fax Documents 3 4 6 7 Press C__ Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK Select Send Type New Fax Entry Address Book gt Enter E mail New Enter Fax New l Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Press the left Any key to select lt Hook gt or pick up the handset of your external telephone a Enter Fax with Numeric Keys Set Destination Backspace Pause Tone Hook Dial the recipient s fax number You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax number Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard the call may not connect or the wrong number may be dialed Talk through the handset to the recipient If you select lt Hook gt in step 6 you can pic
348. ou can set how many times the machine redials the redial interval and whether the document should be resent due to an error The default settings are as follows lt Auto redial gt On lt Redial Times gt 2 Times lt Redial Time gt 2 Minutes lt TX Error Redial gt On Press C__ Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func l 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK xe4 Additional Functions Select I O Paper Settings Q Volume Settings E Common Settings A Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings Back Xej 5 72 Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy Auto Redial 5 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Fax Settings amp Select User Settings TX Settings RX Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Auto redial gt then press OK TX Settings Select a ECM TX gt On a Set Pause Time gt Sernnds a Auto redial gt On Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Auto redial Auto Resend when Send Fails Option l l
349. ou hear someone on the line Start your conversation For fax calls The machine receives fax documents automatically For telephone calls You cannot talk to the caller 5 5 xe4 xe4 Introduction to Using Fax Functions Fax Tel Auto Switch Mode In this mode the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone connected to the machine rings for telephone calls If lt Incoming Ring gt is set to lt On gt the external telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is received set lt Incoming Ring gt to lt Off gt Before using this mode Make sure to do the following Connect your external telephone to the machine See Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual Set the receive mode to lt Auto Tel Auto Switch gt See Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 When an incoming call is received Incoming ring sounds the If you pick up the handset For fax calls number of times you within the specified You hear a slow beep tone This means specify number of times another fax machine is trying to send You can specify the you a document number of rings in Follow the procedure below to receive lt Incoming Ring gt the fax documents 1 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Fax gt then press OK 2 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press
350. oup from the Address Book 7 Press C_D Main Menu 4 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book gt then press OK amp Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book peje Enter Fax New Enter E mail New 2 Enter l Fax New 5 E Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations then press OK Select Clear Destination Press Set to Set Destination lt All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO gt o Canon Fax 031X0000X o Ca Sales sales xxx xxx oO H Developmen 1004 ftphost O tp Design Gro Reg Edit Erase Set You can select multiple destinations at a time note You can use 4 or P to restrict the displayed range of destinations To cancel a selected destination select the destination again to clear the check mark Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Select Clear Destination Press Set to Set Destination 4 All 0 9 ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO gt oO j canon sales xxx xxx O empty sales xxx xxx w i Design Gro Reg Edit Erase Set SS Specifying a Group from the One Touch 1 2 W if you want to clear the specified destination 1 Press the left Any
351. our external telephone with built in answering machine to the machine See Introduction of the Machine in the e Manual Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings Record a message on your answering machine When you record a message we recommend you insert about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message or limit the message to 20 seconds Set the receive mode to lt Answer Mode gt See Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 When an incoming call is received External telephone rings If you pick up the handset For fax calls the specified number of while the telephone is You hear a slow beep tone This means times ringing another fax machine is trying to send you a document Follow the procedure below to receive the fax documents 1 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Fax gt then press OK 2 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Start gt then press OK 4 Hang up the handset For telephone calls You hear someone on the line Start your conversation For fax calls The machine receives fax documents automatically If your answering machine activates For telephone calls Your answering machine records the caller s message note This mode does not support voice mail Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your a
352. over Later Next 1 Using the handle pull the paper drawer 2 Push downward on the jammed paper as half way out you remove it A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step Huljoouseajqnoly 12 11 Huljoouseajqnoly 12 12 Clearing Jams 3 Gently push the optional paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position 4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Clearing Jams Inside of the Machine POD YYY O NO N NY NY STD If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the inside of the machine Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover 1 Open the front cover If you are using the stack bypass tray close it A CAUTION before opening the front cover When removing jammed paper be sure to Open the front cover gently holding the handle place paper on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt A of the delivery
353. ow to use e mail functions Overview of E Mail FUN ctions ccccsccsccccsssssssscees 6 2 Introduction to Using E Mail Function 6 6 4 Basic E Mail Operations ccccccccscssssscssssssssssssscsceecs 6 5 Sending E Mail Documents csessessssesssecsessessseessenees 6 5 Canceling Sending E Mail Documents ccssseeseees 6 7 i Jetu 3 e Overview of E MailFunctions You can send scanned documents as e mail attachments You can also print out received e mail messages Scan settings e Image quality e Density e Resolution e Manual e Refer to E mail Originals Sending e mails e Manual e Refer to E mail Receiving e mails e Manual e Refer to E mail Forwarding received e mail documents e Manual e Refer to E mail Useful receiving functions Memory lock reception e Manual e Refer to E mail Various sending functions Specifying destinations mana e Refer to E mail Using the address book Sending 2 sided originals e Manual e Refer to E mail Delayed sending e Manual e Refer to E mail Broadcasting Favorites e Manual Refer to E mail Overview of E Mail Functions lewu J 6 3 ew 4 K Introduction to Using E Mail Functions This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e mail application Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are
354. p lt Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page gt Off lt Sharpness Settings gt 0 lt Shadow Frame Erase Settings gt Off lt Color Adjustment gt Default lt Finishing Settings gt Off lt Number of Copies Settings gt 1 Press CD Main Menu 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to display lt Standard Mode Reg lnitialize gt then press OK Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK b Start Cor 100 amp LJ LIR i E Standard Settings Change t Back Mode Memory J Preview Img J 2 Eo Additional Func G NOTE The currently specified settings are registered as the standard mode Changing Standard Mode Press OK to select lt Register gt 4 Standard Settings Change Standard Settings Registration Register Initialize Back Use V or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt Yes gt then press OK Make the current settings standard BHulAdo gt 6 Press __ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 4 67 Bulkdo gt 4 Initializing Standard Mode This section describes how to initialize the current standard mode Use V or Scroll Wheel to select Press C Main Menu 5 lt Yes gt then press OK 1 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Is it OK to initialize Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Additional Func 6 Main Menu screen Use V A or amp Scro
355. p Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 4 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Print gt then press OK 0006 11 03 0005 10 5 Details 0004 10 54 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Print note To print multiple document select and print one document at a time Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Forwarding Received Fax Documents xe4 5 137 Xej 4 Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in memory Checking Deleting Fax Transmission Documents You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent then delete unwanted documents as necessary 7 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel 2 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel amp Select 8 Copy Send Store T Print O Receive Device Info 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Job Status gt then press OK Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Error Status Back 5 138 4 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job whose detailed information you want to check then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt
356. p W TIFF 200x200 dpi mm Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent to the specified media when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer This section describes the basic procedure for using Color Network ScanGear to scan over the network Scanned documents are transmitted over the network to your computer note If you are using Color Network ScanGear for the first time after installing it the network scanner to be used must be selected with the ScanGear Tool For details see Scan in the e Manual 7 Place your originals a ae OS gt o CLES ELA R 2 Start Network ScanGear from the application on your computer For details see Scan in the e Manual Make scan settings on the Main Options and Scanner Info sheets For details about the settings in each sheet refer to the Online Help for that sheet Click Scan Scanning starts When scanning is complete the Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application During scanning a scanning progress dialog box is displayed To interrupt scanning click Cancel 8 9 PuluuULDS Buluueds iy Basic Scanning Operations This chapter describes what the network is what you can do with the network and
357. pe Original Book Copy Book Ej Off ils 1 Sided to 2 Sided g 2 Sided to 2 Sided Z 2 Sided to 1 Sided t Back ol Layout Settings Press the right Any key to select lt Layout Settings gt Set 2 Sided Copy Type Original Book Copy Book Ej Off 1 Sided to 2 Sided 4 5 2 Sided to 2 Sided j BI 2 Sided to 1 Sided t Back Layout Settings uldo V 4 25 Bulkdo gt 4 26 7 2 Sided Copying Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Vertical Original gt or lt Horizontal Original gt then press OK Set Original Orientation Vertical Original g Vertical Original gt Horizontal Original t Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Book Type Original gt or lt Calendar Type Original gt for the original layout then press OK Set Original Layout Type Book Type Original Book Type Original Calendar Type Original t Back lt Book Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original will have the same top bottom orientation lt Calendar Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top bottom orientation 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Book Type Copy gt or lt Calendar Type Copy gt then press OK Set Finishing Layout Book Type Finishing 23 Book Type Copy Calendar Type Copy t Back lt Book Typ
358. penings on the machine since they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts This could result in fire or electric shock Do not allow small objects such as pins paper clips or staples to fall into the machine To avoid spillage in or around the machine do not eat or drink near it Keep the machine clean Dust accumulation can prevent the machine from operating properly Toner cartridge for this machine will be available for at least seven 7 years or any such longer period as required by applicable laws after production of this machine model has been discontinued Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer in any of the following cases e When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed e If liquid or small object has fallen into the machine If the machine has been exposed to rain or water e If the machine does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in this guide BdePJald BIPJaId Preface Adjust only those controls that are covered by the instructions in this guide Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation e If the machine has been dropped If the machine exhibits a distinct change in performance indicating a need for servicing Do not place your hands hair clothing etc
359. per LTR size paper is 1 A recommended on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit A as shown in the figure and be sure that they do not move out of place A CAUTION The toner cartridges are installed in order of black yellow cyan and magenta from the top as shown in the figure ft Ini m ph E N A ee aa a LEW lhe li KA i i ta N S g A TIN Le E Vom ics N Replacing the Toner Cartridges A CAUTION A CAUTION When installing or removing the toner Do not touch the high voltage contact A or the cartridges be sure to place paper on the electrical contacts B as this may result in transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit to damage to the printer protect the belt Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt A of the delivery feeder unit The transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit has a self cleaning function therefore do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is damaged this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality 4 Take the new toner cartridge out of the protective bag after taking it out of the package There is a cut near the arrow on the protective bag so you can open it by hand However if you cannot open it by hand use scissors to open the protective bag so as not to damage the toner cartridge apueuaquley
360. press OK a Start Sand 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set t 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi E jm Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination 2 Additional Func NOTE Specify a destination If lt Book Type Original gt or lt Calendar Type Original gt has been selected lt 2 Sided Originals Select Send Type Settings gt is displayed New Fax Entry Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New FASES One touch J NOTE For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 5 47 xe4 xe4 5 48 2 Sided Original Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the type of original then press OK Set 2 Sided Original Type Book Type 2 Sided Originals Off Book Type Original Calendar Type Original Back lt Off gt 1 sided originals are scanned lt Book Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original have the same top bottom orientation lt Calendar Type Original gt The front and back sides of the original have opposite top bottom orientations 4 Sending Originals at a Preset Time Delayed Sending The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory and have it sent at a later time The default setting is lt Off gt note You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the de
361. press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to One touch gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5 Press C Main Menu 3 ea 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt My coy AA Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select I O Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt gf Communications Settings Rs Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS Vv 3 31 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS 3 32 Storing Editing One Touch Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register One touch gt then press OK 4 8 Address Book List Select Register Address Register One touch Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the one touch you want to register then press OK Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt E mail gt then press OK R
362. procedure for registering e mail addresses in the Address Book note By storing your own e mail address you can specify a reply e mail address This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to Add Book gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6 Press C_D Main Menu 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK wak Select Register Address Register One touch 2 Press the right Any key to select Address Book List lt Additional Func gt Back 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Register New gt Register Address 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select T E a T lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK TTT a Sales sales xxx xxx Additional Functions Select J CJ Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings EH Developmen 1004 ftphost tig Design Grn Edit Erase Register New E Common Settings ff Communications Settings WR Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Addres
363. puter operation screen Button name Example OK Information in the display appears in angle brackets lt Load paper gt xiii pInd SIYL SN 0 MOH PIND SIU SN 0 MOH xiv How to Use This Guide Ilustrations Used in This Manual Illustrations used in this manual are the model Color imageCLASS MF9170c with no optional equipment When there is any difference among Color imageCLASS MF9170c Color imageCLASS MF9150c and Color imageCLASS MF8450c it is clearly indicated in the text e g Color imageCLASS MF9170c Only gt Legal Notices As an ENERGY STAR Partner Canon U S A Inc has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program ENERGY STAR that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily The targeted products are office equipment such as computers displays printers facsimiles and copiers The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations IPv6 Ready Logo The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase 1 established by the IPv6 Forum Trademarks Canon the Canon logo Color imageRUNNER
364. r ont Left to Right il Letter Scaling Auto View Settings T Watermark CONFIDENTIAL z Edit Watermark Page Options Restore Defaults cow e Custom Paper Size 3 Select the page order from Page Order x General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quai Output Method E Print Profile bo Default Settings efe Lal Page Size Letter 7 4 3h Output Size Match Page Size z Copies 1 a 1 to 999 Orientation al Portrait A Landscape iil 2 Pages per Sheet d Page Layout Lp 4 Bj Page Order S Right to Left 2 Letter Scaling Auto ___ViewSettngs T Watermark CONFIDENTIAL Edit Watermark Page Options Restore Defaults covet J e Custom Paper Size Click Print Puud Puud 7 10 lt 2 Sided Printing 1 2 This mode enables you to make two sided printing You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities note The page sizes for which two sided printing is available differ according to printer model For details click Help in the bottom right hand corner of the printer driver window to view the Online Help The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver Although there are some settings which can be made from
365. r 20 Ib 75 g m Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine 8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go NOTE Be careful not to get your fingers caught For details on loading paper in the stack bypass tray see In the Stack Bypass Tray on p 2 15 Loading Paper In jthe Stack Bypass Tray If you are making prints on transparencies labels nonstandard sized paper or envelopes load them into the stack bypass tray note Note the following points when using the stack bypass tray e Paper Quantity one to approximately 100 sheets 20 Ib 75 g m e Paper Size 3 x 5 to 8 1 2 x 14 76 2 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm e Paper Weight 16 to 47 Ib 60 to 176 g m e Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass tray allowable curl amount less than 3 8 10 mm for normal paper less than 1 4 5 mm for heavyweight paper Depending on the paper storage conditions it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack bypass tray In this case set the amount of paper to less than 50 sheets 20 Ib 75 g m Do not load different size type paper at the same time Ifyou load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass tray a paper jam may occur depending on the type of heavyweight paper If this happens load only one sheet of heavywe
366. r Certificates of Indebtedness Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Stock Certificates Agencies Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title Copyrighted Works Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner xvii s 21 0 N 6 7 W S Y UI Sas xviii K Users in the USA Pre Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment A Location Supply a suitable table cabinet or desk See p 14 2 for the machine s weight and dimensions Order Information 1 Only a single line touch tone or rotary telephone set is to be used 2 Order an RJ11 C modular jack USOC code which should be installed by the telephone company If the RJ11 C jack is not present installation cannot occur 3 Order a regular voice grade line or the equivalent from your telephone company s business representative Use one line per machine DDD DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE or IDDD INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS note Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards e g the 2500 Touch Tone or 500 Rotary Pulse Dial telephones A dedicated extension off a PBX machine without Call Waiting can be used with the machine Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non standard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes which may cause a fax error This machine is not supported on Voice Over Internet Protocol V
367. r information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 pew 4 V ew q 6 6 6 Basic E Mail Operations Make the scan settings you require Start Send Color File Format Settings admin xxx xxx xx Dest 1 a B amp W TIFF 200x200 dpi mm Density 0 Bg Text Photo Confirm Erase Add Destination You can specify the following settings lt Color File Format Settings gt Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending See E mail in the e Manual lt Resolution Settings gt Adjusts the resolution of originals See E mail in the e Manual lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the density and the background color of originals See E mail in the e Manual lt Original Image Quality Settings gt Adjusts the image quality of originals See E mail in the e Manual lt 2 Sided Orig Orientation Set gt Scans two sided originals for sending See E mailin the e Manual lt Delayed TX Settings gt Specifies the transmission time See E mail in the e Manual lt Send Document Name Settings gt Sets the name of the document for sending See E mail in the e Manual lt Subject Message Settings gt Sets your e mail Subject and message See E mail in the e Manual lt Reply to Settings gt Sets the reply address to your e mail See E ma
368. r this machine e Manual e Refer to Setting Scan to File Server in Network Settings K What is the Network In the computer field a network is a system of interconnected computers that communicate with each other Internet and LAN are the two most common words used to refer to networks The Internet is the vast network to which computers all over the world are connected Computers connected to the Internet anywhere in the world can exchange information with one another On the other hand LAN is the abbreviation for Local Area Network and means a network within a limited area in an office for example Sample network configuration for this product LAN Internet Internet Available functions Available functions e Scaning documents to a file server file sharing FTP e Scaning documents to a file server FTP e Scanning documents from a networked computer e E mail e Remote Ul e Networked printer e E mail e Fax YIOMIAN Z D t O gt i Overview of Network Functions This section describes actions you can perform using the network function E mail You can send scanned documents as e mail attachments e Manual e Refer to E mail Network Scan You can edit scanned images over the network e Manual e Refer to Scan Network Print You can print over the network e Manual e Refer to Print l fax You can send scanned documents by l fax to fax
369. rea and scans them 1 Fan the originals stack and even the 2 Adjust the slide guides to the width of the edges originals eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO V 2 5 eIp W JUL pue sjeulIBLO 2 6 Placing Originals 3 Neatly place the originals face up in the original supply tray The originals are ready for scanning note Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned When scanning is complete remove the originals from the originals delivery tray to avoid paper jams Avoid using feeder to scan the same originals more than 30 times When scanned repeatedly originals can become folded or torn which may cause paper jams Ifthe feeder rollers are soiled from scanning originals written in pencil clean them See Cleaning the Machine on p 11 2 D Paper Requirements The paper size and types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table Paper drawers Stack bypass tray Size W x L Legal Letter Officio M Officio 3 x 5 to Legal 8 1 2 x 14 76 2 B Offficio Executive Foolscap x 127 to 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm A4 B5 A5 Always set vertically 16 to 32 Ib 16 to 47 Ib 60 to 120 g m 60 to 176 g m Quantity Max 250 Max 250sheets Max 250sheets oe Max 100 Max 100sheets 0 Max 100sheets 0 a e Color s je O o Fo 0 ww o SSS mwe OO wa oo ww oS SSS wes S oS ww p
370. ream like world forms a tropical paradise filled with romance Overview of Copy Functions Various copy functions Enlarge Reduce images 2 30 Original 2 sided copying 4 22 1 to 2 sided copying Originals BHulAdo gt Multiple originals onto one sheet N on 1 p 436 2on1 Originals Functions such as the 2 on 1 2 sided printing and collating can be used in combination Bulkdo gt Basic Copying Method This section describes the basic procedure for copying 1 Place originals on the platen glass or load 4 Make the copy settings you require it them in the feeder Start Copy Color Mode Settings 100 a LTR p m Auto color Select Drawer 1 LTR 2 Sided Off Mode Memory J Preview Img You can specify the following settings lt Color Mode Settings gt Specifies the color or B amp W See Selecting Color Mode on p 4 7 lt Paper Source Settings gt Specifies the paper source See Selecting Paper Source on p 4 ay eR yas ZS S aS RRI I OA G 9 For details see Placing engine i P A lt Density Background Rem Set gt Adjusts the Close the feeder after placing your originals density and the background color of originals For originals you can copy see Originals See Adjusting Density on p 4 17 Requirements on p 2 2 Press C Main Menu lt Various 2 Sided Settings gt Makes two sided
371. ress the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to Add Book gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt ORRA ZO Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt gf Communications Settings WR Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK Address Book List Select Register Address Register One touch Back Press the right Any key to select lt Register New gt Register Address Switch Destination Index al LoL H Canon Fax 03100000X C4 Sales sales xxx xxx EH Developmen 1004 ftphost EET Design Gro Edit Erase Register New J Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt File gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK a Re
372. ressing the left Any key to select lt Details gt Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen Favorites Use W A or Scroll Wheel to 6 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 5 select lt Erase gt then press OK lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase Register Settings Register Name Erase Details _Register Erase A NOTE A NOTE Make sure to check the settings first before Key names are not erased You can change the erasing them name in lt Register Name gt Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Specify a destination Select Send Type pen New Fax Entry 2 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select a Address Book lt Send FAX gt then press OK Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New 5 Enter File Server New BE Paranda One touch 2 E Additional Func note For details about how to specify destinations see Specifying Destinations on p 5 30 5 59 xe4 xe4 5 60 Favorites 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Register Favorites gt then press OK w 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 Delayed Send Off ia Direct Send Off 4 Favorites t Back Confirm Erase Add Destination Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the favorites you want to erase then press the right Any key to select lt Register
373. rinting the TX Terminal ID ssessesseessssscee 5 80 Adjusting Sharpnes ccccsscssscsssscseees 5 83 Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation s006 5 85 Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default soessesoesoesoesossoescsscescesseo 5 87 Send Start Speed esssesseesccesscesseesocescscesse 5 89 Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Papel eessessessoesoesseeseeseesoceseesoesoee 5 91 Reducing a Received Document 5 93 Printing Footer Information ona Received DOCUMENL cecsscsssesssecsesrees 5 96 Specifying the Way of Printing When TONEr IS LOW rsisi 5 98 ECM Reception esseeessoeesoccsssceesocessocessoseso 5 100 Setting the Incoming Ring Tone 5 102 Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone Remote Reception asecnrarninarnnren 5 104 Activating the Remote Reception 5 104 Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception sscssscececsesesesseseees 5 105 Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode ssssccsssesseeees 5 106 Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders scssssssesssees 5 108 Receive Start Speed csscccssrcesseeeeees 5 110 Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out Memory Lock Reception eessssessecessoeesoccssoceesocessocessoeeso 5 112 Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode
374. rk see on p 9 1 e Manual Network Settings Remote User Interface You can set and manage this machine easily and quickly from a computer Basic Operation Guide Setting from a PC See_on p 10 1 e Manual Setting from a PC E mail function Scanned documents can be sent as e mail file attachments Basic Operation Guide E mail see on p 6 1 e Manual E mail Security function You can limit the use of the machine by setting the 1Ds You can also limitithe use of some functions e Manual Security SUOIIDUN UIYDEW JO MAIAJAAQ s u U05 Contents Contents Manuals for the Machine ssccsscsssssssseees i Overview of Machine Functions seesseeseese ii CONTENTS se scces crsecesascevcstsscessecessa aaae iv PreTre ix Important Safety INStrUCTIONS cesses Ix Handling and Maintenance eescseseeeees ix OC UNO MV eanan X Power Supply ss esssesssesssesssessseesseessersseesseessersseesss xi Telephone EqQuipMe nt ssesssessesssesseesserseessess xii Customer Support U S A ssessessessessessessessees xii Customer Support Canada xii How to Use This Guide ccssccsssssesseeees xiii Symbols Used in This Manual se0000 xiii Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual xiii Illustrations Used in This Manual Xiv Legal Notices sssesseeesoessoesscesscessoesseesocessoessees XV IPv6 Ready Logo ssesssesssessseesseesseesseessee
375. rmation Services 6 0 on Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 7 0 on Windows Vista or Red Hat Linux 7 2 lt Windows SMB gt Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX Linux Samba 2 2 8a or later or Windows 98 Me 2000 XP Server 2003 Vista lt Windows SMB Browse gt Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network NOTE After turning the main power on you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting lt Windows SMB Browse gt Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed See Network Settings in the e Manual W if you select lt FTP gt or lt Windows SMB gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Host Name then press OK FTP Host Name Entry Host Name gt a Folder Path gt a User Name gt 3 14 2 Use the software keyboard to enter the host name Host Name Max 128 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the host name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet In this entry box enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job 3 If yo
376. rom step 5 Storing Editing One Touch Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Register One touch Select One touch to Register Ed Canon I fax 1 fax xxx xxx 001 I fax1 002 No Reg 003 No Reg No Rea Done Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Registering File Server Addresses in One Touch This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in one touch note If lt Language Switch gt in Common Settings is set to lt On gt the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly so you may not be able to refer to them This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen press the right Any key to select lt One touch gt Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to One touch gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5 7 Press C_D Main Menu 3 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt gf Com
377. ror Status Back note If lt Job Log Display gt in lt System Management Set gt is set to lt Off gt lt Log gt is not displayed 5 141 Xej Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory 5 142 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job whose detailed information you want to check then press the left Any key to select lt Details gt Fax Job Log Select Job with Up Down Keys 0001 09 10 Send Market OK 0002 09 22 Send Projec OK 0003 09 35 Man TX plan OK 0004 09 45 Seq TX plan OK 0005 09 50 Send sample OK Details Print List J Check the details of the selected job then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Details Display Selected Job Details Job No Start Time Usage Time Dept ID Destination 0001 06 30 2008 09 10 0 55 0000001 Sales FAX Done If you want to print a list of transaction results press the right Any key to select lt Print List gt Fax Job Log 0001 09 10 0002 09 22 0003 09 35 0004 09 45 0005 09 50 Details Select Job with Up Down Keys Send Market OK Send Projec OK Man TX plan OK Seq TX plan OK Send samnle OK Print List If you do not want to print the list go to step 8 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Print list Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen E mail This chapter describes h
378. s Basic Functions Status Printer O Ready to print Scanner O Ready to scan Fax Oo Ready to send or receiving fax Paper Information Job Status Address Stack Bypass None System Manager Mode Device Device Status Device Device Features a Network Settings Counter Check Drawer 1 Some Letter LTR Consumables Information Remaining Cyan Toner OK Remaining Magenta Toner OK Remaining Yellow Toner OK Remaining Black Toner OK Memory Information Available Memory 100 a Internet N D cr ta Nn O 3 fed A 10 2 Editing Confirming e Machine settings e Device information e Address book e Job information log e Manual e Refer to Settings from a PC in the e Manual Overview of Remote UI By using remote UI you can set and confirm following functions The Remote UI enables you to check the device information Accessing to the device information from the distant place provides you with easy device management For details see Checking Device Status and Information in the e Manual The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the address book You can use the PC keyboard so entering a lot of addresses to the address book will be easier For details see Managing the Address Book in the e Manual The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs and view job logs Accessing to the print job information
379. s For step by step troubleshooting e mail technical support the latest driver or document downloads and answers to frequently asked questions visit http www canon ca Free live technical support 9 A M to 8 P M EST Monday through Friday excluding holidays for products still under warranty 1 800 652 2666 For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you visit http www canon ca or 1 800 652 2666 If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http www canon ca Support program specifics are subject to change without notice E How to Use This Guide Symbols Used in This Manual The following symbols are used throughout the manuals for the machine and indicate the warnings cautions and notes you should keep in mind when using the machine A WARNING Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed A CAUTION Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine A NOTE Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties Keys and Buttons Used inThis Manual The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys and buttons to be pressed are expressed in this manual Operation Panel Keys lt Key icon gt Key name Example Stop Buttons on the com
380. s Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done Additional Func If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 5 117 xe4 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 5 118 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done 5 Press the left Any key to select lt Menu gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off PENCE 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register gt then press OK lt All Ale Register Forward w o Condition Erase 7 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Forwarding Cond Name 50 char Set Characters For information on using the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Forward Without Conditions Send by Fax 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the forwarding condition then press OK Fax Number Fax
381. s Forwarding Received Fax DocUmMentsS ssssssssssssssesossssosssosssoossseoe 5 117 Specifying Forwarding Settings essrsssssssssssesessssssseesssssssessssssssessee 5 117 Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination 5 129 Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors 5 131 Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors cesses 5 133 Checking Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding EPCOS sysname nin R 5 135 Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory 5 138 Checking Deleting Fax Transmission DOCUMENTS 5 138 Checking Deleting Fax Reception DOCUMENTS ccsssssesssssseesen 5 140 Checking Printing the Fax LOG esssssscsseessssssssssseesssssssssssenssnsssesesseen 5 141 xe4 xe4 522 lt Overview of Fax Functions You can send faxes I faxes from your computer and use including using the fax function that supports Super G3 You can also forward received fax I fax documents to specified destinations Available variety of faxes l Fax p 5 25 Internet Scan settings Originals or documents e Image quality p 5 45 e Density p 5 42 e Resolution p 5 41 Forwarding received fax documents p 5 117 Various sending functions Specifying destinations 5 30 Using the address book Broadcasting g g Using the group address Sending 2 sided originals p 5 47 Favorites p 5 54 Various receiving functions Memory lock reception p 5 112 Remote reception fa
382. s C__ Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Printing Forwarding Settings You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings 7 Press C_D Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Forwarding Received Fax Documents Press the left Any key to select lt Menu gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off lt A oh gt Fwd w o Cond l Fax sales 1 Use V LA or amp Scroll Wheel to select lt Print List gt then press OK A ea Print List i Details Edit m T ad xe4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Do you want to print the forwarding conditions lis
383. s Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS 3 7 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuNOIS 3 8 6 Storing Editing Address Book Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt E mail gt then press OK Register New Addresses Select Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Name gt then press OK E mail Register New Name Register Name gt a Uestination Kegistration gt Back Register j Use the software keyboard to enter the recipient s name Register Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipient s name For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipient s name in alphabetical order 9 10 11 If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Register Name Max 16 characters Set Characters Canon E mail A 1 86 A Backspace Set Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Destination Registration gt then press OK E mail Register New Addresses Register Name gt fannnfF mail Destination Registration gt Back Register
384. s Book password see Security in the e Manual 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register One touch Back oog sseJppy Bun p3 BUNOS 3 21 oog ssasppy Bun p3 BuUNOIS Storing Editing Address Book 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 Check or edit the address details the destination you want to check or edit then press the left Any key to select lt Edit Erase gt Check the details then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt W if you want to check the address details Select Clear Destination Press Set to Set Destination lt All o e eek lt Canon USA 03100000X Sales I FA 1003 ifax Fax Select a Name Display gt Canon USA FAX Display Destination gt 03 TXOOOKKX Back E Sales FTP 1004 ftphost BR Salas ARN Edit Erase J Register New A NOTE W if you want to edit the address details You cannot check or edit multiple destinations Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select at the same time the item you want to edit then press OK Use 4 or P to select the index key e g ABC to restrict the display range of entries pui i Select Select All to return to the full address list iannis f the desired destination is not displayed use gt Canon USA FAX V A or Scroll
385. s FTP Oi Sales GROUP T Canon FAX Reg Edit Erase Set j You can select multiple destinations at a time NOTE To cancel a selected destination select the destination again to clear the check mark 5 Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Select Clear One touch Press Set to Set Destination 005 sales xxx xxx xx Dest o Sales I FAX o EH Sales FTP w i Sales GROUP o Canon FAX Reg Edit Erase Set W if you want to clear the specified destination 1 Press the left Any key to select lt Confirm Erase gt Start Send Color File Format Settings canon group Dest 2 B amp W TIFF 2 Check the destination you want to clear is selected then press the left Any key to select lt Erase gt Confirm Detailed Destination Press Erase to Erase Destination i canon group If multiple destinations are specified clear the other destinations as necessary 3 Specify a destination again Select Send Type Specify from Address Book Address Book Enter Fax New Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New Favorites One touch J Sending Originals to More Than One Location Broadcasting Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients note A maximum of 301 201 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c destinations can be specified at the same time Out of the 301 or 20
386. scroll to the numeric keys then press OK For details desired one touch about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK Edit One touch Select Details Edit Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Yes gt then press OK Do you want to erase this destination from one touch If you want to cancel erasing the destination select lt No gt Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Storing Editing One Touch 3 51 oog ss appy Bun p3 BUNOIS Storing Editing One Touch Storing Editing Address Book Copying This chapter describes the copying features Overview of Copy FUNCTIONG cccccsrssscecesssssssscees 4 2 Basic Copying Method cccccccscsssccscscscscscssccscccees 4 4 Canceling Copy JODS sicissascsisssacscsscsssecscesssssecersccvestedens 4 6 Selecting Color Mode cscscrrcrsssscsssccsscccscccccsccscssees 4 7 Selecting Paper Source ccrcrccsscsccsccscccccccsccccssees 4 9 Copying on Papers in Drawel ssssssscssscseresessssseees 4 9 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper a cases ie ee ee A A E T T 4 11 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of POG r E niente eens 4 13 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes 06 4 15 Adjusting Density sccesnccensescccessececsscesesccnsssnssessssssstcess 4 17 Adj
387. sesscescscsscsscescesosese 4 17 Adjusting Base Color s ssesssesssessseesssesseessees 4 19 2 Sided Copying ssessesssessesseescesecsocescesosssee 4 22 1 to 2 Sided COpying sse sseesseesssesseerssersserss 4 23 2 to 2 Sided COpying sse sseesseesseessserssersserss 4 25 2 to 1 Sided COpying se sseesseesssersserssersserss 4 27 Enlarge Reduce Images sscessscesseeees 4 30 Preset ZOOM essessesseessossessessessesscosossesseeseoseeseess 4 30 Custom Copy Ratio s ssesseseessssssessessessessesseesee 4 32 Selecting Image Quallity ccsssesseees 4 34 Multiple Originals onto One Sheet MOn T enin 4 36 Adjusting SharpneSS essesssessesscsscesoesseese 4 39 Erasing Shadows LineS eesseescessoeesecesoee 4 41 Original Frame Erase cssscsssssesesseseeesesees 4 42 Book Frame Erase scssscsecsssssecscssesecssseees 4 45 Binding Erase s ssessesssessssssesssesseeseessceseesserssess 4 48 Adjusting Color Balance ssessesssessessesse 4 51 Registering Color Balance uuu 4 53 Recalling Registered Color Balance 4 55 s u U05 s u U05 Contents Deleting Color Balance Collating Copies sccsssccsssscssscessees Making Multiple Copies s000 Checking Current Setting6 06 Frequently Used Settings Mode NWIGTINONY esssvessceiscessvce tec csensdcvedsesstsceesseces Registering Mode Memory 0 Recalling Mode Memory
388. shing Paper Source Quality p5 Default Settings al ey Dutput Method S Pie FF BE E Page Size F 4 n A Output Size Match Page Size E Copies 1 aj 1 to 999 Orientation Portrait C Landscape 1 Page per Sheet Page Layout J Manual Scaling Scaling 1o 25 to 200 Ad Scaling Auto voeu I Watermark CONFIDENTIAL zj Edit Watermark Page Options Restore Defaults Cores e Custom Paper Size Puud Iy Scaling Documents 3 Puud 5 Select output size of the document from Output Size The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in Page Size and Output Size If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually select Manual Scaling gt specify the scaling ratio for Scaling note If the ratio is less than 25 or more than 200 the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in Output Size Click Print 1 2 x Printing Multiple Pagesion One Sheet This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper You can make well organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet And you can cut down print costs by saving papers and it is also useful for saving space note Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the app
389. side the internal cover 1 Lift the scanning platform A until it is 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and locked gently pull it out 2 Open the inner cover holding it by its center tab A A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step 4 Close the inner cover T eS J TINS V Wa Li be oy y Q 5 Lower the scanning platform A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Open and close the front cover to reset the machine If you are using the stack bypass tray close it before opening the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle A A CAUTION Be careful not to get your fingers caught Clearing Jams 12 7 Huljooyusajqnoly Huljoousajqnoly Clearing Jams Stack Bypass Tray If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass tray Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass tray Recover Later Next J 1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and 2 Close the stack bypass tray gently pull it out ANN Z Z a A CAUTION Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily proceed to the next step Z A Ha 12 8 3 Open and close the fr
390. sign frequently used functions to two custom keys located on the left of the display The default settings are as follows lt Key 1 gt Copy lt Key 2 gt Store on Memory Media The default setting for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c is lt Send Fax gt note After registering the custom keys attach the supplied customize labels onto the control panel f there is no label applicable to the function you register for the custom key fill in the blank label and attach it 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings E Common Settings A Communications Settings a Address Book Settings Done J Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Custom Key Registration gt then press OK Common Settings amp Select Initial Function Settings Custom Key Registration Brightness Adjustment Done 5 6 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Key 1 gt or lt Key 2 gt then press OK Custom Key Registration amp Select Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the function you want to assign then press OK Key 1 Key 1 Copy Copy Send Fax Fax E mail Fax File Server You can select from lt Copy
391. soft Exchange Server 5 5 Service Pack 1 or later Lotus Domino R4 6 or later Windows Mail Receiving Server Software Qpopper 2 53 or later UNIX Microsoft Exchange Server Windows Microsoft Exchange Server 5 5 Service Pack 1 or later Lotus Domino R4 6 or later Windows 14 5 xlpueddy xlpueddy Specifications Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Optional Paper Feeding System 500 sheets x 1 drawer 20 Ib 75 g m Acceptable Paper Stock See Paper Requirements on p 2 7 17 3 8 W x 21 3 8 D x 12 H 440 mm W x 543 mm D x 304 mm note Specifications are subject to change without notice 14 6 gt uo Index Numerics 1 to 2 Sided 4 22 4 23 2 Sided Copying 4 22 2 Sided Original 5 47 2 Sided Printing 7 10 2 to 1 Sided 4 22 4 27 2 to 2 Sided 4 22 4 25 A Address Book Erasing 3 24 Registering e mail addresses 3 7 Registering fax numbers 3 2 Registering group addresses 3 18 Registering l fax addresses 3 10 Address Book Settings 13 11 Address details Checking editing 3 21 3 47 Adjustment Cleaning 13 18 Any key 1 7 B Back cover 1 4 Clearing jams 12 18 Back key 1 7 Base Color Copy 4 19 Fax 5 43 Basic sending method Scanning documents from a networked computer 8 9 Scanning documents to a file server 8 5 Scanning documents to a USB memory 8 7 Sending E Mail Documents 6 5 Sending faxes 5 17 Sending I faxes 5 25 Sending PC faxes 5 27 C Canceling Sending e m
392. ssccsssscsssscssscessecesess 2 4 On the Platen Glass csssssessceseeseceesseeees 2 4 IN the Feeder uu sessssesecscessesecsssesececsssescseseres 2 5 Paper Requirements ccssccssssrsssssrscsssecees 2 7 Printable Area oss eccscecscossesnssecssxeasasencesnraeveraces 2 9 Loading Papel ccssccsssscssscesssecsssecesseees 2 10 In the Paper Drawel cssesscsccesesssseseeeees 2 10 In the Stack Bypass Tray csessssesesssseseees 2 15 Setting Paper Size and Type ssesees 2 20 For the Stack Bypass Tray ssesssscecssseseees 2 20 For the Paper Drawe P u essssccesesseeeeeseees 2 22 Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart sssini 2 24 3 Registering Destinations in the Address Book eccccccose 3 1 Storing Editing Address Book s 08 3 2 Registering Fax Numbers in the Address POOE aynan E reteset 3 2 Registering E Mail Addresses in the Address BOOK cscssssssssssssssscessecscsssssecsesseeees 3 7 Registering l Fax Addresses in the Address BOOK c ssssssssssscsssssecscsssessesssessesceees 3 10 Registering File Server Addresses in the Address BoOok ccscsssssscsssssesssseseceseees 3 12 Registering Group Addresses in the Address BOOK sesiccssscautmmrnmcamnaninacs 3 18 Checking Editing Addresses Registered in the Address BoOk cssssscssssssssessseeseees 3 21 Erasing Addresses from the Address BOOK ssa eee ee
393. sseesssesseess XV Trademarks scstsycastieadeansssaezasessaninsaramvanvecnsateavands XV Copyright stra tepadertartcerenatensrter enemies XV Third Party SoftWare ss ssseessseesssessssessserssseess xvi POISE RAIIVGN amp ssasressssetecssmassaveastuiasmcaessstusnateasionea xvi About the Part Containing Mercury Applicable Only to the USA essen xvi For CA USA Only ssessseesseesseesssesssesssesssesssesssessse xvi Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Image5 06 xvii Users in the U S A essesseessessesscescesccescesossoe xviii Pre Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment 006 xviii Connection of the Equipment xix In Case of Equipment Malfunction xix Rights of the Telephone Company xix CIN Cocco tees eee eer XX Users in Canada ssessesssesoessesscescesccsocesccsosso xxi Pre Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile EquipMent cccscsceseees xxi eld c lt saeer eens eee ner nna reer et xxii Laser Safety sassvecssnvcusvasesssnsacensevusscsnccereevassones xxiv CDRH RegulationS s ssesseessesseessessssssesssessees XXiV 1 Before Using the Machine 1 1 Machine Components sscccssscsssrcesseeeeess 1 2 External View Front ssssccssscessssssesscesseees 1 2 External View Back ccssssscsssssecsssssscseesseees 1 4 Internal View ssesssssssesssesssesssesssesssessseosseosseossee 1 5
394. sssssssessssssssessssssesessssssssesses 5 13 Registering the Machine s Name csessssssssccsessssssseccsssesssssssessseessssss 5 14 Registering Your Machine s Fax NUMDEL sssssssssessssessssssssssseessssee 5 16 Sending Faxes Sending Fax Documents s ssssssssssosssossssosssosssoosscosssoossoosssosssoosscossssos 5 17 Basic Methods for Sending Faxes ssssssssssssssssssessssssesessssssssssssssses 5 17 Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents Manual STACI A A A A 5 19 Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialingueesssssssssssssssssssssssesesees 5 21 Dialing an Overseas Number With Pauses ssssssscsseessssssssssseesssses 5 22 Basic Methods for Sending l Faxes sessssssssssssssssssssssssesesssssssesesesssee 5 25 Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxesaeessssssssssssessssssesesssssssssssssses 5 27 Canceling Sending Fax Documents essssssssossssosssosssoosssosssoosssossssse 5 29 Specifying Destinations sssssssossssoossscossecoossscossssoossscossssosssssossssossse 5 30 Specifying a New Fax NUMDEL scssssssssssssssessesssssesseesssssssessssssessesses 5 30 Using the Address BOOKuucnirnaninsnunnenaaniaia 5 32 Using the One TouCh srictvtaassiustunaaaisansmnnuscaslaeninsnuinmnnsnisssn 5 34 Using the Group AddreSS6S s s sssssssssssesessssosesessssosesessesesnosesesnsnosesnsnesese 5 36 Sending Originals to More Than One Location Broadcasting 5 39 Selecting Resolutio sssssssssassssasnsassavsssosconssusesnssaosearscanasdsnsnrsasnsa
395. static transfer belt 1 5 Density Copy 4 17 Fax 5 42 Device Information Checking 1 18 Direct Sending 5 52 Display 1 7 Display parts and functions 1 11 Copy top screen 1 12 Main menu screen 1 11 Select memory media screen 1 14 Send type selection screen 1 13 Duplex unit 1 5 Clearing jams 12 6 E E mail addresses Registering in One Touch 3 31 Registering in the Address Book 3 7 Enlarge images Copy 4 30 Entering characters 1 19 Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3 24 Erasing One Touch 3 50 Erasing Shadows Lines 4 41 Binding Erase 4 41 4 48 Book Frame Erase 4 41 4 45 Original Frame Erase 4 41 4 42 Error codes 12 30 Error indicator 1 6 Error messages 12 25 Ethernet port 1 3 External device jack 1 3 F Facsimile Specifications 14 4 Favorites Erasing 5 58 Registering 5 54 Fax numbers Registering in One Touch 3 26 Registering in the Address Book 3 2 Feeder 1 3 File server addresses Registering in One Touch 3 37 Fixing unit 1 5 Clearing jams 12 16 Forwarding Activating settings 5 124 Checking changing settings 5 128 Erasing settings 5 125 Printing settings 5 127 Storing settings 5 117 Storing settings without conditions 5 121 Front cover 1 5 G General Specifications 14 2 Group addresses Registering in One Touch 3 44 Registering in the Address Book 3 18 H How to Use This Guide xiii Index I l fax addresses Registering in the Address Book 3 10 If a Power failure o
396. stinations from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register New Dest to Add Book gt then press lt OK gt Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6 1 2 3 Press C Main Menu Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func Device Info Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings lt f Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Address Book password see Security in the e Manual 4 5 6 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Register Address gt then press OK Address Book List amp Select Register Address Register One touch Back Press the right Any key to select lt Register New gt Z Register Address Switch Destination Index oP r Canon Fax 031X0000XK eS Sales sales xxx xxx E
397. strict Sending From Log gt in lt Restrict the Send Function gt in lt System Management Set gt under lt Additional Func gt is set to lt On gt you cannot specify a destination using the lt Log gt See Security in the e Manual 7 Place your originals 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Log gt then press OK SE p Select Send Type lt gt Specify from Log BE SS cs ss Favorites One touch LIOI Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select 5 lt Mode 1 gt lt Mode 2 gt or lt Mode 3 gt then press OK 2 Press C Main Menu Set Specified Log Entry Specify Mode 1 Settings Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Mode lt Send FAX gt then press OK aka Back Gy E Details AS You can check the recall settings by pressing the s left Any key to select lt Details gt Additional Func 5 64 W if you select a log in which a destination is stored The Send Settings screen appears Confirm the settings Start Send Resolution Settings 031XXXXXXX Dest 1 200x200 dpi jam Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination W if you select a log in which a destination is not stored The Select Send Type screen appears 1 Specify a destination Select Send Type New Fax Entry 3s Address Book Enter E mail New Enter Fax New Enter File Server New F
398. subject to high temperatures When removing jammed paper take care not to touch anything in this area aulydeW y Huls sojeg aulydeW y Huls sojeg D Control Panel This section describes the names and functions of the keys on the control panel Main Control Panel Main Menu ji jE j gt 18 Status Monitor ancel Reset Processing Data Error Main I Start Stop Olim D Power switch Sub Power Supply Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF When the control panel is turned OFF the machine is in the Sleep mode 2 Numeric keys Use to enter alohanumeric characters 3 Clear key Press to clear entered values or characters 4 Log In Out key Press to enter the Security mode 5 Volume Control Dial Move to adjust the line volume Stop key Press to stop a job in progress such as a scan or copy job OOJO 7 Main Power Indicator Lights when the main power is turned ON 8 Error Indicator Blinks or lights up if there is an error with the machine When the Error indicator flashes follow the instructions that appear on the display When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light contact your local authorized Canon dealer 9 Start key Press to start an operation 0 Processing Data Indicator Blinks or lights up green when the machine is performing operations When the Processing Data indicator maintains a st
399. t Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 5 127 Xej Forwarding Received Fax Documents Checking Changing Forwarding Settings You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored 1 Press C__ Main Menu 4 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func 5 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt System Management Set gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set J 6 Done J If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set enter the System Manager ID and System Password using numeric keys then press Log In Out 5 128 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Settings gt then press OK System Management Settings Select Communications Settings Forwarding Settings Forwarding Error Settings Remote Ul Restrict the Send Function Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off da aea Fwd w o Cond l Fax O sales 1 Press the left Any key to select lt Menu gt Forwarding Conditions Settings Switch Forwarding On Off da aga Fwd w o Cond l Fax sales 1 Use V A or S
400. t For information on forwarding received documents see Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination on p 5 129 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected then press the right Any key to select lt Erase gt Received Fax Job Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0002 10 15 Sales Receiving 0001 10 00 Sales Waiting Checking Printing the Fax Log Checking Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory note To erase multiple documents from memory select and erase one document at a time You cannot erase a document that is being printed If you select a document that is being received lt Erase gt changes to lt Cancel gt enabling you to cancel receiving the document 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase the RX document 8 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen xe4 You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received 1 2 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel amp Select E Copy lt gf Send Store TE Print O Receive Device Info Done 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Log gt then press OK Fax amp Select Send Job Status Received Job Status Log Forwarding Er
401. t lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J L2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 5 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings amp Select Fax Settings Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings Select TX Settings RX Settings Back 6 7 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Terminal ID gt then press OK TX Settings Select a Change Send Func Mode a TX Terminal ID gt On a Color Send Gamma Value gt Gamma 1 8 Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK TX Terminal ID Use TX Terminal ID Option lt Off gt Does not print the Terminal ID information If you select lt Off gt and press OK go to step 13 lt On gt Prints the Terminal ID information If you select lt On gt and press OK press OK again then go to the next step Press the right Any key to select lt Option gt TX Terminal ID Use TX Terminal ID Option Printing the TX Terminal ID 9 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Printing Position gt then press OK TX Terminal ID Select Printing Position Outside
402. t lt Store Image to Memory gt then press OK Forwarding Error Settings Select Print Image gt Nn a Store Image on Memory gt Off Back Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK Store Image on Memory Store Failed Fwd Image on Memory lt Off gt Does not store the image lt On gt Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails note If you set lt Store Image to Memory gt to lt On gt you can resend the jobs with forwarding errors to registered destinations in the Address Book See Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors on o 5133 Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Forwarding Received Fax Documents Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward note Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if lt Store Image to Memory gt is set to lt On gt in lt Forwarding Error Settings gt in lt System Management Set gt See Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors on p 5 131 1 2 Press CD Status Monitor Cancel Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax gt then press OK Status Monitor Cancel Select a Copy gf Send Store T Print O Receive Device Info Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Forwarding Error Status gt then press
403. t background setting then press OK Set Background Settings Manual Base Color Adjustment R Off lt Off gt Does not erase the background color of the original lt Background Removal gt If you want to erase the background color of the original following step is not necessary lt Background Fine Adjust gt If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color go to the next step Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired color then press OK Set Color to Balance Yellow Removal Level Adjustment 4O Red 6 Ki Green 6 Go Blue 6 t Back Use lt P or Scroll Wheel to adjust the strength of the color then press OK Set Yellow Removal Level If you adjust the strength of lt Yellow gt the levels of lt Red gt and lt Green gt adjust automatically to the same level as lt Yellow gt If you adjust the strength of lt Red gt or lt Green gt the lt Yellow gt level returns to its default level Press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Set Color to Balance Yellow Removal Level Adjustment Yellow 6 Red 6 Green 6 Blue 6 lt Selecting Image Quality scanning The default setting is lt Text Photo gt note Combinations of these three modes Text Photo Photo and Text cannot be selected at the same time If you select one of these modes the previously set mode is canceled
404. t on the Main Menu screen and press OK the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation The default setting is lt Default Screen gt 7 Press C Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func l 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J CJ Paper Settings 91 Volume Settings E Common Settings ff Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Common Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings OREH Fax Settings Back Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Settings gt then press OK Common Settings amp Select TX Settings RX Settings Back V A re gt lt Xej 5 86 Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 6 lt Default Screen for Send gt then press OK TX Settings Select a Sharpness gt 0 a PDF Compact Img Quality a Default Screen for Send gt Default Screen Done Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 the initial screen then press OK Default Screen for Send Display Initial Func After Recovery Favorites One touch Default Screen Back lt Favorites gt The Set Favorites s
405. t Off gt Does not redial automatically when a transmission fails If you select lt Off gt and press OK go to step 15 lt On gt Redials automatically when a transmission fails If you select lt On gt and press OK press OK again then go to the next step 8 9 10 Press the right Any key to select lt Option gt Auto redial Auto Resend when Send Fails Option Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Redial Times gt then press OK TX Settings Select a Redial Times gt 2 Times a Redial Time min gt 2 Minutes a TX Error Redial gt On Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to set the number of redial times then press OK Redial Times Ha You can also use numeric keys You can also use numeric keys to set the number of redial times Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Redial Time gt then press OK 11 TX Settings Select a Redial Times gt Timas a Redial Time min gt 2 Minutes TX Error Redial gt 0n Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to set the redial interval then press OK 12 Redial Interval Ha You can also use numeric keys Minutes You can also use numeric keys to set the redial interval Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt TX Error Redial gt then press OK 13 TX Settings Select a Redial Times gt 2 Times a Redial
406. tails gt then press OK 0006 11 03 canon xe4 5 135 Forwarding Received Fax Documents 4 Check the details of the selected job then press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Details Display Selected Job Details Job No 0006 Set Time 07 30 2008 11 03 Dept ID 0000001 Job Type E mail Destination canon Forward Done W if you want to erase a document with a forwarding error Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to erase Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Erase gt then press OK 0006 11 03 canon 5 136 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt No gt or lt Yes gt then press OK Is it OK to erase the RX document NOTE To erase multiple documents from memory select and erase one document at a time W if you want to print a document with a forwarding error Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the job you want to print Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with Up Down Keys 0006 11 03 0005 10 55 0004 10 54 0003 10 52 0002 10 50 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Menu gt Fax Forwarding Error Status Select Job with U
407. talling the driver to send a print job directly from your PC to the machine see USB Connection in the Starter Guide Pci The PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software The PCL5c printer driver is for color printers and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black and white printers PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and offers superior printing quality and speed UFRII LT Using the UFRII LT printer driver the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time The workload can be delegated to match the output data thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon home page http www usa canon com Driver software is updated every few months note The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c The available printer drivers may vary depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server Point and Print environment it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature For instructions on ho
408. tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer When removing jammed paper pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction judging from the position of the paper Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer When removing jammed paper pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction judging from the position of the paper Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit The transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself therefore do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is damaged this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality Ifthe error message still remains after having removed the jammed paper without handling the front cover or top cover open and close the front cover to reset the machine Clearing Jams OriginalJams If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display remove the jammed original from the feeder Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure Remove the jammed paper from inside the cover of the feeder 3 Open the inner cover holding it by its front tab A 2 Hold both sides of any jammed original and gently pull it out 4 place A CAUTION Do not force a jammed original out of the machine If the jammed original cannot be removed easily proc
409. telephone is off the hook Setting Auto Clear Time Timer Settings A NOTE The machine will leave the Sleep mode when e you press Power on the operation panel a fax is received e the handset of the external telephone is off the hook a print job is sent from a computer and the print is started a computer performs a scan through the machine If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time the display returns to the standby mode Auto Clear function The default setting is lt 2 Minutes gt note f lt O gt is selected the Auto Clear mode is not set After the Auto Clear mode initiates the display returns to the screen specified in lt Auto Clear Settings gt in lt Common Settings gt For details see Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates in the e Manual 7 Press C Main Menu 3 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Timer Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select Printer Settings Timer Settings y Adjustment Cleaning Report Settings System Management Set Done ulypew y Huls A 31049 1 23 aulydeW y Huls sojeg 1 24 Timer Settings 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select Use W A Scroll Wheel or lt Auto Clear Time gt then press OK 5 numeric keys to set the desired interval then press OK
410. the machine the settings from the printer driver has priority Display the Finishing sheet Select binding edge for the paper n 3 printout from Binding Location General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Qualty Booklet 1 sided Printing exe Print Style Profile bo Default Settings E Output Method E Print Print Style et 2 sided Printing ze Binding Location Long Edge Left _ Gutter z Finishing Off eal p J d Letter Scaling Auto i E i Finishing Off hd tips SIA View Settings Ea m F ay Letter Scaling Auto View Settings Finishing Details Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Finishing Details Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Select 2 sided Printing from Print Style x General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quality Profile bo Default Settings Ale Output Method erm H Booklet 4 Click Print Binding Location Long Edge Left amen Finishing Off kd Lp j mi gz Letter Scaling Auto View Settings Finishing Details Restore Defaults cow e Printing from Memory Media Direct Print You can print data from a memory medium such as a SD card by directly inserting it into the machine and selecting the desired image on the display You do not need to connect the machine to your comput
411. the USB Universal Serial Bus cable 4 Ethernet Port Connect the network cable side to turn the power ON External Device Jack Connect an external device Telephone Line Jack Connect the external telephone cable 7 Paper Drawer Holds up to 250 sheets of paper 20 Ib 75 g m7 Optional Cassette Feeding Unit AC1 Holds the additional paper supply Up to 500 sheets of paper 20 Ib 75 g m can be held aulydeW y Huls A aojeg Machine Components External View Back Jaj B 9 Back Cover Before Using the Machine Open this cover to clear paper jams Power Socket Connect the power cord 1 4 Internal View Scanning Area Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here 2 Platen Glass Place originals here when scanning books thick originals thin originals transparencies etc 3 Toner Cartridges When toner runs out pull out the empty toner cartridges and replace them with new ones 4 Delivery Feeder Unit Electrostatic Transfer Belt Transfers toner to paper Do not place any objects on or touch the transfer belt Doing so deteriorates print quality Machine Components 25 5 Front Cover Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or to clear paper jams 26 Duplex Unit The duplex unit enables you to use the 2 Sided mode for copying or printing Q Fixing Unit The fixing unit fixes the toner to the paper The parts inside the fixing unit are
412. the messages below lt Load paper gt lt A cover is open gt lt Check that all of the covers are closed gt lt The paper has jammed gt lt Remove the jammed paper from gt lt Replace the toner gt Paper jams have occurred in the machine The machine cannot scan your original using the feeder An original is placed in the feeder and on the platen glass Remove the paper from the output The paper delivery tray is full of Remove the printouts from the paper tray paper delivery tray Error Messages Message Description ction Wait for a while and try browsing again Press OK then set the originals again Turn OFF the main power switch wait for more than 10 seconds then turn it ON again If the message persists take a note of the error code that appears on the bottom left of the display turn OFF the main power switch disconnect the power cord and contact Canon Customer Care Center This error message appears with another message When the error is resolved the received data will be printed out For how to solve the problem see the action for the messages displayed with it Follow the procedure on the screen to remove the jammed paper See Clearing Jams on p 12 2 Remove the original from the feeder Huljoouseajqnoly 12 27 Huljooyuseajqnoly 12 28 Error Messages Message Description Action Replace the toner cartridge Return page 1 to the top
413. the toner cartridges and precautions on storing them When a Message Appears Toner cartridges are consumable products If the toner is running out during printing a message appears in the display When it is Displayed Contents and Remedies Prepare a new toner cartridge XXX The toner is running low It is recommended that you replace XXX indicates either Black the toner cartridge before printing Yellow Cyan or Magenta a large amount of data Replace the toner cartridge XXX When a toner cartridge needs to be Replace the toner cartridge of the XXX indicates either Black replaced soon indicated color with a new one Yellow Cyan or Magenta It is recommended that you replace the toner cartridge before printing a large amount of data SDULUdIUIL SDULUDdIUIL Replacing the Toner Cartridges Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One If any of the following messages appears replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one Black gt Replace the black toner cartridge Yellow gt Replace the yellow toner cartridge Cyan gt Replace the cyan toner cartridge Magenta gt Replace the magenta toner cartridge lt Replace the toner cartridge lt Replace the toner cartridge lt Replace the toner cartridge i m ee lt Replace the toner cartridge Open the front cover by using the handle 2 Place pa
414. tings on p 4 60 Mode Memory Select with the left Any key You can store and recall frequently used copy settings and recall them See Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory on p 4 61 Start Copy Copy Ratio Settings 100 E J LTR T Custom Copy Ratio Jaly Text Photo Map H E Non 1 off o Mode Memory Preview Img J Copy Ratio Settings Enlarges or reduces the copy size Original Image Quality Settings Sets the image quality of the original Q N on 1 Settings Reduces the size of multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper Sharpness Settings Sets the sharpness of the image Start Copy Shadow Frame Erase Settings 100 DO A4 Frame Erase Off Tre amp l Color Balance Default o lt y Collate Off o Copies 1 ee Mode Memory Preview Img J Frame Erase Settings Erases shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals Color Balance Adjusts color balance depending on the color of the originals 3 Collate Settings Sorts copies into sets arranged in page order Copies Sets the number of copies Start Copy Standard Mode Reg Initialize 100 amp LJ LTR 4 Standard Settings Change TE t Back 6 Mode Memory Preview Img Standard Settings Changes the Standard mode Back Select this item to return to the previous screen Display Parts and Functions Send TypeSel
415. tion 5 41 S Safety instructions ix Scaling Documents 7 7 Scanning Area 2 3 Copy 2 3 Fax 2 3 Scanning area 1 5 Scroll wheel 1 7 SD MS card slot 1 10 Send Specifications 14 5 Index Setting Menu Address Book Settings 13 11 Adjustment Cleaning 13 18 Common Settings 13 6 Communication Settings 13 8 PAPER SETTINGS 13 5 Printer Settings 13 13 Report Settings 13 19 System Management Set 13 19 Timer Settings 13 17 Volume Settings 13 6 Setting paper size and type 2 20 For the paper drawer 2 22 For the stack bypass tray 2 20 Sharpness Copy 4 39 Fax 5 83 Slide guides 1 3 Slide guides for stack bypass tray 1 3 Specifications 14 2 Copier 14 3 Facsimile 14 4 General 14 2 Optional cassette 14 6 Printer 14 3 Send 14 5 Telephone 14 4 Stack bypass tray 1 3 Clearing jams 12 8 Stack bypass tray extension 1 3 Standard Mode Changing 4 66 Initializing 4 68 Standard send settings Restoring to default setting 5 78 Storing 5 76 Start key 1 6 Status Monitor Cancel key 1 7 Stop key 1 6 xlpueddy 14 11 xlpueddy Index Storing editing Address Book 3 2 Checking editing address details 3 21 Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3 24 Registering e mail addresses in the Address Book 3 7 Registering fax numbers in the Address Book 3 2 Registering file server addresses in the Address Book 3 12 Registering group addresses in the Address Book 3 18 Registering l fax addresses in the Address Book 3 10 Storing edit
416. tions registered after the main power switch is turned ON you may not be able to perform operations using the control panel when the main menu screen appears If this happens wait until the machine responses to the key operations Depending on your needs you can change the main menu screen which appears when the main power switch is turned ON For details Setting the Initial Function in the e Manual Ifthe Auto Clear function is activated the display returns to the main menu screen Log in mode is displayed only when Department User ID Management is set to lt ON gt in lt SYSTEM SETTINGS gt For details on the system settings see Security in the e Manual Ascroll bar displayed on the right side on the screen indicates that there are more items Use V LA or to display the next screen Depending on the system configuration and product purchased some functions may not be available Main Menu Screen Send Fax Displays the Send Type Selection screen See Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c Send Type Selection Sareen onp 1 13 3 Scan to Store Displays the Store Type Selection screen See Store Type Selection Screen on p 1 14 4 Direct Print Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only Displays the Select Memory Media screen See Select Memory Media Screen Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c Only on p 1 14 5 Additional Func Select with the right Any key On the Additional Functions scr
417. to Map Printed Image Photo and Text cannot be selected at the same time If you select one of these modes the previously set mode is canceled f the original is a transparency select the original type then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 7 Set originals lt Copy gt then press OK A 2 Additional Func For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 2 Press C__ Main Menu 4 34 4 Use V A or amp Scroll Wheel to display lt Original Image Quality Settings gt then press OK Original Image Quality Settings E LTR l 100 1 1 aar Text Photo Map W E Non 1 Off Mode Memory J Preview Img Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select 5 the image quality then press OK Set Original Image Quality Originals with Text and Photo a ve Text Photo Map Printed Image Photo Text Back Priority Level lt Text Photo Map gt For originals that contain text photos and maps NOTE If you select lt Text Photo Map gt you can set priority on lt Text gt or lt Photo gt Press the right Any key to select lt Priority Level gt then use W LA 4 P or Scroll Wheel to adjust the priority evel lt Printed Image gt For originals that contain dot photos such as magazines lt Photo gt For photo paper originals such as photos
418. to return to the Main Menu screen Storing Editing Address Book Checking Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in the Address Book note This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen as follows In the Select Send Type screen use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Specify from Address Book gt then press OK Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select the destination you want to check or edit Press the left Any key to select lt Reg Edit Erase gt Use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Confirm Edit Address Book Dest gt then press OK Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7 1 Press C__ Main Menu 3 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Address Book Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Additional Functions lt Additional Func gt iii J C2 Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings E Common Settings ff Communications Settings Address Book Settings Done J If a password has been set for the Address Book enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu Enter the password using numeric keys then press OK For details about the Addres
419. transmitted as an e mail attachment to the recipient s e mail application This section describes the things that you must do before using e mail functions Be sure to set the following items first Network settings Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network See Network Settings in the e Manual E mail settings Set the e mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server See Network Settings in the e Manual x Basic E Mail Operations This section describes the basic procedures for sending e mails and canceling a transmission in progress Sending E Mail Documents This section describes the flow of sending e mails 1 Place your originals VIT 7 Om eS eae Oe 7 0 Press C Main Menu Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter E mail New gt then press OK Select Send Type New E mail Entry Address Book q Enter Fax New B Enter E mail New Enter l Fax New E Enter File Server New Favorites One touch Use the software keyboard to enter the e mail address then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt E mail Address Max 120 char Set Characters admin xxx xxx XX You can enter up to 120 characters for the e mail address Fo
420. tridge all the A toner cartridge is not installed or Install the toner cartridge correctly tray way holding the right amp left grips not installed correctly Load paper No paper is loaded in the paper Load the paper correctly by inserting cassette or multipurpose tray when copying or printing If the paper size is not appropriate for printing lt Change Paper Size gt appears The appropriate paper for printing is not loaded No response from the destination The server was not running when you tried to send The network connection was lost when you tried to send Either you could not connect to the destination or the connection was lost before the job could complete Huljoouseajqnoly A TCP IP error occurred when you tried to send an e mail or l fax No response from the server The specified server settings are Check the settings incorrect or the server is not turned ON Alternatively the machine s TCP IP resources may below 12 26 it all the way to the back of the paper cassette Set the appropriate size paper for printing and specify the correct size of paper in lt Paper Settings gt For printing reports or lists set the paper size to lt LTR gt lt LGL gt lt STMT gt lt EXEC gt lt FLSC gt lt OFI gt lt B OFI gt lt M OFI gt lt G LTRR gt lt G LGL gt or lt Custom Size gt and then load paper of the same size After setting the appropriate size paper f
421. troduction to Using Fax Functions In this mode the machine receives documents automatically Select this mode if you use the machine for fax operations only and not for voice communications using an external telephone Before using this mode Simply set the receive mode to lt Auto RX gt See Selecting the Receive Mode on p 5 9 When an incoming call is received With no external telephone connected to the machine e For fax calls the machine receives fax documents automatically For telephone calls you cannot talk to the caller With external telephone connected to the machine Incoming ring sounds the If you pick up the handset number of times you while the incoming ring is specify sounding You can specify the number of rings in lt Incoming Ring gt If you do not pick up the handset while the incoming ring is sounding note If you want to change lt Incoming Ring gt see Setting the Incoming Ring Tone on p 5 102 For fax calls You hear a slow beep tone This means another fax machine is trying to send you a document Follow the procedure below to receive the fax documents 1 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send Fax gt then press OK 2 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter Fax New gt then press OK 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt RX Start gt then press OK 4 Hang up the handset For telephone calls Y
422. ttings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 6 7 8 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt ECM RX gt then press OK RX Settings Select ECM RX gt On a Reception Mode Selection gt Auto RX Incoming Ring gt Off Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Off gt or lt On gt then press OK ECM RX Receive ECM Fax Documents Press C_D Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen ECM Reception 5 101 xe4 xe4 5 102 4 Setting the Incoming Ring Tone This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone when the machine receives a fax or telephone call in the Auto RX or Fax Tel Auto Switch mode The default settings are as follows lt Incoming Ring gt On lt Ring Times gt 2 Times 1 Press C__ Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Device Info Additional Func 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Communications Settings gt then press OK Additional Functions Select J C Paper Settings Q1 Volume Settings Common Settings lt f Communications Settings wi Address Book Settings Done 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Communications Settings Select Common Settings Back Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt
423. twork See Network Settings in the e Manual File server settings Set the file server settings to enable your machine to communicate with a file server See Network Settings in the e Manual For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer Network settings Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network See Network Settings in the e Manual Color Network ScanGear Install the Color Network ScanGear scanner driver for using the machine as a scanner See the Network ScanGear Installation Guide on the accompanying CD ROM x Basic Scanning Operations This section describes the basic procedures for scanning documents Scanning Documents to a File Server This section describes the basic procedure for sending scanned documents to a computer that acts as a file server on a network 1 Place your originals 4 TEZ on SLI 2 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Send FAX gt or lt Scan to Store gt then press OK If you select lt Scan to Store gt use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Store on File Server gt then press OK E 2 Additional Func Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Enter File Server New gt then press OK Select Send Type New File Server Entry Bs Address Book yas Enter Fax New Enter E mail New G Enter l Fax New Be Enter Fi Favorites On
424. u are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Host Name Max 128 characters Set Characters hostname A 1 4 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Folder Path gt then press OK FIP Folder Path Entry Host Name gt hostname Folder Path gt a User Name gt 5 Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder Folder Path Max 128 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path For information on how to use the software keyboard see Entering Characters on p 1 19 NOTE A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job f you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway Color imageCLASS MF9170c 9150c only Storing Editing Address Book If you are finished press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Folder Path Max 128 characters Set Characters Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt User Name gt then press OK FTP Enter User Name Host Name gt hostname Folder Path gt share a User Name gt name User Name Max 24 characters Set Characters You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name For information on how to use the so
425. unssnsrsssansoaissssnsesuissdasosiadssiss 12 25 Error COGS osnan a a 12 30 If lt Set the correct paper gt is displayed 12 36 Reloading The Paper ee essssessssessseesssessseessseesseeesseeesseess 12 36 Changing the Paper Size Setting sssessssessseessseesssee 12 36 If a Power Failure Occurs esesessececesescssscsessosossssssso 12 39 If You Cannot Solve a Problem ssscsssssssssssssssssss 12 40 Customer Support U S A se ssssssesseessessessesssessessessess 12 40 Customer Support Canada ee sseesssessessseesssesseesse 12 40 Huljooyusajqnoly Huljooyuseajqnoly 12 2 K Clearing Jams When lt Check the originals gt lt The paper has jammed gt or lt Remove the jammed paper from gt appears on the display remove the jammed paper from the machine The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and the procedure for clearing the paper jam appears on the display and it remains there until the paper jam is entirely cleared Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use See Paper Requirements on p 2 7 Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine A CAUTION When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine do not allow necklaces bracelets
426. urn to the Main Menu screen Adjusting Color Balance Registering Color Balance This section describes how to register the color balance setting Up to four different settings can be stored Wheel to adjust the strength of each color then press OK 1 Press CD Main Menu Use V A 4 P or amp Scroll 2 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK Set Yellow Adjustment Adjust with Right Left Key or Dial AT 2 Additional Func To weaken the selected color move the adjust scale to the left To heighten the selected color move the 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to adjust scale to the right display lt Color Adjustment gt then press OK 6 Press the right Any key to select lt Recall a Register gt 5 lt a 100 E J LTR l i Binding Erase Color Balance Default lt y Collate Off Copies 1 Mode Memory J Preview Img Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Magenta 0 Cyan 0 Black 0 Back Recall Register J 4 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired color then press OK Set Color to Balance Yellow Strength Adjustment Yellow 0 Magenta 0 Cyan 0 Black 0 Back Set j Recall Register V 4 53 Bulkdo gt Adjusting Color Balance 7 8 4 54 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select the memory key that you want to store the color bal
427. use W A Scroll Wheel and numeric keys Ifyou want to change the value press Clear before entering the new value Ifyou enter a value outside the setting range a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen Erasing Shadows Lines W if you want to set the top left right and bottom widths independently Press the right Any key to select lt Adj Each Dim gt Set Frame Erase Width Adjust using up down or the dial 3 16 v 1 16 1_15 16 Enter mm Adj Each Dim 2 Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the desired frame erase borders then press OK Set Frame Erase Width Location of Set Originals Top 3 16 Left 3 16 Right 3 16 Bottom 3 16 Apply Settings Enter mm J Uniform Margin note To enter values in millimeters press the left Any key to select lt Enter mm gt When entering the value in millimeters you can also use V A Scroll Wheel and 8 numeric keys BHulAdo gt V 4 43 Bulkdo gt Erasing Shadows Lines 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to enter a Use 0 Q numeric keys to enter the frame erase width value then press OK 7 desired copy quantity 1 to 99 amp Set Frame Erase Width Adjust using up down or the dial Start Copy Frame Erase Settings 100 amp J LTR 12 Original Frame Erase 3 16 v 1 16 1_15 16
428. usting Base Color ses ssseessseesssessseesssesssseesseeesseessseess 4 19 2 Sided Copying serssrrs n 4 22 1 to 2 Sided COpying ssseessseesssessseesssessseesssseesssesssersssee 4 23 2 to 2 Sided COpying es sssesssseossesesseessreesseessseesseessseess 4 25 2 to 1 Sided Copyn Genssnaircrensennisiedianun 4 27 Enlarge Reduce Images ssscseessscsscssssssssssesesccesesssso 4 30 PrE CEZ OO M E E ee 4 30 Custom CODY RAO sessa 4 32 Selecting Image Quallity cccrrcrscsccsccsscccsees 4 34 Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 4 36 Adjusting Sharpness sscsissseesecovsevensccecsesvesssessssssesesesens 4 39 Erasing Shadows Lines ssessecsesssssssssssssssssesccesesssso 4 41 Original Frame EraSe seseesssessseesssessssessseessserssseesssessseess 4 42 Book Frame Eras 2 eee One ae ee eens Tee oe 4 45 Binding alc one nnne ne eet eee nee earn ete ere nee 4 48 Adjusting Color Balance ccccscssssseccececceseesees 4 51 Registering Color BalaNnCe a sassscidesessenssasrarviaasinneeion 4 53 Recalling Registered Color Balance cseseeeeen 4 55 Deleting Color Balance sssseseseesssessseesssessseesssseesseessss 4 56 COMALING COPIES siscassiaevstsissssatesenessaderencaecnasesncesereceessns 4 57 Making Multiple Copies ccccccscssssccsssssssscsceees 4 59 Checking Current Setting cccccscssssssceccescesees 4 60 Frequently Used Settings Mode Memory
429. ut and back cover and feeder open See Originals Requirements on p 2 2 See Paper Requirements on p 2 7 Specifications Copier Scanning Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Magnification Direct 1 1 1 0 Reduction 1 0 78 LGL gt LTR 1 0 64 11 x 17 gt LTR 1 0 50 11 x 17 gt STMT Enlargement 1 1 29 LTR gt 11 x 17 1 2 00 STMT gt 11 x 17 Auto Zoom 50 200 1 increments Copy Speed Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c Direct Color 22 ppm LTR Black 22 cpm LTR Color imageCLASS MF8450c Direct Color 17 com LTR Black 17 com LTR No of Copies Max 99 copies Warm Up Time less than 60 sec from when main power switch is turned on until standby display appears when temperature is 68 F 20 C and humidity is 65 Warm up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine First Print Time Platen glass Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c less than 13 sec LTR Color imageCLASS MF8450c less than 16 sec LTR Feeder Color imageCLASS MF9170c MF9150c less than 19 sec LTR Color imageCLASS MF8450c less than 22 sec LTR Printing Method Indirect electrostatic method On demand fixing Paper Handling Paper drawer 250 sheets 20 Ib 75 g m x 1 Stack Bypass tray 100 sheets 20 Ib 75 g m Paper Delivery 250 sheets 20 Ib 75 g m 14 3 xlpueddy xlpueddy 14 4 Specifications
430. w to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service see Set Up Computers and Software in the Starter Guide Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine the settings from the printer driver has priority Printing Documents from Gomputer This section is the explanation of the basic procedure for printing from the computer printer driver Make sure that the printer driver is installed on your computer To check if the driver is installed see Set Up Computers and Software in the Starter Guide For details on the printer driver settings see Online Help note Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using For details see the instruction manuals provided with the application software The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver f you are using a shared printer in the Print Server Point and Print environment it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service see Set Up Computers and Software in the Starter Guide The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is to
431. what you have to do to use the machine with the network Flowchart for Setting Up Network cccsscsssssssees 9 2 What is the Network cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 9 3 Overview of Network Functions ccccccccccccccccccces 9 4 D one O N yIOMIAN lt Flowchartifor Setting Up Network Follow the procedures in the flowchart below to set up each network function To print fax or scan over the network from your computer Install the driver using the network connection Starter Guide e Refer to Network Connection in Set Up Computers and Software e Manual e Refer to Set Up Computers and Software in Setting Up the Machine 9 2 To send e mails I faxes IPv4 Only To scan documents to FTP server IPv4 Only Setting IP addresses Starter Guide e Refer to Set Up Network Connection in Set Up the Machine e Manual e Refer to Setting and Checking the IP Address in Network Settings E mail I fax function settings for this machine e Manual e Refer to Setting Scan to E Mail and l fax in Network Settings FTP server settings e Manual e Refer to Setting Scan to File Server in Network Settings To scan documents to the computer s shared folder IPv4 Only Shared folder settings e Manual e Refer to Setting Scan to File Server in Network Settings File sending function settings fo
432. x p 5 104 Overview of Fax Functions 5 3 xe Xej D gt Introduction to Using Fax Functions This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions Be sure to set the following items first Your fax number Register your machine s fax number See Registering Your Machine s Fax Number on p 5 16 Your personal name or company name Register your name or company name See Registering the Machine s Name on p 5 14 Time and date Set the current time and date See Setting the Current Date and Time on p 5 12 Your telephone line type Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine See Setting the Type of Telephone Line on p 5 13 Fax receiving mode Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs See Methods for Receiving Faxes on p 5 4 Methods for Receiving Faxes Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents You can receive documents automatically or manually Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs The default setting is lt Auto RX gt NO NO NO Do you have a dedicated gt Receive faxes automatically and Receive faxes automatically and fax telephone line use telephone to receive calls use answering machine for calls YES YES YES V V V lt AutoRX gt lt Fax Tel Auto Switch gt lt Answer Mode gt lt Manual RX gt Auto RX Mode In
433. x E Sales FTP 1004 ftphost Canon FAX O32Xx000XX Details Set j NOTE To cancel a selected destination select the destination again and press OK to clear the check mark Use or P to select the index key e g ABC to restrict the display range of entries Select All to return to the full address list If the desired destination is not displayed use V A or Scroll Wheel to scroll to the desired destination You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select lt Details gt to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt to return to the previous screen Repeat step 11 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address then press the right Any key to select lt Set gt Group Select Destination for Group qaia lo le e e gt 2Canon USAC 03100000X sales I FA 1003 ifax E Sales FTP 1004 ftphost JE Canon FAX O32XXXXxxXX Details Set 13 Press the right Any key to select lt Register gt Group Register New Destination a Register Name gt GROUP0001 a Destination Registration gt 002 Back Register If you want to register another group address repeat from step 6 14 Press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Register New Destination Select Fax E mail Fax File Group 15 Press Co Main Menu
434. x 128 char Set Characters Press OK to enter the highlighted character or space and to determine the entry mode Press 4 P LV LA or Scroll Wheel to change the entry mode then press OK E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters lt A 1 gt Alphanumeric character entry mode lt Sym gt Symbol entry mode Select lt Backspace gt by pressing the left Any key to clear the entered characters one by one E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters Select lt Set gt by pressing the right Any key to complete the entry and return to the previous screen E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters NOTE You can also use numeric keys to enter numbers ulypew y Huls A sojeg aulydeW y Huls sojeg 1 20 x Telephone Line Setting The machine is set to automatic detection mode With some environments and telephone lines the machine may not detect the proper telephone line type If this happens follow the procedure below to set the telephone line type The default setting is lt Auto gt note Connect the telephone line cable before turning ON the machine if you use the automatic detection mode Press Co Main Menu 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Fax Settings gt then press OK Press the right Any key to select Communications Settings lt Additional Func gt amp Select Com
435. y 3 Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of toner cartridge and pull it horizontally L NRE Sc S MS EA wa Una SI FAY Ea I SDULUDdIUIL Replacing the Toner Cartridges 5 11 10 Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner G NOTE inside Do not pull the seal out at an angle Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface fold back the tab of the sealing tape A located at left side of the toner cartridge Do not open the drum protective shutter A f the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or stopped at midpoint toner may spill out If the Remove the sealing tape approx 18 7 8 toner gets into your eyes or mouth wash them inch long gently by hooking your fingers i noe aad oula itou c iaidhtin immediately with cold water and immediately p g g consult a physician the direction of the arrow f toner is adhered to the removed seal be careful not to dirty your hands or clothing by touching it If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner wash them immediately in cold water Do not use hot water Doing so may cause the toner to set permanently Replacing the Toner Cartridges 8 Hook your finger into the tab and remove 10 Align A of the toner cartridge that you the packing materials A located at right want to replace with the slots B to which side of the toner cartridge the label o
436. y Lock mode will not start automatically ata specified time The machine enters the Memory Lock mode only when you manually set the Memory Lock mode to lt On gt in step 6 Specify the time in 24 hour military time format for the machine to enter the Memory Lock mode using 0 numeric keys then press OK Memory Lock Start Settings Enter using the numeric keys 15 00 G NOTE If you make a mistake when entering the time press Clear to clear your entry then enter another four digit number 11 12 Specify the time in 24 hour military time format for the machine to leave the Memory Lock mode using 0 9 numeric keys then press OK Memory Lock End Time Enter using the numeric keys 08 30 note f you make a mistake when entering the time press Clear to clear your entry then enter another four digit number If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode 7 Press C_D Main Menu 2 Press the right Any key to select lt Additional Func gt Additional Func l 3 Use V LA or Scroll Wheel
437. y or specify the scaling value manually note Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using you may not be able to magnify the document Depending on the printer model you are using you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document configure the settings in the application The display may differ according to the operating system as well as the type and version of the printer driver Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine the settings from the printer driver has priority Display the Page Setup sheet x General Page Setup Finishing Paper Source Quality Profile Met ergs X ce Output Method E Print Bg Page Size Letter 7 4 pE Output Size Match Page Size 7 Copies 1 4 1 to 999 Orientation Portrait C Landscape 1 Page per Sheet Page Layout J Manual Scaling Scaling 100 7 25 to 200 Letter Scaling Auto View Settings I Watermark CONFIDENTIAL z EditwWatermark Page Options Restore Defaults Custom Paper Size Cancel Apply 2 Select page size of the document you created in the application from Page Size E Print xi General Page Setup Fini
438. y 2 gt lt Transparencies gt lt Labels gt lt Rough gt Press Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 2 21 eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO eIp W JUL pue sjeuIBLIO Setting Paper Size and Type For the Paper Drawer Paper cassette When you place other sizes and or types of paper follow this procedure to change the settings The default settings are lt LTR gt and lt PLAIN PAPER gt 1 Press C Main Menu 3 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Paper Settings gt then press OK 2 Press the right Any key to select Raditional Functions Select A 91 Volume Settings AM copy Common Settings AT A Communications Settings a Address Book Settings D Done J E Device Info 4 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select lt Drawer 1 gt or lt Drawer 2 gt then press OK i Only when the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 is attached Paper Settings amp Select a tack Bypass Paper Std gt Off a Drawer 1 gt No Settings a Drawer 2 gt No Settings Done 5 Use V A or Scroll Wheel to select paper size then press OK Paper Size Stack Bypass Tray Set to LTR LTR LGL STMT EXEC FLSC AZB Sizes j You can select from the following paper sizes lt TR Gl EECA lt FLSG gt OFS aD OFI gt lt M OFI gt f you use A B size paper press the right Any key to select lt A B Sizes gt and perform t
439. y Steps gt and follow the instructions on the display to replace the toner cartridge Device Information amp Done Paper Info Toner g O K Empty OU ELR Y OK c OK Avail Mem 99 MOK Recovery Steps Press CoD Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen ulypew y Huls A sojeg g Checking the Device Information On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status 7 Press Co Main Menu 3 Press Co Main Menu return to the Main Menu screen You can also return to the Main Menu screen by pressing OK 2 Press the left Any key to select lt Device Info gt Device Information amp Done Paper Info 8 U Avail Mem 99 Toner The status of toner is displayed 2 Available Memory The remaining amount of available system memory is displayed in percentage 3 Paper Information The paper supply and the paper type paper size loaded in the paper drawer s are displayed The paper drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer Paper Drawer 2 is attached Entering Characters For screens that require alphanumeric entries follow the procedure below to enter characters Use 4 P or Scroll Wheel to move the cursor position left or right E mail Address Max 128 char Set Characters Use V and A to move the cursor position up and down E mail Address Ma
440. y used send settings for future use See Fax in the e Manual If you want to divide multiple images into single pages and send each page as a separate file use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt B amp W TIFF Divide into Pages gt then press OK If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them use W LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt B amp W TIFF Do Not Divide into Pages gt then press OK 7 9 Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings john xxx xxx xx 200x200 dpi Dest 1 jm Density 0 Bg Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete To cancel scanning press the left Any key to select lt Cancel gt or press 6 Stop Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select the original size then press OK Set Original Size LTR LGL STMT Back A B Sizes Press Start Start Send Resolution Settings john xxx xxx xx 200x200 dpi Dest 1 Density 0 Bg a Text Photo 2 Sided Originals Off Confirm Erase Add Destination 10 Basic Methods for Sending PG Faxes Follow the instructions on the display then press Start once for each original 0001 lt P 1 Ready to s
441. ys to enter the desired copy quantity 1 to 99 Start Copy 2 Sided Settings 100 J LTR 12 p m Auto color Select as Drawer 1 LTR Eip 1 Sided to 2 Sided Mode Memory J Preview Img 1 1 Press Start 12 0002 P 1 Printing 100 E J LTR Sheet Copies Print Status 4 12 is 99 C Cancel Done a Avail Mem If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass set an original and press Start once for each page After scanning all originals press the right Any key to select lt Done gt Press C Main Menu to return to the Main Menu screen 2 to 2 Sided Copying note When you use the feeder to make two sided copies from two sided originals the original size must be LTR LGL FLSC or A4 1 Wy Set originals Z Z DRL ES A To y O For details see Placing Originals on p 2 4 Press C Main Menu Use V LA or Scroll Wheel to select lt Copy gt then press OK AT A Additional Func 4 5 2 Sided Copying Use W A or Scroll Wheel to display lt Various 2 Sided Settings gt then press OK Various 2 Sided Settings 100 E L LTR eB m Auto color Select os Drawer 1 LTR j Density 0 Bg E 2 Sided Off Mode Memory Preview Img Use W A or Scroll Wheel to select lt 2 Sided to 2 Sided gt then press OK Set 2 Sided Copy Ty

Canon MF8450c Operation Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents